PUNJAB HEALTH SYSTEM

CORPORATION

VOLUME - 2

SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATIONS
CIVIL WORK
 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Agency shall have to procure necessary equipment and

apparatus for conducting field tests at site such as gradation of
materials, Aggregate impact value of aggregates, sieve analysis
of soils, slump test of concrete, cold bend test of steel,
compacted DBD of soil and testing of %age of bitumen in the
bitumen mixes etc. apparatus required for field laboratories are
tabulated as under. The contractor shall set up a quality control
field laboratory equipped with the test equipments indicated
underneath and employ trained staff to carry out periodical tests,
as per directions and procedure laid down by the Engineer-in-
charge/Quality Control Cell of PHSC. The record of test results
shall be maintained properly at site of work.

a) BUILDING WORK
i) Pan Balance with standard set of weights up to 5 kg.
ii) Physical balance with standard set of weight up to 2 kg
along with fractional weights.
iii) Sieve analysis set for fine aggregate.
iv) Sieve analysis set for coarse aggregates.
v) Moulds of (15 cm x 15 cm x 15 cm) for moulding concrete
cubes)
vi) Slump test apparatus for concrete.
vii) Aggregate impact value machine.
viii) Gas burner.
ix) Necessary Glass Ware and Trays etc.
x) Compressive testing machine with calibration test
certificate.
xi) Oven for tests of bricks.
xii) Dumpy level for setting out of works.

a) Sub grade soil shall be laid in max 9” thick layers and shall be
compacted to max DBD at optimum moisture content.

b) For specialized tests, the services of approved laboratories shall

be taken. Sealed samples shall be forwarded by the Engineer-in-
charge / his representative to a specific laboratory for specified
tests and results shall be also obtained by him. Testing charges
for such tests shall be borne by the contractual agency. However
Engineer-in-charge is also empowered to get any of the field test
conducted through approved labs occasionally.

c) Fields tests, Lab tests and their frequency for the various
materials and other activities which shall have to be observed is
tabulated as under to the List of Mandatory Tests:-
 LIST OF MANDATORY TESTS

Sr. No. Name of tests Frequency of tests for Whether

Works upto Above Rs.2.00 field test or
Rs.2.00 crores crores lab. Test

1. Slump Test Two tests/day Two tests /day Field Test

or one test per or one test per
50 cum of 50 cum of
concrete concrete
whichever is whichever is
more more.
2. Moulding of concrete cubes / 12 moulds per -same- Field test
Tests of crushing strength. day. 6 Nos. for
7 days and 6
Nos. for 28
days or 3
mould for 7 day
and 28 day
strength
3. Gradation of coarse One test per 20 -same- Field test
Aggregate cum
4. Zoning and FM of Fine One test per 50 -same- Field test
Aggregates cum
5. Silt contents One test per 50 -same- -do-
cum
6. Aggregate impact value test One test per 50 -same- -do-
cum
7. Dimension test of bricks 2 No. samples -same- -do-
of 5 bricks each
per 50000 Nos.
bricks supply
8. Water absorption of bricks 5 No. bricks per -same- -do-
50000 bricks
supply
9. Crushing strength of bricks 5 Nos. bricks -same- -do-
per 50000
bricks
10. Consistency, initiala & final One test for One test for Lab test
setting time & 7/28 days every 1000 every 3000
compressive strength of bags(or part bags supply
cement. (For approved thereof )
makes not required) supply
11. Yield strength of steel Two test for -same- Lab test
reinforcement. (For approved every 30T(or
makes not required) part thereof )
supply of
strength one of
dia below 25
mm & one
above 25 mm
dia
12. Cold bend test of steel Two tests for -same- Field test
every supply
d) INSPECTION OF WORK
A necessary testing kit for the inspection of work made available
as required by the Engineer-in-charge.

e) During the inspection if any work or its portion is, found to be

substandard it shall have to be dismantled and should be re
constructed by the contractual agency at his own cost.

2. All testing procedures shall be as per Punjab PWD

specifications/ISI standards. Frequency of the mandatory test
shall be carried out as per table of “List of Mandatory Tests”. For
all materials, as per “list of approved makes” the contractor shall
submit manufacturers test certificates and no testing of such
materials will be required, unless otherwise the Engineer-in-
charge have these materials tested from the Govt. recognized
laboratories / Engineering Colleges / Polytechnic at the cost of
the construction agency.

3. Areas, where the sulphate contents in soil and sub soils water
are beyond permissible limits, the cement work shall be executed
for all foundations & masonry of Super structure with sulphate
resistant cement only.

4. In sulphate prone areas, where the intensity of sulphate is higher

in Sub Soil Water only canal water shall be used for mixing and
curing purposes.

5. Consumption of material: Although all the material required for

construction of work are to be arranged by the contractor but the
important materials such as cement, steel, lead, conduit pipe and
cable etc. brought at site by the contractor shall be got checked
from Sub-Divisional Engineer-in-charge and be entered in the
site register for their source and brands. These materials shall
not be removed from site by the contractor without the prior
approval from the Executive Engineer-in-charge.

In case the consumption of materials is short upto 3% in final

measurement of the theoretical quantity, the recovery of the
material will be effected from contractor for less consumption on
market rates of material. However short consumption of material
beyond 3% recovery shall be effected at market rate upto 3% in
final measurements and double the market rate beyond that.

For short consumption beyond 3% in final measurements the

Executive Engineer (Civil) will investigate the cause and report to
Chief Engineer whose decision for penalizing the contractor over
and above the recovery part mentioned above will be final.
 Two Performa have been attached as Annexure I & II which are
to be maintained for important materials, brought at site, their
consumption & Daily balance.

6. INSPECTION & TESTING OF MATERIALS

6.1 Contractor shall be required to produce manufacturer’s test

certificates for the particular batch of materials supplied to him.
The test carried out shall be as per the relevant Indian
Standards.

6.2 For examination and testing of materials and works at the site
contractor shall provide all testing and gauging equipment
necessary but not limited to the following:
a) Steel tapes.
b) Weighing machines.
c) Plum bobs, spirit levels, hammers.
d) Micrometers.
e) Hydraulic test machine, pressure gauge, flow meter etc.

6.3 All such equipment shall be tested for the calibration at any
approve laboratory, if required by the Engineer-in-charge.

6.4 All testing equipment should be located at the site.

6.5 The contractor shall carry out the various tests as enumerated in
the relevant technical specifications.

6.6 All tests whether on the field or outside concerning the execution
of the work and supply of materials by the contractor shall be
carried out by the contractor at his own cost.

6.7 The work is subjected to inspection at all times by the Engineer-

in-charge. The contractor shall carry out all instructions given
during inspection and shall ensure that the work is being carried
out according to the technical specifications of this tender. The
technical documents will be furnished to him during the
performance of the work and the relevant codes of practice.

6.8 The contractor shall provide for purpose of inspection access

ladders, lighting and necessary instruments at his own cost.

6.9 All results of inspection and tests will be recorded in the

inspection reports, Performa of which will be approved by the
Engineer-in-charge. These reports shall form part of the
completion documents.
6.10 Any work not conforming to the execution drawings,
specifications or codes shall be rejected forth with and the
contractor shall carry it out as per the specification at his own
cost.

6.11 Piping system shall be tested as specified under the relevant

clause of the specifications and shall be performed in the
presence of the Engineer-in-charge.

6.12 All materials and equipments found defective shall be replaced

and the whole work again tested to meet the requirements of the
specifications, at the cost of the contractor.

6.13 Contractor shall perform all such tests may that be necessary
and required by the local authorities to meet the municipal or
other bye-laws in force at his own cost.

6.14 Contractor shall provide free of cost all labour, equipment and
materials for the performance of the test.

7. TESTING OF SOIL WASTE VENT & RW PIPE.

7.1 Before use at site, all C.I. Soil pipes shall be tested by filling up
with water for at least 10 minutes. After filling pipes shall be
struck with a hammer and inspected for blow holes and cracks.
All defective pipes shall be rejected and removed from the site
within 48 hours. Pipes with minor seating shall be accepted at
the discretion of the Engineer-in-charge.

7.2 Pipes shall be tested after installation, by filling up the stack with
water. All openings and connections shall be suitably plugged.
The total head in the stack shall however not exceed 5 m.

7.3 Alternately contractor may test all soil and waste stacks by a
smoke testing machine. Smoke shall be pumped into the stack
after plugging all inlets and connections. The top end shall
however be left open. The stack shall than be observed for
leakages and all defective pipes and fittings removed or repaired
as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.

8. TESTING OF GI PIPES, FITTINGS & VALVES.

All pipes, fittings and valves shall be tested by hydrostatic

pressure of 7.5 kg/sq.cm.
8.1 Pressure shall be maintained for a period of at least 120 minutes
without any drop in the pressure after fixing at site. At least
register shall be maintained and all entries shall be signed and
dated by contractor(s) and Engineer-in-charge.

8.2 In addition to the sectional testing carried out during the

construction contractor shall rest the entire installation after
connections to the overhead tanks or pumping system to mains.
He shall rectify all leakages, and shall replace all defective
materials in the system. Any damage done due to carelessness,
open or burst pipes or failure of fittings, to the building, furniture
and fixtures shall be made good during the defects liability period
without any extra cost.

8.3 After commissioning of the water supply system, contractor shall

test each valve by closing and opening it a number of times to
observe if it is working efficiently. Valves which do not effectively
operate shall be replaced by new ones at no extra cost and the
same shall be tested as above.

9. TESTING OF SEWER & STORM WATER

9.1 All lengths of the sewer and drain shall be fully tested for water
tightness by means of water pressure maintained for not less
than 30 minutes. Testing shall be carried out from man hole to
man hole. All pipes shall be subjected to a test pressure of at
least, 1.5 meter head of water at the highest point. Pressure
shall, however, not exceed 6 meter head at any point. The pipes
shall be plugged preferably with standard design plugs with
rubber plugs on both ends. The upper end shall, however, be
connected to a pipe for filling with water and getting the required
head.

A test register shall be maintained which shall be signed and

dated by contractor(s), Engineer-in-charge and representative of
Architect/Consultants.

10. TESTING OF CAST IRON PIPES

10.1 All cast iron pipes for drainage shall be tested to a hydraulic test
of 3 meter head. Test for straightness shall be same as for
stoneware pipe given in clause 5.4. A test register shall be
maintained which shall be signed and dated by contractor,
Engineer-in-charge and representative of Architect/Consultant.

11. TESTING OF SPRINKLING SYSTEM

11.1 All Pipes in the system shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure
of 14.5 kg / sq.cm without drop in pressure for at least two
hours. Rectify all leakages, make adjustments and retest as
required.
 SPECIFICATION OF MATERIALS
All items of works shall be executed as per Punjab PWD specifications
(latest edition with up to date amendment). Any item or part of the
item not covered in Punjab PWD specifications shall be executed as per
relevant ISI specification. The brief specifications of main materials
involved and items to be executed are a given below.

(A) MATERIALS

1. BRICKS
Bricks for masonry work in foundations as well as in
superstructure, shall be 1st class brunt clay bricks conforming to
Punjab PWD specifications 3.5 periodical sampling and testing of
bricks shall be carried out as per appendix No. IV of Punjab PWD
specifications. First class burnt clay bricks shall have a minimum
crushing strength of 105 kg / cm2 (arithmetic mean of five bricks
of a sample) and any individual brick shall not fall below the
average strength by more than 20%. Water absorption of the
first class bricks shall not be more than 20% of its own dry
weight after 24 hours immersion in cold water and it shall not
show appreciable sign of efflorescence on testing.

Fresh bricks drawn from Kiln shall
weeks in summers & three weeks
masonry due to initial expansion
properly stacked bricks at the site
shall be used.
not be used at least for two
in winters to avoid cracks in
of bricks. Only stored and
of work, prior to such items

2. CEMENT
Ordinary Portland cement (OPC) 43 grade as per IS 8112-1989
with latest amendments or PPC after ensuring that PPC confirms
to IS 1489 (Part-I) with suitable increase in stripping time for
form work as laid down in clause 11.3 IS 456-2000 including
complying to minimum curing period 14 days as per provided in
clause 13.5 of 456-2000 for all type of works. Cement packed in
low density polythene bags should be allowed. Cement shall be
stored and stacked at the site of work according to clause 8 of
Punjab PWD Specification No. 3.12

In no case, the cement shall be procured for requirement beyond

3 months and shall also be consumed within three months time.
All such cements, which shall be having storing age more than
three months or otherwise appeared to be deteriorated, shall be
got retested for compressive strength and initial and final setting
time before use. Decision for equivalent use or no use of such
 cements for works other than concreting shall be taken by
Superintending Engineer (Civil) and shall be final and binding.

In south western districts of Punjab, where the percentage of

sulphates and chlorides is evident in the soils and ground water,
sulphate resistant cement as per relevant IS-12330
specifications shall be used, for masonry work both in
foundations and superstructure and RCC/PCC work in foundation
and plinth.

3. STEEL REINFORCEMENT
TMT Bars having minimum strength of 500 N/mm2 confirming to
IS 1786-2008 latest edition shall be used as reinforcement for
RCC works. Binding wire shall be confirming to IS-432.

All steel shall be sound and free from cracks surface flaws
laminations, rough and imperfect edges and all other defects.

The variation in weight per metre length of the bars shall be

permitted only up to the following limits:

6 mm & 8 mm +7%
10 mm & 12 mm +4%
16 mm & above +3%

4. STRUCTURAL STEEL
Structural steel such as angle section, T-sections, I-sections,
channels & steel plates shall be conforming to IS: 226 - with
latest revision.
5. WATER
Water for all purposes of preparing, mortars, concrete and curing
of masonry and concrete works in construction shall conform to
Punjab PWD specification 3.1.

In area of Bathinda, Faridkot Mansa and Ferozepur, where the

ground water contains excessive soluble salts it shall not be
permitted for use, but the canal water shall have to be arranged
for use in construction work. Nothing extra shall be payable for
using canal water.

6. EARTH
Earth for embankment and backfills in masonry works etc. shall
be free from lumps, roots, grass, clods and large pieces of
stones, and shall be conforming to Punjab PWD specification No.
3.2.

7. FLAT BRICK TILES

 Flat brick tiles shall conform to Punjab PWD specification No. 3.6.

8. BRICK BALLAST
Bricks ballast for use in foundation and under floors shall
conform to Punjab PWD specification No. 3.7. In Chandigarh and
nearby area even shingle of the same size shall also be
permitted.

9. FINE AGGREGATE
The FM of sand shall be 2.0-3.50 as per latest IS–383

It shall be free from harmful impurities and deleterious

substances. In case fine dust and silt is found more than 4% the
same shall be washed thoroughly before use.

10. SAND FOR PLASTERING AND MORTARS

Zone III and Zone IV sand as per IS: 383-with latest revision
shall be allowed for preparing mortars and plaster mortars. It
shall also not contain harmful impurities and deleterious
substance. In case fine dust and silt found more than 4% the
same shall be washed thoroughly before use.

11. COARSE AGGREGATE

Unless, otherwise specified or ordered, only ¾” (20mm) nominal
size crushed aggregate shall be used as coarse aggregate for
concreting purposes in slabs, beams, columns, in superstructure
and foundations. The same size aggregate shall be used for
conglomerate floors also.

In lintels and slabs having thickness less than 12 cm, 12.5 mm

nominal size crushed aggregate shall be used. Crushed
aggregate shall not be having aggregate impact valve more than
30 and water absorption more than 2%.

12. GLASS PANES

Thickness of glass panes according to the size of opening and its
quality shall conform to Punjab PWD specification No. 3.43. Only
the 1st quality glass panes of popular brands shall be permitted
for use. Glass panes shall be checked both for the required
thickness, as well as weight per unit area.

13. BITUMEN FOR COATING DPC AND ROOF TOP

25/85 Bitumen having penetration value 25 and softening point
850 C, as per PWD specification No. 3.41 shall only be permitted
for bitumen coatings of roof top and D.P.C.
14. TIMBER / JOINERY
Timber for joinery purposes shall conform in general to Punjab
PWD specification 3.15.
15. THE PLYWOOD
The plywood in general shall be conforming to Punjab PWD
specification 3.16. For cupboards shutters the specified ply
should be urea bonded whereas for flush doors shutters the
specified ply to be used shall be phenol bonded only.

16. WIRE GAUGE

Wire gauge for joinery purposes shall conforms to Punjab PWD
specification 3.25.

17. MARBLE CHIPPINGS

The marble chippings shall be conforming to Punjab PWD
specification 3.49. Marble chippings of specified size of
Dehradoon, Makrana or Udaipur may be used.

18. OTHER MATERIALS

18.1 All other materials required for the construction shall conform to
relevant Punjab PWD Specification or latest ISI specification,
depending upon the product.

18.2 White Cement.

Wherever is to be used shall comply with Indian Standard IS:

269 and its Colour shall be pure white. One of the popular brand
of JK or Birla is approved for use in relevant items.

18.3 Paints and allied material

Only first quality paints shall be used for the finishing item
wherever required. Material shall be as per the following IS
specification wooden & metallic surface:

A) Synthetic enamel (for exterior uses finish IS: 520)

B) (Interior uses) Synthetic enamel with semi glass finish IS: 133

1. Priming coat IS: 102

2. Zinc chromate primer on iron steel IS: 107
3. Aluminium paint – IS: 165
4. Turpentine oil – IS: 83
5. Linseed oil – IS 77, 75 & 78
6. Varnish (Exterior) – IS: 338
7. Varnish Interior – IS 337
8. Filler for enamel paints – IS: 110
9. Wood filler – IS: 345
10. Putty for wooden frame – IS: 419
11. Putty for metal frame – IS: 420
12. Brushes – IS: 384
13. Paint remover – IS: 430
14. Shellac – IS: 16
15. Denatured Spirit – IS: 234

19. DRY DISTEMPER

As per Punjab PWD specification – 3.39
OBD as per Punjab PWD specification – 3.40

20. White Glazed tile

The white glazed tile shall be provided as per PWD Specification

no 3.47 and these should be as per IS: 777. The size shall be
used as specified.

21. CI Pipe fitting (Rain water pipe)

The pipes shall be manufactured from close d grained CI and
shall satisfy IS: 1230 in all respects. The number of pipes and
the dia shall be worked out on the basis of 1” Sq. of CSA for
every 60 sq ft roof area as per PWD specifications No 3.54.
the min weight v/s nominal i/d shall be as under:-

Nominal Weight Length Size of Wall

(mm) (Kg) (m) socket Thickness
(mm)
100 14 1.8 114.4 3.2

150 26 1.8 166.2 3.6

SPECIFICATIONS OF WORKS

A–1 INTERNAL CIVIL WORKS

1. EARTHWORK IN EXCAVATION Embankments & Cuttings.

Making up of plinths shall be carried out as per Punjab PWD
specification 6.2 Source of soil for filling purposes shall have to
be got approved from Engineer-in-charge.

2. COMPACTION OF EARTH WORK

Compaction of earth work shall be carried out as per Punjab PWD
specification 6.12.

3. EARTH WORK EXCAVATION OF FOUNDATIONS AND

FILLING OF TRENCHES AND FILLING UNDER FLOORS
Punjab PWD specification No. 6.5 and 6.6

4. DEMOLITION
Demolition, if any involves shall be carried out as per Punjab
PWD specification 8.1

5. CENTERING AND SHUTTERING

(Technical specification & contract specification) Centering and
shuttering shall be carried out as per Punjab PWD specification
9.1 and 9.2.

6. CEMENT CONCRETE FOR ORDINARY STRUCTURES

Cement concrete for ordinary structures shall be executed as per
Punjab PWD specification 10.4.

7. REINFORCED CONCRETE
For all works in super structure / foundation 1:1.5:3 nominal mix
by volume shall be used for achieving strength of M 20 concrete.

Technical specification No. 10.7 of reinforced concrete shall be

followed subject to the conditions that:

a) Only crushed coarse aggregates shall be used for

concreting.
b) Steel shall be TMT having minimum strength 415 n/mm2
and conforming to IS:1786-with latest revision.

8. D.P.C.
Item of DPC shall be executed as per Punjab PWD specification
10.11.
9. PERCAST LINTELS
All lintels upto 4’-6” in length in masonry work over doors and
windows shall not laid Cast-in-Situ but shall be precast as per
instruction of Engineer-in-charge and shall be hoisted and placed
at appropriate level during masonry work, lintels beyond 4’-6”
length shall be laid in Situ.

Lintels will be cast over a pucca platform and shall be cured for
at least 10 days in a tank built at site and be dried completely
before placing.

10. BRICK MASONRY

10.1 Wherever the brick masonry shall involve in the execution of

work, the same shall be carried out as brick 1st class as per
Punjab PWD specifications No. 11.1. All the instructions
regarding workmanship such a bond and laying, joints
straightness, face work raking of joints and scaffolding etc. shall
be followed as per the specifications.

The masonry shall be carried out in the specified cement mortar

for the locations as per structural drawings.

10.2 Brick and tile Jalies: Wherever brick or brick tile jail is to be
provided. It should have to be executed as per drawings and the
relevant specification of Punjab PWD 11.12 shall be followed.

10.3 Corbelling, coping Cornices: Corbelling copping cornices shall be

executed as per specifications 11.13 of Punjab PWD specification.

10.4 4½” and 3” thick masonry partition walls shall be constructed as

per Punjab PWD specifications 11.8.

11. ROOFING AND WATER PROOFING TREATMENTS /

DRAINAGE

11.1 Roof tops shall be painted with 85/25 bitumen as per Punjab
PWD specification 13.11 and tile terracing shall be laid as per
specification 13.9.

Earth work over roof shall be done as per Punjab PWD

specification 6.7 and mud plaster as per specification 15.6.

Slopes in the tile terracing shall be provided in the earth work

over roof itself as per the instructions of the Engineer-in-charge.
Slopes in tile terracing shall be designed in such a manner that
each rain water pipe will drain an area of 400-600 sq.ft.
11.2 Rain water pipes shall be fixed as per Punjab PWD specification
13.14 and as per the detailed drawings attached with DNIT.

11.3 Execution of top and bottom khurras and spouts shall be done as
per Punjab PWD specifications 13.15.

11.4 Unless, otherwise specified, the normal bitumen felt water

proofing treatment shall be executed as per Punjab PWD
specifications 13.12.

11.5 Wherever required the water proofing of roofs with LDPE shall be
as per manufacturers specification approved by the Engineer-in-
charge.

12. FLOORINGS AND DADOS

Various type of flooring and dados shall be executed as per
chapter 14 of Punjab PWD specification as detailed below.

a) Conglomerate flooring As per PB. PWD specification No.

14.2
b) Terrazzo flooring As per 14.6
c) Precast terrazzo tile flooring As per 14.7
d) White glazed tile flooring As per 14.8
e) Marble flooring As per 14.9
f) Marble lining As per 14.10
g) Rough red stone flooring As per 14.11
h) Kota stone flooring As per 14.12
i) Rough Kota stone flooring As per 14.13
j) Kota stone lining As per 14.14

12.1 Wherever required, the conglomerate flooring shall be executed

as per Punjab PWD specifications 14.2 Glass strips if required
shall be paid as NS items.

12.2 Terrazzo flooring shall be carried out as per specification 14.6 of

Punjab PWD specification. The top layer shall be 6/6/12 mm
thick laid with cement and marble chippings in the ratio 1:1½
without using marble powder. The marble chippings shall be of
appropriate size of Dehradun or Udaypur.
12.3 Precast terrazzo flooring shall be carried out only with the
approved make of tiles and of approved shade. The base shall be
laid as per the required specifications and shall be cleaned off all
dirt, scum and loose materials before fixing tiles. In case of
upper floors the CC slab shall be brushed or broomed when the
concrete is green. The joint shall be kept as close as possible but
not wider than 1.5 mm after putting the tiles and topping, the
surplus cement slurry comes out of the joints shall be cleaned off
with saw dust.

12.4 Marble flooring shall be carried out with Dungri adanga marble /
dongri regular grey streaks tiles / slabs as per drawings and
specification 14.9 of Punjab PWD specifications but as per market
survey marble is available only from 16 mm to 18 mm thickness,
which is allowed.

12.5 Kotah stone flooring shall be carried out as per specification No.
14.12. Kotah stone shall not be used less than 22’x22’ in size
unless and otherwise specified in drawings.

12.6 Dados: White glazed tiles in dado shall be executed with first
quality glazed tiles of approved make as per requirements
specified in drawings.

12.7 Skirting of terrazzo, kotah stone or marble shall be executed as

per the relevant specification of chapter No. 14 of Punjab PWD
specification.

13. CUPBOARD SHUTTERS

Cupboard shutters shall consist of factory manufactured solid
flush door shutters 30 mm thick as per Punjab PWD specification
No. 17.10.

14. FLUSH DOOR SHUTTERS

14.1 Flush doors shall consist of factory manufactured solid flush door
shutters 40 mm thick as per Punjab PWD specification No 17.10.

15. GLAZED WINDOWS SHUTTERS

Fixed glazing and openable window shutters in glazing shall be
formed out of standard steel sections as per Punjab PWD
specifications no 18.10 and as per drawings.

The glass shall be used 26oz up to 6 sq. ft & 32oz above 65 sq.ft.

16. WIRE GAUGE SHUTTERS

 Wire gauge shutters shall be as per Punjab PWD specification No.
17.6

17. DOORS, WINDOWS AND SHUTTERS OTHER THAN WOODEN

a) Aluminium door, windows and ventilators As per IS1948-

1961
& IS 1949-1961
b) Collapsible gates As per IS10521-
1983
c) Steel rolling shutters As per IS 6248-
1979
d) Steel door frames As per IS 4351–
1976
e) Steel doors, windows and ventilators As per IS 1038-
1983
& Pb. PWD
specification
18.10
f) Pressed steel chowkhats

Factory made pressed steel chowkhats shall be manufactured out

of 18 gauge MS sheet (1.25 mm thick) cutting bending
straightening and finishing shall be mechanical and not manual.
Chowkhats shall be framed as per detailed drawing with 6 mm
fillet seam welding.

The pressed steel chowkhats shall be provided with two coats of

steel primer and the chowkhats cavity shall be filled with 1:3:6
concrete, prior to fixing at site. It shall conform to CSR items
18.23 i and ii.

18. PLASTERING, POINTING, RENDERING

Cement plaster will be executed in the specified mortars as per
Punjab PWD specification 15.1 and 15.2. For cement Rendering
Punjab PWD specification No. 15.5 shall be followed and for
cement pointing 15.8.

19. PAINTING, WHITE WASHING AND DISTEMPERING

These items shall be executed as per relevant specifications of
Punjab PWD (B&R)

19.1 Painting & Varnishing work shall be executed as per relevant

specification of Punjab PWD (B&R)

19.2 Painting on plastered / concrete surface: The plastered surface

above dado in operation theatres and labour rooms shall be
 finished with acrylic emulsion over prepared surface per relevant
specification of Punjab PWD specification. Only 1st quality paint /
emulsion shall be used. The item shall be executed as per
general specification of painting 16.1.

19.3 Painting wooden surfaces: These shall be painted with 1st

quality approved brand of paint and execution of item shall be
carried out as per Punjab PWD specification 16.1 to 16.2

Painting Iron S and Steel Work: Iron and steel work shall be
painted as per specification No. 16.3 of Punjab PWD
specification. The first coat shall be applied of red oxide primer of
1st quality. The subsequent coats shall be of approved shade and
approved brands of 1st quality paints.

19.4 White washing shall be executed as per Punjab PWD specification

No. 15.10 and colour washing shall be executed as per Punjab
PWD specification No. 15.11.

19.5 Oil bound distempers of the approved brand and shades shall be
executed as per specification No. 15.12.

19.6 Cement based paints: Cement based paints of approved make

and shade shall be executed as per Punjab PWD specification
15.13

20. ROAD WORKS

20.1 Latest edition of M.O.S.T SPECIFICATION shall be followed for

Road Work

20.2 BITUMEN: Bitumen of grade S-80/100 OR S-40/60 is to be used

for road works.

20.3 FILLING OF POT HOLES: Pot holes lesser than 35 mm deep

shall only be filled with premixed material of mix seal
specification. The pot holes deeper than 35 mm shall be filled
with BUSG Material and shall be finished with premix material of
mix seal specifications.

20.4 MIXED SEAL SURFACING: This item shall be executed as per

M.O.S.T Specification latest edition. For every 10 sqm m area
0.27 cum of crushed stone aggregate as per the gradation given
below shall be used with 19 kg. Bitumen road surface incase of
black tops shall be painted with tack coat @ 5 kg per 10 sqm and
WBM surface @ 10 kg per 10 sqm area. The premixed material
 shall be prepared at hot mix plant and shall be laid with paver
finisher.

20.5 GRADING OF CRUSHED AGGREGATE

Sieve Designation Percent by Weight passing

13.2 mm 100
11.2 mm 88 - 100
5.6 mm 31 - 52
2.8 mm 5 - 25
90 microns 0-5

21. EXPANSION JOINTS

21.1 Expansion joints shall be provided in the buildings wherever

required. The conditions for providing expansion joints are as
under.

1. Where the length of the building blocks exceed 50 metres.

2. All the components such as ramps stairs, links of corridors
with the main building.
3. In case of provision for horizontal further expansion be
provided.
4. In case of level differences exceeding 1.8 mts.

21.2 Type of expansion joint: In case of larger blocks framed

structure, only double column, double beam expansion joints
shall be provided.

a) In case of masonry blocks double beam expansion joints

will be provided along with expansion joints on walls.
b) In case of connecting link corridors cantilever type of
expansion joints will be provided. This joints shall be
maintained in the flooring itself preferably or will be
covered with 300 mm wide separate piece of flooring
material specified as per details in the drawings.

21.3 Expansion joints in the wall shall be covered from inside with 14
gauge aluminium sheet 150 mm wide fixed with appropriate
fastener on one side of the wall. In no case bracket type
expansion joints will be provided.

22. FALSE CEILING

False ceiling 12.5 mm thick gyp board ceiling shall be provided in
area specified in the drawings. The frame work shall consist of GI
runners and cross runners suspended by GI hangers as specified
 in the BOQ item. The manufacturers specifications shall be got
approved from the Engineer-in-charge before commencement of
work.

23. ANTI TERMITE TREATMENT

23.1 Sub-terrain termites are responsible for most of the termite

damages in buildings. Typically, they form nest or colonies
underground, in the soil near ground level in a stump or other
suitable piece of timber in a conical or dome shaped mound. The
termites find access to the super structure of the building either
through the timber buried in the ground or by means of mud
shelter tubes constructed over unprotected foundations.

Termite control in existing as well as new building structures is

very important, as the damage likely to be caused by the
termites to wooden members of building and household article
like furniture, clothing, stationary etc. is considerable i.e.
preconstruction chemical treatment for existing buildings.

Prevention of the termite from reaching the super structure of

the building and its contents can be achieved by creating a
chemical barrier between the ground, from where the termites
come and other contents of the building which may form food for
the termites. This is achieved by treating the soil beneath the
building and around the foundation with a suitable insecticide.

23.1.1 Chemicals: Chemicals are available in concentrated form in

the market and concentration is indicated on the sealed
containers. To achieve the specified percentage of
concentration, chemical should be diluted with water in
required quantity before it is used. Graduated containers
shall be used for dilution of chemicals with water in the
required proportion to achieve the desired percentage of
concentration. For example to dilute chemical of 30%
concentration, 59 parts of water shall be added to one part
of chemical for achieving 0.5% concentration.

23.1.2 Measurements: concentrated chemical in sealed containers

shall be measured in litres. Chemicals of different types
and concentration shall be measured separately.

23.1.3 Rate: The rate for the concentrated chemical shall be

include the cost of material, containers and all the
operations involved in transportation and delivery at the
place specified.
23.2 Safety precautions: All chemical used for anti-termite
treatment are POISONS. These chemicals can have an
adverse effect upon health when absorbed through the
skin, inhaled as vapours or spray mists or swallowed.

The containers having emulsifiable concentrates shall be

clearly labeled and kept securely closed in stores so that
children or pet cannot get at them storage and mixing of
concentrates shall not be done near any source or flame.
Persons using these chemical shall be warned that
absorption through skin is the most likely source of
accidental poisoning. Particular care shall be taken to
prevent skin contact with concentrates and prolonged
exposure to dilute emulsion of workers shall also be
avoided. After handling the concentrates or dilute
emulsion, workers shall wash themselves with soap and
water, clean clothing especially before eating and smoking.
In the event severe contamination, clothing shall be
removed at once and the skin washed with soap and water.
If chemical has splashed into the eyes they shall be flushed
with plenty of soap and water and immediate medical
attention shall be sought.

Care should be taken in the application of chemicals to see

that they are not allowed to contaminate wells or springs
which serve as source of drinking water.
23.3 Pre-construction Chemical Treatment

23.3.1 Chemical treatment of soils for the protection of buildings

from attack of subterranean termites shall be done as per
IS: 6313 (part II) – with latest revisions.

Treatment shall be got done only from the approved

specialized agencies using the chemical procured
specialized agencies or using the chemical procured
directly by Engineer-in-charge from reputed and authorized
dealers. Graduated containers shall be used for dilution
and spraying of the chemical shall be done using hand
operated pressure pumps. Proper check should be kept to
p ensure that the specified quantity of chemicals is used
for the required area during the operation.

23.3.2 Time of application: Soil treatment should start when

foundation trenches and pits are ready to take bed
concrete / leveling course in foundations. Laying of bed
concrete / leveling course should start when the chemical
emulsion has been absorbed by the soil and the surface is
quite dry. Treatment should not be carried out when it is
raining or soil is wet with rain or sub soil water. Treatment
to the surface of earth filling within the plinth shall also be
done in the same manner laying the sub-grade for flooring.

23.3.3 Disturbance: The treated soil barrier shall not be disturbed.

If for some reasons the treated soil barriers are disturbed,
immediate steps shall be taken to restore the continuity
and completeness of the barrier system.

23.3.4 Treatment for Masonry Foundations & Basements:

a) The bottom surface and the sides (upto a height of 300 mm)
of the excavations made for masonry foundations and
basements shall be treated with the chemical at the rate of 5
litres per square metre surface area.
b) After the masonry foundations and the retaining wall of the
basements come up, the backfill in the immediate contact
with the foundation structure shall be treated at the rate of
7.5 litres per sqm of the vertical surface of the substructure
for each side. If water is used for ramming the earth fill, the
chemical treatment shall be carried out after the ramming
operation is done by Roding the earth at 150 mm centers
close to the wall and spraying the chemical with the above
dosage. The earth is usually returned inlayers and the
treatment shall be carried out in similar stage. The chemical
 emulsion shall be directed towards the concrete or masonry
surfaces of the columns and walls so that the earth in contract
with these surfaces is well treated with the chemical.

23.3.5 Treatment for RCC foundation and basements: In the case

of RCC foundations, the concrete mix is dense (being 1:2:4
or richer). It is therefore unnecessary to start the
treatment from the bottom of excavations. The treatment
shall start at the depth of 500 mm below ground level
except when such ground level is raised or lowered by
filling or cutting after the foundations have been cast. In
such cases, the depth of 500 mm shall be determined from
the new soil level resulting from the filling or cutting
mentioned above, and soil in immediate contract with the
vertical surfaces of RCC foundations shall be treated at the
rate of 7.5 litres per square metre. The other details of
treatment shall be as laid down in 23.3.4(b)

23.3.6 Treatment of Top surface of plinth filling: The top surface

of the filled earth within the plinth walls shall be treated
with chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 litres per sqm of
the surface before the sand / sub-grade is laid holes up to
50 to 75 mm deep at 150 mm centre to center both ways
shall be made with crow bars on the surface to facilitate
saturation of the soil with chemical emulsion.

23.3.7 Treatment of Junction of the walls and the floors: To

achieve continuity of the vertical barrier on inner wall
surfaces from the round level, a small channel 30x30 mm
shall be made at all the junctions of walls and columns with
the floor (before laying the sub-grade) and rod holes made
in the channel up to ground level 150 mm apart and the
chemical emulsion poured along the channel @ 7.5 litres
per sqm of the vertical wall or column surface so as to soak
the soil right to bottom. The soil shall be tamped back into
place after this operation.

23.3.8 Treatment of soil along external perimeter of building:

After the building is complete 300 mm deep holes shall be
provided in the soil with iron rods along the external
perimeter of the building at intervals of about 150 mm and
these holes shall be filled with chemical emulsion at the
rate of 7.5 liters per sqm of vertical surfaces. If the depth
of filling is more than 300 mm. the external perimeter
treatment shall extend to the full depth of filling up to the
ground level so as to ensure continuity of the chemical
 barrier. In case the earth outside the building is graded on
completion of such grading.

23.3.9 Treatment of Soil under Apron (Plinth Protection) along

External perimeter of Building: Top surface of the
consolidated earth over which the apron is to be laid shall
be treated with chemical emulsion at the rate of 5 liters per
square metre of the surface before the apron is laid. If
consolidated earth does not allow emulsion to deep
through holes up to 50 to 70 mm deep at 150 mm centre
to center both ways may be made with 12 mm diameter
mild steel rod on the surface to facilitate saturation of the
soil with the chemical emulsion.

23.3.10 Treatment for expansion joints: Anti-termite treatment

shall be supplemented by treating with chemical emulsion
through the expansion joint after the sub-grade has been
laid @ 2 litres per linear metre of expansion joint.

23.3.11 Treatment of walls Retaining Soil above Floor level:

Retaining walls like the basements walls or outer walls
above the door level retaining soil need to the protected by
providing chemical barrier by treatment of retained soil in
the immediate vicinity of the walls, so as to prevent entry
of termites through the voids in masonry, cracks and
crevices etc. above the floor level. The soil retained by the
walls shall be treated at the rate of 7.5 liters per square
meter of the vertical surface so as to affect a continuous
outer chemical barrier in continuation of the one formed
under 1.12.3.4.

23.3.12 Treatment of Soil Surrounding Pipe and Conduits: When

pipes and conduits enter the soil inside the area of the
foundations. The soil surroundings the points of entry shall
be loosened around each such pipe or conduit for a
distance of 150 mm and to a depth of 75 mm before
treatment is commenced. When they enter the soil
external to the foundations, they shall be similarly treated
for a distance of over 300 mm unless they stand clear of
the walls of the buildings by about 75 mm.

23.3.13 Measurements: All dimensions shall be measured correct to

a cm. The measurements for all the operations described
above shall be the plinth area of the building in square-
meters at floor 1 level (Ground floor). Nothing extra shall
be measured for payment.
24. LEAD LINING
All windows of the x-ray rooms shall have 2 mm thick lead
lining. The lining shall be nailed to the flush door shutters
from inside of x-ray room. The lead shall confirm to IS
specification.

25. LEAD GLASS

All windows of the x-ray rooms shall have lead glass
glazing as specified on the drawings complete.

26. ANTI STATIC FLOOR

The floors in the operation theatre are required to be Anti
Static. In order to do so it is essential to have a grid of
copper strips laid in the marble flooring in OTs. Near the
operation table the copper strips shall be laid at a distance
of 250 mm centre to centre in both directions while in the
remaining areas it may be at a distance of 600 mm centre
to centre.

27. EPOXY TREATMENT

The epoxy treatment where specified shall be a minimum
of 2 mm thickness and shall be laid as per manufacturers
specifications approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

28. ACID / ALKALI RESISTANT TILES

Acid and alkali resistant tiles shall be provided on the
pathology lab floor. The same shall be 10 mm thick laid
with 20 mm thick cement mortar 1:4 (1 appropriate
cement : 4 coarse sand)

(A – 2) EXTERNAL CIVIL WORK:

1. PARKING AREA:
Cement concrete pavement with nominal reinforcement
shall be as per Punjab PWD specification No. 24.10.

2. MS GATES
M.S gates shall be as per Punjab PWD specification No.
18.4 and shall conform to relevant drawing.

3. CATTLE CATCHERS
Cattle catchers shall conform to relevant drawings.

4. KERB & CHANNELS:

 Kerb & channels wherever provided along the road side
shall conform to the relevant Punjab PWD specification.

5. JUNGLE CLEARANCE
Clearing of weeds, shrubs, brush wood and congress grass
under this item shall be removed by roots. No tree shall be
removed. The item shall be executes as per Punjab PWD
specification No. 26.4.

6. SUBGRADE OF INTERNAL ROADS:

The top 2’ portion of embankment in the complete
formation width of the internal roads, which is sub-grade of
the road shall consist of sandy soils A1, A2 & A3 type soils
as per PRA classification conforming to latest IRC
specification. Silty & Clayey soils which make weak sub-
grade and have no self drainage shall not be permitted for
use.

7. STONE METAL 60-11.2 MM

Crushed stone metal of approved quarries i.e.
Chandimandir or Pathankot shall be only used for
construction for road. It should be angular and drawn from
hard durable tough stones of uniform texture. It should not
absorb water more than 1% and its aggregate impact
value should not be more than 30. The grading should
confirm to M.O.S.T specification as given in table below.

Sieve Designation Percent by Weight

passing

60 mm 100.00
53 mm 95-100
45 mm 65-90
22.4 mm 0-10
11.2 mm 0-5

8. GRIT
The crushed aggregates for mix seal surfacing shall be
blended in the required ratio or achieving the proper
gradation as per M.O.S.T specification. The individual size
of the grit should also be conforming to M.O.S.T
specification.
SPECIFICATIONS

PLUMBING AND

SANITARY WORKS
SECTION – P.H. 1

GENERAL CONDITIONS

1.0 GENERAL CONDITION FOR PLUMBING INSTALLATION AND

EXTERNAL PUBLIC HEALTH SERVICES.

1.1 REGULATIONS AND STANDARDS:

This installation shall conform in all respects to the following
standards in general.

IS 651-1965 Specification for salt Glazed stoneware

pipes & fittings (first revision)

IS 782-1979 Specification for caulking lead.

IS 1172-1971 Code of basic requirements for water

supply, drainage and sanitation (revised)

IS 1239-1968 (part-I) Specifications for mild steel tube, tubular

and other steel pipe fittings.

IS 1239-1968(Part-II) Specifications for mild steel tube, tubular

and other steel pipe fittings

IS 1537-1976 Specification for vertically cast iron

pressure pipes for water, gas & sewage.

IS 1536-1976 Specification for centrifugally cast (Spun)

iron pressure pipes for water, gas &
sewage.

IS 1538 (Part 1 to 23) Specification for cast iron fittings for

pressure pipe for water, gas and sewage.

IS 1626-1960 AC building pipes, gutters and fittings

(Spigot and Socket type)

IS 1726-1960 Code for C. I. manhole frame & cover.

IS 3989-1979 Specification for centrifugally cast (Spun)

iron Spigot and Ventilating pipes, fittings
and Accessories.

IS 1742-1960 Code of practice for building drawing.

 IS 2064-1962 Code of practice for selection, installation
and maintenance of sanitary appliances.

IS 2065-1963 Code of practice for water supply to

buildings.

IS 3114-1965 Code of practice for laying of CI pipes.

IS 3589-1981 Specification for electrically welded steel

pipes for water, gas and sewage.

IS 3989-1970 Centrifugally cast spun iron and socket

soil and ventilating pipe, fittings and
accessories.

IS 4111-1967 Code of practice for Ancillary structure in

sewerage system.

IS 4127-1967 Code of practice for laying glazed stone

ware pipe.

IS 4515 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipe

fittings.

IS 4985-1981 Specification for unplasticized PVC pipes

for portable water supplies.

IS 4270-1992 Specifications for Water wells.

i) National building code for water supply, drainage and

sanitation, part IX Plumbing services section 1 & 2 and as per
the Punjab PWD specification with latest amendments.
ii) All plumbing items shall be provided as per approved
sample/data sheet approved by the Engineer. Before placing
the order, the contractor shall submit the shop drawings
prepared based on tender drawings and BOQ along with
samples for approval of Engineer. The shop drawings shall
have all the details.

iii) The installation shall also be in conformity with the bye laws
and requirement of the local authority is so far as these
become applicable to the installation. Where ever this
specification calls for a higher standard of materials and / or
workmanship then those required by any of the above
regulations and standards, then this specification shall take
precedence over the said regulations and standards.
 Wherever drawings and specifications require something that
may violate the regulations, the regulation shall govern.

1.2 In any case of non-availability of materials in metric sizes, the

nearest size of FPS units shall be provided with prior approval of
the Engineer-in-charge for which no extra cost will be paid.

1.3 METRIC CONVERSION:

All dimensions and sizes of materials and equipment given in the
tender documents are commercial metric sizes.
SECTION – P.H. 2

PLUMBING SPECIFICATIONS – SANITARY FIXTURES

1. INDIAN W.C.

1.1 Indian WC pan shall be Oriya or Orissa pattern of best quality

and size as specified in the schedule of quantities. Each WC shall
be provided with a 100 mm i/d cast iron P-trap.

1.2 W.C. shall be flushed by means of exposed or concealed type

brass flush valve or CI high level flushing cistern or low level PVC
cistern as the case may be flush valve shall be connected to the
WC by means of an approved type of flush bend.

1.3 The WC shall be fixed in level in a neat work man like manner.
The WC & trap shall be set in cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1
cement 2 coarse and 4 stone aggregate 20mm nominal size).
Joints between WC and flush pipe shall be made with a putty of
white lead mixed with chipped hemp caulked well or with an
approved rubber joint.

2. EUROPEAN WC SEAT

2.1 European WC shall be wash down type floor/wall mounted seat

of best quality flushed by means of an exposed or concealed type
flush valve / PVC low level flushing cistern. Flush valve shall be
connected to the WC by means of a suitable rubber adaptor.
Alternately WC’s may be symphonic type with integral flushing
cisterns as given in the schedule of quantities.

2.2 Each WC seat shall be so fixed that it remains absolutely

stationery in vertical position without falling down on the WC and
colour shall be as given in the schedule of quantities.

2.3 Flush valve shall be concealed type or exposed type brass CP

flush valve with regulator valve.

3. URNINALS:

3.1 Urinals shall be lipped front type or half stall white glazed
vitreous china of best quality and size 610x400x380mm size.

3.2 Half stall urinals shall be provided with 15mm dia spreader, 32
mm dia CP domical waste and waste pipe and wall flange.

3.3 Half stall urinals shall be fixed with CP brass screws.

3.4 Flushing cistern for urinals shall be automatic type vitreous china
or as given in the schedule of quantities. Each flushing cistern
shall have a copper siphon and inlet nozzle cock to control the
flow. Flushing cistern shall be fixed to wall with R.C. or CI
brackets painted with two coats of white enamel paint.

3.5 Flush pipe shall be GI pipes concealed in wall chase but with
chromium plated bends at inlet and outlet.

3.6 Urinals may be flushed with flush valves or electronic auto-

sensors, if given in the schedule of quantities and as described in
the item.

3.7 Waste pipes for urinals shall be GI pipe waste pipes may be
exposed on wall or concealed chase as directed by the Engineer-
in-charge. Specifications for waste pipes shall be same as given
in section II.

4. LAVATORY BASIN

4.1 lavatory basins shall be coloured or white glazed vitreous china

of best quality, size, shape and type specified in the schedule of
quantities.

4.2 Each basin shall be fixed with MS or CI brackets and the basin
securely fixed to wall with bolts. Placing of basin over the
brackets without secure fixing shall not be accepted.

4.3 Each basin shall be provided with 32 mm dia. CP waste with

overflow CP waste or rubber plug and chain 32 mm dia. CP brass
bottle trap and angle valves with CP pipe wall and flange as
given in the schedule of quantities.

4.4 Each wash hand basin shall be provided with mixing fitting or
pillar tap as specified in the schedule of quantities.

4.5 Basins shall be fixed at proper heights as shown on drawing. If

height is not specified, the rim level shall be 79 cms or as
directed by Engineer-in-charge.

5. SINKS

5.1 Sinks shall be white glazed fire clay or vitreous china, stainless
steel or any other material as specified in the schedule of
quantities.
5.2 Each sink shall be provided with MS or CI brackets and clips and
securely fixed. Counter top sinks shall be fixed with suitable
angle iron clips or brackets as recommended by the
manufacturers. Each sinks shall be provided with 40 mm dia. CP
waste with chain and plug or PVC waste. Waste shall be GI rigid
PVC or lead pipes concealed or exposed. Fixing shall be done as
directed by Engineer-in-charge.

5.3 Supply fittings for sinks shall be of CP taps as specified in the

schedule of quantities.

6. SHOWER SET

6.1 Shower set shall comprise of one or two CP brass stop cocks,
mixing arrangements exposed or concealed as specified in the
schedule of quantities.

6.2 Each shower set shall be provided with a CP shower rose of

approved quality and arm with wall flange as specified in the
schedule of quantities.

6.3 Concealed stop cocks shall be so fixed as to keep the wall flange
cleared off the finished wall. Wall Flanges embedded in the
finishing shall not be accepted.

7. ACCESSORIES

7.1 Contractor shall install all chromium plated and porcelain

accessories as shown on the drawings directed by Engineer-in-
charge, and given in the schedule of quantities.

7.2 All CP accessories shall be fixed with CP brass half round head
screws and cut washer in all with rawl plugs and shall include
cutting and making good as directed by Engineer-in-charge.

7.3 Porcelain accessories shall be fixed in walls and set in cement

mortar 1:2 (1 cement 2 fine sand) and fixed in relation to the
tilling works
SECTION P.H. 3

SOIL, WASTE, VENT PIPES AND RAIN WATER PIPES

1. CAST IRON PIPES AND FITTINGS:

1.1 Soil waste, vent, anti-syphonage and rain water pipes shall be
cast iron pipes. All pipes shall be straight and smooth inside
free from irregular bore, below holes, cracks and other
manufacturing defects. Pipes shall be centrifugally spun iron
soil pipes conforming to IS 3989 and fittings shall be
conforming to IS 3989-1984.

1.2 Particulars of medium grade GI pipe. GI pipes shall be as per IS

1239-1979.

1.3 Fittings

1.3.1 Fittings shall conform to the Indian Standards as for pipes.

Contractor shall use pipes and fittings of matching
specifications

1.3.2 Fittings shall be of the required degree of curvature with or

without access door.

1.3.3 Access door shall be made up with 3 mm thick insertion rubber

washer and white lead. The bolts shall be lubricated with
grease or white lead for easy removal later. The fixing shall be
air and water tight.

1.4 Fixing

1.4.1 All vertical pipes shall be fixed by MS clamps truly vertical.

Branch pipes shall be connected to the stack at the same angle
as that of the fittings. No collars shall be used in vertical stacks.
Each stack shall be terminated at top with a cowl (terminal
guard).

1.4.2 Horizontal pipes running along ceiling shall be fixed on

structural adjustable clamps of special design shown on the
drawings or as directed. Horizontal pipes shall be laid to
uniform slope and the clamps adjusted to the proper level so
that the pipes fully rest on them.

1.4.3 Contractor shall provide all sleeves, openings, hangers, inserts

during the construction. He shall provide all necessary
information to the building contractor for making such provision
 in the structure as necessary and required. In case sleeves as
required to be provided in slabs, the same shall be slightly
projected above the floor to avoid water leakages.

2. CLAMPS

2.1 MS clamps shall be of standard design and fabricated from MS

flat 40x3 mm thick. They shall be painted with two coats of
black bitumen painted before fixing.

2.2 Where MS clamps are to be fixed on RCC column or slotted

angles, walls or beam they shall be fixed with 40x3 mm flat
iron ‘U’ type clamps with anchor fasteners of approved design
or 6 mm nuts and bolts.

2.3 Structural clamps shall be fabricated from MS structural

sections e.g. rods angles, channels, flats as per detailed
drawings or as directed. Contractor shall provide all nuts, bolts,
welding and paint the clamps with one coat of red-oxide.
Wooden saddles and structural clamps shall be provided free of
cost.

2.4 Slotted angle/channel supports on walls shall be provided

wherever shown on drawings. Angles / channels shall be of
sizes shown on drawings or as specified in schedule of
quantities. Angles / channels shall be fixed to brick walls with
bolts embedded in cement concrete blocks and to RCC walls
with suitable anchor fasteners. The spacing of support bolts
horizontally shall not exceed 1 m.

2.5 Wherever MS clamps are required to be anchored directly to

brick walls, concrete slabs, beams or columns, nothing extra
shall be payable for clamping arrangement for making good
with cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement 2 coarse and 4
stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) as directed by Engineer-
in-charge.

3. TRAPS:-

3.1 Floor Traps: Floor traps shall be of cast iron, deep seal with an
effective depth of 50 mm. the trap and waste pipes shall be set
in cement concrete blocks firmly supported on the structural
floor. The blocks shall be in 1:2:4 mix (1 cement 2 coarse sand
4 stone aggregate 20 mm nominal size) and extended to 4 mm
below finished floor level. Contractor shall provide all necessary
shuttering and centering for the blocks. Size of the block shall
be 30x30 cms and of the required depth.
3.2 Urinal Traps: Urinal traps shall be cast iron P & S trap with or
without vent and set in cement concrete block specified in para
3.1 without extra charge.

3.3 Floor Trap Inlets: Bath room traps and connections shall
ensure free and silent flow of discharging water. Where
specified contractor shall provide a special type cast iron inlet
hopper without or with one two or three inlet sockets to receive
the waste pipe. Joint between waste and hopper inlet sockets
shall be lead caulked joints. Hopper shall be connected to a CI
or P & S trap with a least 50 mm seal (hopper and traps shall
be paid for separately). Floor trap inlet hoppers and the traps
shall be set in cement concrete blocks as specified in para 3.1
without extra charge.

3.4 C.P. Stainless Steel Gratings: Floor and urinal traps shall be
provided with 100-150 mm square or round C.P. Stainless steel
grating with rim of approved design and shape. Thickness shall
be as specified in the schedule of quantities.

4. JOINTING:

4.1 Before pouring the lead and yarn, the interior of socket and
exterior of spigot shall be thoroughly cleaned and dried. The
spigot end shall be inserted into the socket right upto the back
of the socket and carefully centered by 2-3 turns of spun yarn
twisted into ropes of uniform thickness, well caulked into the
back of the socket, no piece of yarn shall be shorter than the
circumference of the pipe. As per IS 1729-1979.

5. CLEANOUT PLUGS:

5.1 Contractor shall provide cast brass cleanout plugs as required.

Cleanout plugs shall be threaded and provided with key holes
for openings. Cleanout plugs shall be fixed to the pipe by a GI
socket lead caulked (Detailing with sketch)

6. WASTE PIPE FROM APPLIANCES:

6.1 Waste pipe from appliances e.g. wash basins, sinks, urinals,
bath tubs, water coolers shall be of galvanized steel, lead or
PVC as given in the schedule of quantities or drawings.

6.2 All pipes shall be fixed in gradient towards the outfalls of drain.
Pipes inside a toilet room shall be in chase unless otherwise
shown on drawings. Where required pipes may be run at ceiling
 level in suitable gradient and supported on structural clamps.
Spacing for clamps for such pipes shall be as follows.

GI Pipes PVC Pipes Lead pipes C l Pipes

Vertical 300 cms 180 cms 120 cms 150 cms

Horizontal 240 cms 120 cms 120 cms 180 cms

6.3 GALVANIZED PIPES

Pipes shall be galvanized steel tubes conforming to IS 1239-
1979 (medium class) and quality certificates shall be furnished.
Pipes shall be provided with all required fittings, e.g. tees,
couplings, bends, elbows, unions, reducers, nipples, plugs. All
GI waste pipes shall be terminated at the point of connection
with the appliance with an outlet of suitable diameter.

7. CEMENT AND CONCRETE:

7.1 Cast iron soil and waste pipes under floor in sunken slabs and
in wall chases (when cut specially for the pipe) shall be encased
in cement concrete 1:2:4 mix (1 cement 2 coarse sand 4, 12
mm size stone aggregate) 75 mm bed and alround. When pipes
are running well above the structural slab, the encased pipes
shall be supported with suitable cement concrete pillars of
required height and size at interval directed by the Engineer-in-
charge.

8. PAINTING:

8.1 Soil waste and vent pipes in exposed location such as in shafts
and pipes spaces shall be painted with two or more coats of
ready mix oil paint to give an even shade as approved by the
Engineer-in-charge.
8.2 GI pipes in chase shall be painted with two coats of bitumen
paint, covered with polythene tape and a final coat of bitumen
paint. Exposed pipes shall be painted with one or two coats of
synthetic enamel paint.
8.3 C.I. Soil and waste pipes below ground and covered in cement
concrete or lead pipes shall not be painted.

9. CUTTING AND MAKING GOOD

9.1 Pipes shall be fixed and tested as building proceeds. Contractor

shall provide all necessary holes cut outs and chase in
structural members as building work proceeds. Wherever holes
are cut or left originally they shall be done good with cement
concrete 1:2:4 (1 cement 2 coarse and 4 stone aggregate 20
mm thick nominal size) or cement mortar 1:2 (1 cement 2
coarse sand) and the surface restored to original condition.
SECTION P.H. – 4

WATER SUPPLY

1. GI PIPES, FITTINGS AND VALVES:

1.1 All pipes inside the building and where specified, outside the
building shall be galvanized steel tubes conforming to IS 1239-
1979 of class specified. When class is not specified they shall
be medium class.

1.2 Fittings shall be malleable iron galvanized fittings of approved

make. All fittings shall have manufacturers trade mark stamped
on it. Fittings of GI pipes shall include couplings, bends, tees,
nipples, reducers, unions, bushes, fittings shall be IS 1979
(part 1 to X) 1987.

1.3 Fittings and pipes shall be joined with screwed fittings. Care
shall be taken to remove bur from the end of the pipe after
cutting by a round file. Genuine red lead with grummet and a
few strands of fine hemp shall be applied. All pipes shall be
fixed in accordance with layout and alignment shown on the
drawings. Care shall be taken to avoid air pocket. GI Pipes
inside toilets shall be fixed in wall chases well above the floor.
No pipes shall be run inside as sunken floor as far as possible.
Pipes may be run under the ceilings or floors and other areas as
shown on the drawings.

2. UNIONS

2.1 Contractor shall provide adequate number of flanges on all

larger diameter pipes to enable dismantling later. Unions shall
be provided for smaller diameter pipes at appropriate locations
and required and / or as directed by Engineer-in-charge,.

3. FLANGES

3.1 Flanged connections shall also be provided on all equipments

connections as necessary and required or as directed by the
Engineer-in-charge. Flanges shall be of forged type and not
casted. Connections shall be made by the correct number and
size of the bolts and made with 3 mm thick insertion rubber
washer. Where hot water or steam connections are made
insertion gasket shall be of 1.5 m thick compressed asbestos
fibre gaskets approved by the engineer-in-charge. Bolts hole
dia for flange shall conform to match the specifications for CI
sluice valve to IS 780-1984.
4. TRENCHES:

4.1 All GI pipes below ground level shall be laid in trenches shall
have a minimum cover of 60 cms. Excavation for trenches shall
be done as specified in subsequent pages of this tender but the
width and depth of the trenches shall be as follows:

Dia of pipes Width of trenches Depth of trenches

15 mm to 50 mm 30 cms 75 cms

65 mm to 100 mm 45 cms 100 cms

4.2 All GI pipes in trenches shall be protected with fine sand 15

cms alround before back fillings in the trenches.

5. PIPE PROTECTION:

5.1 Where specified in the schedule of quantities all pipes in chase

or below ground shall be protected against corrosion by
applying two coats of bitumen paint, wrapping with polythene
tape and finishing with one more coat of bitumen paint.

6. VALVES:

6.1 Valves upto 50 mm dia shall be ball valves with cast iron body
and stainless steel ball. Valves 50 mm i/d and above shall be
cast iron butterfly valves with epoxy coated disc carbon steel
shaft and lever actuator. Valves shall be tested by
manufacturers and their name stamped on it.

6.2 All valves shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge before

they are allowed to be used on work. However the final
responsibility of the quality of material lies with the contractor.

7. CAST IRON PIPES S&S

7.1 Where specified pipes 80 mm id and above shall be S&S spun

cast iron pipes conforming to IS 1536-1976 of class specified in
schedule of quantities. Pipes shall be of maximum lengths
available and suitable for moulded rubber joints.

7.2 Fittings: Fittings shall be S&S cast iron conforming to IS 1538-

1976 of class specified.
7.3 Laying Pipes

a) Pipes shall be laid out in open trenches with a minimum

cover of 75 cms over the crown of the pipes. Width of the
trench shall be nominal pipe diameter plus 45 cms with a
minimum of 60 cms.

b) Pipes may be laid on RCC slabs/rafts and shall be

supported by bricks pillars at intervals not exceeding 2.4m.

c) The socket of the pipes shall be laid facing the flow as

shown on the drawings or as directed by the Engineer-in-
charge.(the water should enter from socket end)

d) Pipes should be kept thoroughly clean during the course of

laying. Each end shall be blocked by a thick block of wood
and wedged at the end of each day’s work to prevent dirt
and animals from entering the pipe.

7.4 Joints for spun pipes and CI fittings, collars, etc., shall be made
with moulded rubber and refined pig lead conforming to IS 27
2977 respectively. The spigot of the pipe of fittings shall be
centered in the adjoining socket by caulking. Sufficient turns of
tarred gasket shall be caulked to leave required depth on the
socket for lead. After pouring the lead it shall be solidly caulked
with suitable tools and hammers. Depth and weight of lead
shall be:-

Pipe dia Weight of lead/joint Depth of lead

80 mm 1.8 kg 45 mm
100 mm 2.2 kg 45 mm
150 mm 3.4 kg 45 mm
200 mm 5.0 kg 50 mm
250 mm 6.1 kg 50 mm
300 mm 7.2 kg 55 mm

8. AIR VALVES:

8.1 Air valves shall be provided in all high points in the system to
prevent air locks, as shown on the drawings or as directed by
Engineer-in-charge.

8.2 Air valves shall be of single acting heavy duty brass spring type
as specified in the schedule of quantities.
9. SCOUR VALVES:

9.1 Scour valves shall be provided at all low points in the system as
shown on the drawings or directed by Engineer-in-charge.
Valves shall be gunmetal full-way valves for sizes 50 mm dia
and below and butterfly valves for size 65 mm dia and above.

10. MANHOLE FRAMES AND COVER FOR WATER TANKS:

10.1 Each tank shall be provided with adequate number of lockable

type manhole frames and covers fabricated from MS sheet or
standard cast iron tank covers as specified in schedule of
quantities. Manhole covers shall be of sizes shown on drawings.

10.2 Concrete tanks

a) Contractor shall provide puddle flanges fabricated from MS

/ GI pipes of required sizes and lengths and welded to 5
mm MS plates. All puddle flanges must be fixed in true
alignment and level and shall be back welded to the
reinforcement to prevent movement during concreting.

b) Contractor shall make connection of pipe lines laid and

fixed by him to concrete, masonry or steel tanks as
required at site. No additional payment shall be allowed for
making connections.
DRAINAGE (SEWERS & STORM WATER)

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS:

1.1 All materials shall be new of the best quality conforming to

specifications & subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-
charge.

1.2 Drainage lines shall be laid to the required gradients and

profiles.

1.3 All drainage work shall be done in accordance with the local
municipal bye-laws.

1.4 Contractor shall obtain necessary approval and permission for

the drainage system from the municipal or any other
competent authority.

1.5 Location of all man holes, catch basins etc. shall be got
confirmed by the Engineer-in-charge before the actual
execution of work at site.

1.6 All works shall be executed as directed by the Engineer-in-

charge.

2. ALIGNMENT AND GRADE

2.1 The sewers and storm water lines shall be laid to alignment and
gradient shown on the drawings but subject to such
modifications as shall be ordered by the Engineer-in-charge
from time to time to meet the requirements of the works. No
deviations from the lines, depths of cutting or gradients of
sewers shown on the plans and sections shall be permitted
except to the direction in writing of the Engineer-in-charge.

3. EXCAVATION

3.1 The excavation for sewers and storm water drains shall be in
open cutting unless the permission of the Engineer-in-charge
for the ground to be tunneled is obtained in writing. Where
sewers have to be constructed along narrow passages, the
Engineer-in-charge may order the excavation to be made partly
in tunnel and in such cases the excavated soil shall be brought
back later on for refilling the trenches or tunnel.

3.2 OPENING OUT TRENCHES:

 In excavating the trenches etc. the soling road metal,
pavement, kerbing etc. and turf shall be placed on one side and
preserved for reinforcement when the trenches or other
excavation shall be filled up. Before any road metal is replaced,
it shall be carefully shifted. The surface of all trenches and
holes shall be restored and maintained to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-charge and of the owners of the roads or other
property traversed and the contractor shall not cut out or break
down any live fence of trees in the line of the proposed works
but shall tunnel under them, unless the Engineer-in-charge
shall order to the contrary.

3.3 OBSTRUCTION OF ROADS:

The contractor shall not occupy or obstruct by his operation
more than one half of the width of any road or street. if after
excavation there is insufficient space left for public and private
transit. He shall remove the materials excavated and bring
them back again when the trench is required to be refilled. The
contractor shall obtain the consent of the Engineer-in-charge in
writing before closing any road to vehicular traffic and the foot
walks must be clear at all times.

3.4 REMOVAL OF FILTH:

All night soil, filth or any other offensive matter is met with
during the execution of works, immediately after it is taken out
of any trench, sewer or cess pool, shall not be deposited on the
surface of any street or where it is likely to be a nuisance or
passed into any sewer or drain but shall be at once put into the
carts and removed to suitable place to be provided by the
contractor.

3.5 EXCAVATION TO BE TAKEN TO PROPER DEPTHS:

The trenches shall be excavated to such a depth that the sewer
shall rest on concrete as described in the several clauses
relating there to and so that the inverts may be at the levels
given in the sections. In bad ground, the Engineer-in-charge
may order the contractor to excavate to a greater depth than
that shown on the drawings and to fill up the excavation to the
level of the sewers with concrete, broken stone, gravel or other
materials the contractor shall be paid extra at rates laid down
for such works in the schedule, if the extra work was ordered
by the Engineer-in-charge in writing, but if the contractor
should excavate the trench to a greater depth than is required
without a specific order to that effect in writing of the Engineer-
in-charge the extra depth shall have to be filled up with
concrete at the contractor’s own cost to the requirements and
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.
3.6 REFILLING
After the sewer or other work has been laid and proved to be
water tight, the trench or other excavations shall be refilled.
Utmost care shall be taken in doing this, so that no damage
shall be caused to the sewer and other permanent work. The
filling in the haunches and upto 75 cms above the crown of the
sewer shall consists of the finest selected materials placed
carefully in 15 cms layers and flooded and consolidated. After
this has laid the trench and other excavation shall be refilled
carefully in 15 cms layers with materials taken from the
excavation, each layer being watered to assist in the
consolidation unless the Engineer-in-charge shall otherwise
direct.

3.7 CONTRACTOR TO RESTORE SETTLEMENT AND DAMAGES:-

The contractor shall at his own costs and charges, make good
promptly during the whole period, the works are in hand, any
settlement that may occur in the surfaces of roads, berms,
footpaths, gardens, open spaces, etc. whether public or private
caused by his trenches or by his other excavations and he shall
be liable or any accidents caused thereby, he shall also, at his
own expenses and charges repair and make good any damage
done to buildings and other property. If in the opinion of the
Engineer-in-charge, he fails to make good such works with all
practicable dispatch, the Engineer-in-charge shall be paid by
the contractor or deducted from any money that may be or
become due to him or recovered from him in any other manner
according to the law of the land.

3.8 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS SOIL:

The contractor shall at his own costs and charges provide
places for disposal of all surplus materials not required to be
used on the works. As each trenches refilled the surplus soil
shall be immediate it removed, the surface properly restored
and road ways and sides left clear.

3.9 TIMBERING OF SEWER AND TRENCHES:

a) The contractor shall at all times support efficiently and

effectively the sides of the sewer trenches and other
excavation by suitable timbering, poling and sheeting and
they shall be closed, timbered in loose or sandy strata and
below the surface of the sub-soil water level.

b) All timbering sheeting and poling with their walling

supports shall be of adequate dimensions and strength and
 fully braced and strutted so that no risk of collapse or
subsidence of the walls of the trench shall take place.

c) The contractor shall be held responsible and will be

accountable for the sufficiency of all timbering, bracing,
sheeting and poling used as also for, all damage to persons
and property resulting from improper quality, strength
placing, maintaining or removing of the same.

3.10 SHORING OF BUILDING

The contractor shall shore up all buildings, walls and other
structures, the stability of which is liable to be endangered by
the execution of the work and shall be fully responsible for all
damages to persons or property resulting from any accident.

3.11 REMOVAL OF WATER FROM SEWER, TRENCH ETC:-

a) The contractor shall at all times during the progress of the

work keep the trenches and excavations free from water
which shall be disposed of by him in a manner as well
neither cause injury to the public health nor to the public
or private property nor to the work completed or in
progress nor to the surface of any roads or streets, nor
cause any interference with the use of the same by the
public.

b) If any excavation carried out at any point or points to a

greater width than the specified cross section of the sewer
with its envelope, the full width of the trench shall be filled
with concrete by the contractor at his own expenses and
change to the requirements of the Engineer-in-charge.

3.12 WIDTH OF TRENCH:

The Engineer-in-charge shall have power by giving an order in
writing to the contractor to increase the maximum width in
respect of which payment will be allowed for excavation in
trenches for various classes of sewer, man holes and other
works in certain lengths to be specifically laid down by him
where on account of bad ground or other unusual conditions,
he considers that such increased widths are necessary in view
of the site conditions.

4. SALT GLAZED STONE WARE PIPES:

4.1 Stone ware pipes shall be first class quality salt glazed and free
from rough texture inside and outside and straight. All pipes
 shall have the manufacturer name marked on it and shall
comply to IS 651-1971.

4.2 Laying and jointing of stone ware salt glazed pipes:

a) Pipes are liable to be damaged in transit and not with
standing tests that may have been made before dispatch
each pipe shall be examined carefully on arrival at site.
Each pipe shall be rung with a wooden hammer or mallet
and those that do not ring true and clear shall be rejected.
Sound pipes shall be carefully stacked to prevent damage.
All defective pipes should be segregated, marked in
____X____ manner and their use in the works prevented.

b) The pipes shall be laid with sockets leading up hill and

should rest on solid and even foundations for the full
length of the barrel. Socket holes shall be formed in the
foundation sufficiently deep to allow the pipe jointer room
to work right round the pipe and as short as practicable to
admit the socket and allow the joint to be made.

c) Where pipes are not bedded on concrete the trench bottom

shall be left slightly high and carefully bottomed up as pipe
laying proceeds so that the pipe barrels rest of firm
ground, if excavation has been carried too low it shall be
made up with cement concrete at the contractor’s
expenses and charges.

d) If the bottom of the trench consists of rock or very hard

ground that cannot be easily excavated to a smooth
surface, the pipes shall be laid on cement concrete bed to
ensure even bearing.

4.3 Jointing of pipes:

a) Tarred gasket shall first be wrapped round the spigot of

each pipe and the spigot shall then be placed in to the
socket of the pipe previously laid, the pipe then shall be
adjusted and fixed in its correct position and the gasket
caulked tightly home so as to fill not more that one quarter
of the total length of the socket.

b) The remainder of the socket shall be filled with a stiff of

cement mortar (1 cement 1 clear sharp washed sand).
When the socket is filled, a fillet should be formed round
the joint with a trowel forming and angle of 45 degrees
with the barrel of the pipe. The mortar shall be mixed as
 needed for immediate use and no mortar shall be beaten
up & used after it has begun to set.

c) After the joint has been made and extraneous materials

shall be remove from inside the joint with a suitable
scraper “badger”. The newly made joints shall be protected
until set from the sun, drying winds, rain or dust. Sacking
or other materials which can be kept damp shall be used.
The joint shall be exposed and space left all round the
pipes for inspection by the Engineer-in-charge. The inside
of the sewer must be left absolutely clear in bore and free
from cement mortar or other obstructions throughout its
entire length, and shall efficiently drain and discharge.

5. GULLY TRAPS:

5.1 Gully traps shall be of the same quality as described for

stoneware pipes in Clause 4.

5.2 Gully traps shall be fixed in cement concrete 1:4:8 (1cement 4

coarse sand 8 stone aggregate 40 mm nominal size) mix and a
brick masonry chamber 30x30 cms CI sealed cover and frame
weighing not less than 7.3 kg to be constructed as per standard
drawings. Where necessary, sealed cover shall be replaced with
CI grating of the same size.

6. REINFORCED CEMENT CONCRETE PIPES

6.1 All under ground storm water drainage pipes and sewer lines
where specified (other than those specified cast iron) shall be
centrifugally spun RCC pipes of specified class. Pipes shall be
true and straight with uniform bore throughout. Cracked
wrapped pipes shall not be used on the work. All pipes shall be
tested by the manufacturer and the contractor shall produce,
when directed, a certificate to that effect from the
manufacturer.

6.2 Laying: RCC spun pipes shall be laid on cement concrete bed
or cradle as specified and shown on the detailed drawings. The
cradle may be precast and sufficiently cured to prevent cracks
and breakage in handling. The invert of the cradles shall be left
12 mm below the invert level of the pipe and properly placed
on the soil to prevent any disturbance. The pipe shall then be
 placed on the bed concrete or cradles and set for the line
gradient by means of sight rails and boning rods, etc. cradles or
concrete bed may be omitted, if directed by the Engineer-in-
charge.

6.3 Jointing: All pipes shall be tested to a hydraulic test of 1.5 m

head for at least 30 minutes at the highest point in the section
under cost. Test shall also be carried out similar to those for
stoneware pipes given in clause 5.4. The smoke test shall also
be carried out by the contractor. A test register shall be
maintained which shall be signed and dated by contractor /
Engineer-in-charge and representative of Architect /
Consultant.

7. CAST IRON PIPES FOR DRAINAGE:

7.1 All drainage lines passing under buildings, floors and roads with
heavy traffic, in exposed position above ground e.g. service
floor and basement ceiling shall be cast iron pipes. Position of
such pipes shall generally be shown on the drawings.

7.2 Cast iron pipes shall be centrifugally spun cast iron pipes
conforming to IS 1536-1967. Quality certificate shall be
furnished.
7.3 Fittings and inspection chambers:

a) Fittings used for CI drainage pipes shall conform to IS

1538-1967. Wherever possible junction from branch pipes
shall be made by a Y tee. Cleanout plugs shall be provided
on head of each drain and at locations indicated on plans
or as directed by Engineer-in-charge. Cleanout plugs shall
be of size matching the full bore of the pipe. Plugs shall be
made from GI coupling caulked into the socket of the pipe
for fitting. The end shall be provided with a brass screwed
plug with suitable key for opening.

7.4 Laying

a) All cast iron pipes and fittings shall be joined with best
quality soft pig lead (conforming to IS 782-1966) which
shall be free from impurities.

b) The spigot of pipe fittings shall be centered in the adjoining

socket by caulking. Sufficient turns of tarred gaskin will be
given to leave unfilled the required depth of socket for
depth 45 mm when the gaskin has been caulked tightly
home. Jointing ring shall be placed round the barrel and
against the face of the socket. Molten pig lead shall then be
 poured to fill the remainder of the socket. This shall be
done in one pouring. The lead shall then be solidly caulked
with suitable tools and hammers weighing not less then 2
kg. for lead wool joints the socket shall caulked with tarred
gaskin as explained above. The lead wool shall be inserted
into the sockets and tightly caulked home by gaskin with
suitable tools and hammers of not less than 2 kg.

c) For lead wool joints the socked shall be caulked with tarred
gaskin as explained above. The lead wool be inserted into
the sockets and tightly caulked home by gaskin with
suitable tools and hammers of not less than 2 kg. Weight
until joint is filled.

8. CEMENT CONCRETE AND MASONRY WORKS (FOR

MANHOLES AND CHAMBERS ETC.)

8.1 All the items of works shall be executed as per Punjab PWD
specifications (latest edition with upto date amendments). Any
item or part of the item not covered in Punjab PWD
specifications shall be executed on relevant ISI specifications.
The brief specifications of the materials as described in the Civil
Section shall apply.

8.2 Cement concrete (Plain or Reinforced)

a) Cement concrete pipes bedding, cradles, foundations and

RCC slabs for all works shall be mixed by a mechanical
mixer where quantities of the concrete poured at one time
permit, hand mixing on properly constructed platforms
may be allowed for small quantities by the Engineer-in-
charge. Rate for cement concrete shall be inclusive of all
shuttering and centering at all depths and heights.

b) Concrete works shall be of such thickness and mix as given

in the schedule of quantities.

c) All concrete work shall be cured for a period of at least 7

days. Such work shall be kept moist by means of gunny
bags at all times. All pipes trenches and foundations shall
be kept dry during the curing period.

8.3 Masonry work

 Masonry work for manholes, chambers, septic tanks and other
such works as required shall be constructed from 1st class
bricks in cement mortar as specified in the schedule of
quantities. All joints shall be properly raked to receive plaster.

8.4 Cement concrete for pipe support:

a) Wherever specified or shown on the drawings, all pipes

shall be supported in bed and all round or in haunches. The
thickness and mix of the concrete shall be given in the
schedule of quantities width of the bedding shall be as as
per drawing.

b) Unless otherwise directed by the Engineer-in-charge

cement concrete for bed all round or in haunches shall be
laid as follows.

Upto 1.5m m Upto 3 m Beyond 3 m

depth depth depth

Stoneware pipe in open ground (no All round In haunches All round
sub soil water) 1:6:12 1:6:12 1:6:12
RCC or SW pipes in sub soil water All round In haunches All round 1:3:6
1:3:6 1:3:6
CI pipe (in all conditions) Sand filling Sand filling Sand filling
RCC pipes or CI pipes under road or All round In haunches All round 1:3:6
building 1:3:6 1:3:6
(1 cement: 3-6 = coarse sand : 6-12 stone aggregate 40 mm
nominal size)

c) RCC pipes or CI pipes may be supported on brick masonry

or precast RCC or in situ cradles. Cradles shall be as shown
on the drawings.

d) Pipes in loose soil or above ground shall be supported on

bricks stone masonry pillars as shown on the drawings.

9. MANHOLE AND CHAMBERS:

9.1 All manholes, chambers, septic tanks and other such works as
specified shall be constructed in brick masonry in cement
mortar 1:5 (1cement 5 coarse sand) or as specified in the
schedule of quantities

9.2 All manholes, chambers, septic tanks, etc., shall be supported

on base of cement concrete of such thickness and mix as given
in the schedule of quantities or shown on the drawings.
9.3 All manholes shall be provided with cement concrete benching
in 1:2:4 mix (1cement 2 coarse sand 4 stone aggregate 20 mm
nominal size). The benching shall have a slope of 450 towards
the channels. The depth of the channel shall be full diameter of
the pipe. Benching shall be finished with a floating coat of neat
cement.
9.4 All manholes shall be plastered with 12/15 mm thick cement
mortar 1:3 mix (1cement 3 coarse sand) and finished with a
floating coat of neat cement inside. Manholes shall be plastered
outside as above but with rough plaster.
9.5 All manholes with depths greater than 1 m shall be provided
with 20 mm square or 25 mm round rods catch rings set in
cement concrete blocks 25 x 10X 10 cms in 1:2:4 mix 30 cms
vertically and staggered. Foot rest shall be coated with coaltar
before embedding.

9.6 All manholes shall be provided with cast iron covers and frames
and embedded in reinforced cement concrete slab. Weight of
cover and frame shall be as specified in the schedule of
quantities or as given in para 10.2./the cover can also be
replaced with SFRC heavy duty cover.
9.7 Size of manhole should not be less than 900x600 mm in normal
circumstances.

10. SHOP DRAWINGS:-

The Contractor shall prepare and furnish all shop drawings at no
extra cost for approval by the Engineer Such shop drawings shall
be based on the Architectural & plumbing drawings and
requirements laid down in the specifications and as per site
conditions

11. MAKING CONNECTIONS:

Item for making connections to municipal sewer shall be paid
for by number and shall include all items given in the schedule
of quantities and specifications.
SECTION P.H.6

SPECIFICATIONS FOR FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM

1. PIPES AND FITTINGS FOR INTERNAL WORK:-

a) Pipes within the building in exposed locations and shafts
including connections buried under floor shall be black steel
tubes conforming to IS 1239-1979 (Heavy class) with screwed or
welded joints as specified by the Engineer-Incharge.

b) Fittings for GI/MS pipes shall be approved type malleable iron

(forged fittings) for tapered screwed joints. Fittings shall be
approved type steel fittings conforming to IS 1239-1982 Part II
for screwed joints, welded and fabricated.

c) Pipes and fittings for 50mm dia and below must have threaded
joints all bends, tees etc. for 50mm and below shall be standard
forged fittings. Cast iron fittings and fabricated fittings shall not
be accepted.

2. JOINTING:-
a) M.S./GI Pipes:- Pipes 50mm dia, and below shall be provided
with metal to metal tapered threaded joints. Red lead shall be
used for lubrication and rust prevention.

Pipes 65mm dia and above shall be provided with electrical

resistance welding, jointing shall be butt welded between pipe
and fittings.

b) Joints between C.I and M.S pipe shall be made by providing a

suitable flanged tail or socket piece and M.S flanges on the M.S
pipe shall have appropriate number of holes and shall be
fastened with nuts, bolts and 3mm thick compressed asbestos
gaskets.

3. EXCAVATION:-
Excavation for pipe lines shall be open trenches to levels and
grades shown on the drawings or as required at site. Pipe lines
shall be buried to a minimum depth of 1 to 1.5 meter or as
shown on the drawings:-
a) Wherever required contactor shall support all trenches or
adjoining structures with adequate timber supports.
b) On completion of testing and painting, trenches shall be refilled
with excavated earth in 15 cm layers and consolidated.
c) Contractor shall dispose off all surplus earth within a lead of 200
mtrs or as directed by the Engineer-in-charge.
4. ANCHOR BLOCKS:-
Contractor shall provide suitable cement concrete anchor blocks
of ample dimensions at all bends, tee connections and other
places required and necessary for overcoming pressure thrusts in
pipes. Anchor blocks shall be of cement concrete 1:2:4 mix ( 1
cement 2 coarse and 4 stone aggregate 20mm nominal gauge)

5. VALVES.
Sluice valves 80mm dia, and above dia, shall be cast iron double
flanged solid wedge, outside screw non rising stem, yoke type
bonnet and two piece gland construction. The valves shall have
renewable screwed body seat rings. Flanges shall have raised
faces and serrated face finish and shall conform to IS 780-1984.
Check valves shall be cast iron double flanged conforming to
IS:5312-1975 with cast iron steel body 13% chrome steel disc.
hange pin and body seat ring

6. FIRE HYDRANTS EXTERNAL HYDRANTS:-

Contractor shall provide external hydrants. The hydrants shall be
controlled by a cast iron sluice valve. Hydrants shall have
instantaneous type 63mm dia outlet. The hydrants shall be of
gun metal and flange inlet and single outlet conforming to IS:
908-1975 with G.I. dusk foot bend and flanged riser or required
height to bring the hydrant to correct level above ground.
Contractor shall provide for each external fire hydrant two nos.
of 63mm dia 15 meter long rubberized fabric linen hose pipe with
gunmetal male an female instantaneous type couplings machine
wound with G.I. wire ( hose to IS 636 type 2 and couplings to
IS:903 with IS: Certification), gunmetal branch pipe with 16mm
nozzle to IS:903.

7. INTERNAL HYDRANTS:-
Contractor shall provide on each landing and other locations as
shown on the drawings one single handed gunmetal landing
valve with 63mm dia, outlets and 80mm inlet (IS:5290: 1969)
with individual shut off valves and cast iron wheels. Landing
valves shall have flanged inlet and instantaneous type outlet as
shown on the drawings.
Instantaneous outlet for hydrants shall be of standard pattern
approved and suitable for fire brigade hoses. Contactor shall
provide for each internal fire hydrant station four numbers of
63mm i/d 15 meter long rubberized fabric linen hose pipes with
G.I. wire ( Hose to I.S 636 type 2 and coupling to IS : 903 with
IS: certification), fire hose reel, gunmetal branch type with
 nozzle IS : 903 and fireman’s axe. Each hose box shall be
conspicuously painted with the letters “FIRE HOSE”

8. FIRE HOSE REELS:-

Contractor shall provide standard fire hose reels with 20mm dia,
high pressure rubber hose of 36.5 meter length with gunmetal
nozzle with 5mm bore, and control valve, shut of nozzle
connected wall mounted on circular hose reel of heavy duty mild
steel construction and cast iron brackets. Hose reel shall
conform to IS: 884: 1969. The hose reel shall be connected
directly to the M.S. pipe riser through an independent
connection.

9. ORIFICE FLANGES:-
Provide orifice flanges fabricated from 6mm thick stainless steel
plate to reduce pressure on individual hydrants to restrict the
opening pressure to 3.5 kg/sqcm. The design of the orifice
flanges shall be given by the contractor as per the location and
pressure conditions of each hydrant/ hose reel.

10. FIRE BRIGADE CONNECTION:-

Provide as shown on drawings gunmetal two or four way
collecting head with 63mm dia instantaneous type inlet with built
in check valve and 100/150mm dia. Outlet connection to the fire
main grid and for tank filling, collecting head shall conform to IS
904-1965.

11 DRAWN OFF CONNECTION:-

11.1 Air Valves:-
Provide 25mm i/d screwed inlet single acting brass air valve on
all high points in the system or as shown on drawings on top of
air cushion tanks.

11.2 Drain valve:-

Provide 50mm i/d G.I pipe ti as per IS: 1239 ( Medium class)
with 50 mm gunmetal full way valve for draining any water in
the system in low pockets as directed by the Consultant/
Engineer-Incharge.

11.3 Hydrant/ Valve Chambers.

Contractor shall provide suitable brick masonry chambers in
cement mortar 1:5 (1 cement 5 coarse sand) on cement
concrete foundations 150mm thick 1:4:8 mix (1 cement 4 fine
sand 8 graded stone aggregate 40mm nominal size) 15mm thick
cement plaster inside and outside finished with a floating coat of
 neat cement inside with cast iron surface box approved by fire
brigade including excavation, back filling, complete.
Valve chamber shall be of the following size:-
For depths 100cm and beyond 120x120 cms
Weight of C.I frame and cover shall be 38 kg

12. PIPE PROTECTION:-

All pipes above ground and in exposed locations shall be painted
with one coat of red-oxide primer and two or more coats of
synthetic enamel paint of approved shade.
All buried MS pipes shall be provided with protection against soil
corrosion by applying two coats of coal tar hot enamel paint, two
layers reinforced fibre glass tissue and finished with one coat of
the above paint (as per IS:10221)

13. PIPE SUPPORTS:-

All pipes shall be adequately supported from ceiling or walls from
existing inserts by structural clamps fabricated from M.S
structural section e.g. rods, channels, angles and flats. All
clamps shall be painted with one coat of red lead and two coats
of black enamel paint.
Where inserts are not provided, the contractor shall provide
anchor fastners. Anchor fastner shall be fixed to walls and
ceilings by drilling holes with electrical drill in an approved
manner as recommended by the manufacturer of the fastners.

14. TESTING:-
All pipes in the system shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure
of 14.5kg/sq.cm without drop in pressure for at least 2 hours.

15. HOSE CABINETS:-

Provide hose cabinets for internal/ external hydrants fabricated
from 16 gauge M.S. sheet with single or double glass front door
and locking arrangement with breakable glass key access
arrangement, duly painted red with stove enameled paint fixed
to wall or self supported on floor as per site conditions. The
cabinet shall also have a separate chamber to keep the key with
breakable glass as per approved design. Hose cabinets shall be
fabricated from 16 gauge M.S Sheet of fully welded construction
with hinged double front door partially glazed with locking
arrangement, stove enameled fire red paint with “FIRE HOSE”
written on it prominently. Samples of hose cabinet for internal
and external works to be got approved from Engineer-in-charge
before installation at site. .
16 SHOP DRAWINGS:-
The Contractor shall prepare and furnish all shop drawings at no
extra cost for approval by the Engineer before commencing
fabrication/manufacture of the equipment. Such shop drawings
shall be based on the Architectural & Fire fighting drawings and
requirements laid down in the specifications and as per site
conditions. The manufacture of equipment shall be commenced
only after the shop drawings are approved in writing by the
Engineer. Such drawings shall be co-ordinated with all disciplines
of work.
SECTION P.H.7

SPECIFICATIONS FOR SPRINKLER SYSTEM

1. PIPES AND FITTINGS :-

Pipes for sprinkler system shall be M.S. pipes conforming to IS:
1239 (heavy class)
Fittings for M.S pipes shall be malleable iron fittings, with
tapered screwed threads or suitable for welded joints.

2. JOINTING:-
Joints for M.S pipes 50mm i/d and below with fittings shall be
metal to metal tapered thread joints. A small amount of red lead
may be used for lubrication and rust prevention. Joints shall not
be welded or caulked.

3. VALVES:-
Sluice valve 80mm i/d and above shall be cast iron double
flanged with non rising spindle and gunmetal inner. Sluice valve
below ground shall be provided with caps suitable for operation
by a key. Sluice valve in exposed location e.g. pump house etc.
shall be provided with cast iron wheels. Sluice valve shall
conform to IS:780 class I.
Check valves shall be cast iron double flanged to IS 5312-1984
with cast iron steel body 13% chrome steel disc., hinge pin and
body seat ring.
Valves on M.S pipes 65mm and below shall be heavy pattern
gunmetal valves with cast iron wheel conforming to IS: 778-
1984 (Class II)

4. AIR VALVE:-
Provided 25mm dia screwed inlet cast iron single acting air
valves on all high points in the system.

5. DRAIN VALVE:-
Provide 50mm dia M.S. pipe to IS 1239 heavy class with 50mm
gunmetal full way valve for draining any water in the system in
low pockets as directed by Engineer-In-charge.

6. SPRINKLER HEAD:-
Sprinkler heads shall be provided at approximate spacing so as
to cover 10 sq. meter per sprinkler head. The spacing shall
however be in conformity with the drawings and properly
 coordinated with electrical fixtures, ventilation ducts and grills
and other services along the ceilings.
Sprinkler heads shall be gunmetal quartz bulb type with a
temperature rating of 680 C Sprinkler head shall be of pendant
type/ side wall/ concealed type.
Alternatively sprinkler may be side wall type with quartzoid bulb
for operation.
Sprinkler heads shall be approved by the under writers
LABORATORIES (U.L) or Fire Officers Committee (FOC). The
finish shall be as specified in the bill of quantities.
Contractor shall install cabinet fabricated from 16 gauge M.S.
sheet with lockable glass shutters and shelves for keeping spare
sprinklers and spanners at locations approved by the Engineer-
In-charge and given in the schedule of quantities.

7. FIRE ALARM :-
One water operated turbine type alarm to be installed on the
sprinkler main. The alarm shall operate and sound a song on the
drop of pressure and flow of water on the mains. Fire alarms
shall be approved by the Engineer-In-charge and installed at
approved locations. The alarm shall be provided with suitable
test cock.

8. PIPE PROTECTION:-
All pipes above ground and in exposed locations shall be painted
with one coat of red oxide primer and two or more coats of
synthetic enamel paint of approved shade.

9. PIPE SUPPORTS:-
All pipes shall be adequately supported from ceiling or walls from
existing inserts by structural clamps fabricated from M.S.
Structural sections e.g rods, channels, angles and flats. All
clamps shall be painted with one coat of red lead and two coats
of black enamel paint. Where inserts are not provided, the
contractor shall provide anchor fastners. The distance and type
of supports shall be mentioned in the drawings.

10. FLOW SWITCH:-

Provide one electrically operated flow indicating switch of
appropriate dia at the head of each circuit. Flow switches should
be capable of the required flow in the circuit. The electrical
cabling for the flow switches and control panel shall be provided
by the contactor.
 SECTION P.H.8
SPECIFICATIONS FOR PUMPS & ANCILLARY EQUIPMENTS.

1. FIRE AND JOCKEY PUMPS:-

a) Pumping Sets:-
Pumping sets shall be multistage horizontal centrifugal multi
stage outlet pumps with cast iron body and bronze dynamically
balanced impeller.
Connecting shaft shall be stainless steel.
Pumps shall be connected to drive by means of flexible coupling
with sheet metal guard.
Pumps shall be provided with approved type of mechanical seals
and pressure gauge with isolation cock on the delivery side.
Pumps shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150% of the
rated capacity at a head of not less than 65% of the rated head.
The shut off head shall not exceed 120% of the rated head.

b) Wet Riser Hydrant and Sprinkler Systems:-

Wet riser hydrant and sprinkler shall be pressurized through a
set of pumps driven by electric motors. Desired pressure shall be
created and maintained in the system by means of main and
jockey pump sets. The working of the pump sets shall be as
under:-
Main pump for Hydrant and Sprinkler systems automatically start
on reduction in the pressure in the system at pre-determined
level. Also manual start arrangement shall be made in case of
failure of automatic start system.
Pump set shall stop by manual operation only.
Stand by main pump (Diesel Engine Driven)
In the event of failure in the operation of main pump sets for
hydrants and sprinklers, the standby main pump shall come into
operation when the pressure in the system is reduced to a pre-
determined level. Also manual start arrangement shall be made
in case of failure of automatic start arrangements.
Pump set shall stop by manual operation only.

c) Jockey pump:-
Starting and stopping of Jockey pump set shall be automatic at
pre- determined levels. However, arrangements for manual start
and stop of the pump shall also be made. Jockey pump shall take
care of small leakages in the piping system and pumps cushion
tanks.
2. ELECTRIC DRIVE:-
Electrically driven pumps shall be provided with totally enclosed
induction motors suitable for fire pumps.
The motors should be rated not to draw more than 4.5 times the
starting current.
Motors shall be at least equivalent to the horse power required to
drive the pump at 150% of its rates discharge.
The motors shall be wound for class E insulation and winding
shall be vacuum impregnated with heat and moisture resisting
varnish, glass fibre insulated.

3. DIESEL ENGINE:-
Diesel Engine shall be of suitable HP with individual heat
assemblies. The engine shall be water cooled and shall include
heat exchanger and connecting piping strainer isolating and
pressure reducing valves, bye pass line complete in all respects.
Engine shall be direct injection type with low noise and exhaust
emission levels.
The speed of engine shall match the pump speed for direct drive.
The engine shall be capable of being started without the sue of
the wicks, cartridge heater plugs or either at engine room
temperature of 7 deg. C and shall take full load within 15
seconds from the receipt of the signal to start.
The engine shall effectively operate at 38 deg. C ambient
temperature at 150 meters above mean sea level.
Noise level of the engine shall not exceed 105 db. (free field
sound pressure) at 3 meters distance.
The engine shall be self starting type upto 4 deg. C shall be
provided with one 24 volts heavy duty D.C. battery, starter,
cutout, battery, leads complete in all respects. One additional
spare battery shall be provided. The battery shall have a capacity
of 200 ampere hours and 640 amperes cold cracking amperage.
Provided a battery charger of 10 to 15 amperes capacity with
trickle and booster charging facility and regulators.
Arrangement for starting shall be automatic on receiving the
signal. But shut off shall be manual.
The engine shall be provided with an oil bath or dry type air
cleaner as per manufacturer’s design.
Engine shall be suitable for running on high speed diesel oil.
The system shall be provided with a control panel with push
button starting arrangements also wired to operate the engine
on a differential pressure gauge. The entire system shall be
 mounted on a common structural base plate with anti vibration
mounting, Dunlop make, and flexible connections on the suction
and delivery piping.
Provided with one fully mounted and supported diesel oil tank
fabricated from 6mm thick MS sheet electrically welded of 8
hours working load but not less than 200 litres. Provided with
level indicators- low level and fill level in the diesel oil tank on
the control panel through float switches and an air breather.
Provided one exhaust pipe with suitable muffler (residential type)
to discharge the engine gases to outside in open air as per site
conditions (contractor to check the site.)
Provide all accessories, fittings, and fixtures necessary and
required for a complete operating engine set. The exhaust pipe
shall be taken outside the building with a number of bends.
(approx. length 29 mtrs.) and shall be duly heat insulated with
rain cover.
Contractor shall indicate special requirements, if any, for the
ventilation of the pump room.

4. BASE PLATE
Pumps and motors shall be mounted on a common structural
base plate with anti vibration mounting.

5. AIR VESSEL:-
Provided one air vessel fabricated from 12mm M.S. plate with
dished ends and suitable supporting legs. Each air vessel shall be
provided with a 100 mm dia flanged connection from pump, one
25mm dia drain with valve. The gunmetal water level gauge and
25mm sockets for pressure switches. The vessel shall be 450mm
dia x 2000 mm high and tested to 28 kg / sq cm pressure.
The fire pumps shall operate on drop of 1kg/ sq cm pressure in
the mains. The pump operating sequence shall be arranged in a
manner to start the pumps automatically but should be stopped
by starter push buttons only.

6. VIBRATION ELIMINATORS :-
Provided on all suction and delivery lines double flanged
reinforced neoprene flexible pipe connections. Connectors should
be suitable for a working pressure of each pump and tested to
the test pressure given in the relevant head. Length of the test
connector shall be as per manufacturer details.

7. SWITCH BOARD CUBICLE:-

 Provide and install one switch board cubicle of approved dust and
vermin proof type fabricated from 16 gauge MS sheet and
finished with synthetic enamel paint of approved shade and shall
have plastic identification or for different motors. The cubicle
shall comprise of the followings:-
a) Aluminium bus bar of rated capacity in a separate chamber with
two additional separate chambers.
b) Incoming main isolation switch fuse unit of required capacity
HRC fuses.
c) Isolation switch fuse unit of required capacity HRC fuses, one for
each motor.
d) Fully automatic auto transformer starters with push buttons, one
for each motor.
e) Fully automatic “STAR DELTA” starters with push buttons for
jockey pumps.
f) Single phasing preventor for suitable rating for each motor.
g) Panel type ampere meters, one for each motor.
h) Panel type volt meter on incoming main with rotary selector
switch to read voltage between phase to neutral and phase to
phase.
i) Three neon phase indicating lamps on incoming main.
j) Two rotary switches for manual/ auto operations of fire and
sprinkler pumps.
k) All inter connecting colour coded wiring from incoming main to
switch gear, meters and accessories within the switch board
panel.

All switchgears and accessories shall be of approved make such

as SIEMENS, ENGLISH ELECTRIC, LARSEN AND TOURBO or
equivalent as approved by the Engineer-In charge.
Switch board cubicles shall be floor mounted type.
8. CABLES:-
Contractor shall provide all power and control cables from the
motor control centre to various motors and control devices.
Cables should conform to IS: 1554 and carry ISI certification
mark.
Wiring cables should conform to IS: 694
All power and wiring cables shall be aluminium conductors, PVC
insulated, armoured and PVC sheathed of 1.1 KW grade.
 All control cables shall have stranded conductors. The cables
shall be supplied in drums as far as possible and bear the
manufacturer’s identification mark.
All cable joints shall be made in an approved manner as per
accepted practice.

9. EARTHING
There should be two independent earthing stations at east 3
meters away from the pump room. The earthing shall consist of
an earth tape connected to an independent plate made of C.I
having a conductivity of not less than 100% International
Standard. All electrical apparatus, cable boxes and sheath/
armour clamps shall be connected to the main bar by means of
branch earth connections of approximate size. All joints in the
main bar and branch bar shall have the lapping surface properly
tinned to prevent oxidation. The joints shall be revetted and
sweathed.
Earth plates shall be buried in a pit 1.2x1.2 M at a minimum
depth of 3 M. below the ground. The connections between the
main bar shall be made by means of three 10mm brass studs
and fixed at 100mm centres. The pit shall be fileld with coke
breeze, rock salt and loose soil. A.G.I pipe of 20mm i/d with
perforations on the periphery shall be placed vertically over the
plate to reach ground level for watering.
A brick masonry manhole 30x30x30 cms size shall be provided
to surrounded the pipe for inspection. A bolted removable link
connecting main bar outside the pit portion leading to the plate
shall be accommodated in this manhole for testing.

10. COMMISSIONING
Commissioning of the systems shall commence only after:-
a) All pipes, accessories, pumping set, fire alarms etc. have been
completely installed and tested.
b) The electrical connection has been made and direction of motor
rotation checked.
c) Related works by other agencies has been completed in all
respects
d) Water supply is available in adequate quantity in the
underground tank.
e) Basement drainage pumps are fully commissioned.
f) On completion of all related work given in para above, start
pumping sets and develop desired pressures in both the systems
 g) Open one hydrant and test if pump starts at desired drop in
pressure and the alarm operates. If required make adjustments
and retest.

11. MAINTENANCE MANUAL :-

On completion of the entire work and successfully
commissioning, contractor shall hand over four copies of the
maintenance manual of all equipments installed by him.
Maintenance manuals shall include information relating to make,
model No. year of manufacture for all electrical and mechanical
equipment with names of local suppliers or manufacturer’s
agents.
SECTION P.H. 9
COMMISSIONING FOR THE FIRE FIGHTING SYTEM

1. PRE COMMISSIONING:-
On completion of the installation of all pumps, piping, valves,
pipe connections, electrical wiring, motor control panels and
water level controlling devices, the contractor shall proceed as
follows:-
a) Testing of M.C.C.
i) Insulation resistance test with 500 volt megger before and after
high voltage test, on all power and control wiring.
ii) High voltage test at 2000 volts A.C for one minute on all power
and control wiring.
iii) Low voltage continuity test ( 6 volts) on power wiring of each
feeder, between bus bars and outgoing terminals with switches
and contactors in closed position.
iv) Low voltage continuity test (6 volts) on all control wiring.
v) Operation test for all feeders with only control supply made “
ON” to ensure correctness of control wiring, operation of the
various equipments used such as push buttons, protective
devices, indicating lamps and relays etc. All contractors shall be
checked for the presence of humming and chattering.
vi) Earth continuity test with voltage not exceeding 6 volts between
various non current carrying metallic of equipment, steel work
etc. and the earth bus provided in the M.C.C
vii) Operation of all instruments and meters provided on the M.C.C.

2. FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

i) Check all hydrant valves and close if any valve is open. Check
that all suction and delivery connections are properly made.
ii) Test run and check rotation of earth motor and correct the same
required.

3. PIPE WORK
i) Check all clamps, supports and hangers provided for the pipes.
ii) Fill up pipes with water and apply hydrostatic pressure to the
system as given in the relevant section of the specifications. If
any leakage is found, rectify the same and retest the pipes.

4. COMMISSIONING AND TESTING

a) Fire Hydrant System
 i) Pressurize the fire hydrant system by running the main fire pump
and after attaining the required pressure shut off the pump.
ii) Open by pass valve and allow the pressure to drop in the
system. Check that the jockey pump cuts-in and cuts-out at the
pre-set pressures. If necessary adjust the pressure switch for the
jockey pump. Close by pass valve.
iii) Open hydrant valve and allow the water to flow into the fire
water tank in order to avoid wastage of water. The main fire
pump should cut-in at the present pressure and should not cut-
out automatically on reaching the normal line pressure. The main
fire pump should stop only by manual push button. However, the
jockey pumps should cut out as soon as the main pump starts.
iv) Switch off the main fire pump and test check the diesel engine
driven pump in the same manner as the electricity driven pump.
v) When the fire pumps have been checked for satisfactory working
on automatic controls, open fire hydrant valves simultaneously
and allow the hose pipes to discharge water into the fire tank to
avoid wastages. The electrically driven pump should run
continuously for eight hours so that its performance can be
checked.
vi) Diesel engine driven pump should also be checked in the same
manner as given in para above by running for 8 hours.
vii) Check each landing valve, male and female coupling and branch
pipes for compatibility with each other. Any fitting which is found
to be incompatible and does not fit into the other properly, shall
be replaced by the contractor. Landing valves shall also be
checked by opening and closing under pressure.

5. SPRINKLER SYSTEM.
i) Start the sprinkler pump and develop the right pressure in the
sprinkler pipes.
ii) Open the test valve to check the automatic starting of the pump.
If necessary make adjustments in the setting of the pressure
switch. The sprinkler fire alarm should also operate when the test
valve is open.
iii) After satisfactory operation of the pump, the contractor shall set
up a mock fire and test and system.

6. HANDING OVER.
i) All commissioning and testing shall be done by the contractor to
the complete satisfaction of the Engineer- Incharge and the job
handed over to the client.
ii) Contractor shall also hand over to the client all maintenance and
operation manuals and all items as per the items of the contract.
SECTION P.H. 10

INSTALLATION OF TUBEWELL

1. SELECTION OF SITE:-

The site where the employer wants to sink the tube-well should
be examined by the contractor and if necessary a more suitable
alternate site may be selected in consultation and agreement of
both parties, so that the chances of success of tube well are
maximum. Any previous data available with the contractor of the
nearby areas should be made use to evolve suitable procedure
for drilling, developing and testing etc.

2. DRILLING:-

The drilling shall be done in accordance with the specifications

contained in IS: 2800 Part–I–1979 and as described in schedule
of work of tender document. It should be carried out through
approved agencies of PWD(PH) Department only.

3. DRILLING TIME LOG BOOK:-

As the drilling progresses, an accurate drilling time log book shall

be maintained by the contractor, indicating time taken to drill
every two meters depth of where there is change of strata. This
log will enable interpretation regarding the nature of formation
(hard, soft, unconsolidated etc.) which has a bearing of water
fielding capacity of the formation.

4. GEOLOGICAL DATA:-

a) Samples of drill cuttings from different strata shall be collected at

suitable intervals preferably at every two meters depth drilled or
at closer intervals, if a change in strata is met with.
b) After the drilling has reached sufficient length all the samples of
strata collected shall be got examined analyzed in a laboratory.
c) The dried samples shall be handed over by the contractor.

5. DESIGN AND LOWERING OF PIPE ASSEMBLY.

The design and diameter of the housing pipe shall be as specified

in the schedule of work. The size and length of blind pipes and
slotted strainer shall be in accordance with the requirements to
the strata met with, the expected discharge and the depth of
 tubewell. The design of the pipe assembly shall be submitted by
the contractor and approved by the Engineer-Incharge.

6. GRAVEL PACKING:-

All gravel shall consist of hard well rounded particles reasonably

uniform in diameter and shall be of a size given in the schedule
of work.

7. DEVELOPMENT OF TUBEWELL:-

a) The well shall be developed either by surging and agitating or by

over pumping and back wash with an acceptable method may
also be adopted with the consent of the Engineer Incharge. The
development process shall be continued until the stabilization of
sand and gravel pack has taken place.
b) The development of the tubewell by over pumping should be
done at 15% to 25% higher discharge than the expected
discharge from the tubewell.

8. GROUTING AND SEALING:-

Grouting and sealing of the tubewell may be done. If required by

the Corporation depending upon the site conditions and quality of
the discharge of the strata encountered. If should be applied in
one continuous operation. Sealing of the tubewell may be done
by grouting angular space between bore and the housing pipe,
thickness of grouting depending upon the quality of water.

9. HANDING OVER OF THE TUBEWELL

The tubewell should be handed over to the employer in complete

shape the housing pipe should be closed by a well cap for the
period between the completion of tubewell and the installation of
the pump set. The following information should be furnished by
the contractor on completion of the tubewell.

a) Strata chart of the tubewell indicating different types of soil

met with at different depth.
b) Samples of strata collected, neatly packed and correctly
mixed in sample bags/ wooden box.
c) Chart of actual pipes assembly lowered indicating size of
pipes, depth range where slotted/ strainer pipes, depth
ranges, where slotted strainer pipes have been used, depth
 and diameter of housing pipe, reduced level at the top of the
housing pipe and diameter and depth of the bore hole.
d) Position of every joint in the well assembly.
e) Hours of development done by compressed air, pump set or
by other means.
f) Pumping water level at developed discharge.
g) Reports of the samples of water got tested in the approved
laboratories.

10. VERTICALLY AND ALIGNMENT:-

a) As per IS: 2800 (Part II) 1980

SECTION P.H. 11

RCC OVER HEAD SERVICE RESERVOIR

1. ELEVATED SERVICE RESERVOIR:-

1.1 GENERAL
For the elevated service reservoir, also known as overhead tank,
the work is inclusive of necessary excavation in all types of soft
and hard strata concrete below foundation, foundation concrete,
RCC footing, supporting structure consisting of columns, braces,
container tank covered with RCC roof slab / dome, with RCC
ventilator in the roof, RCC spiral stair case, aluminium ladder,
lighting conductor, RCC gallery at floor and roof level (for roof
dome only), providing and fixing of pipe assembly, GI pipe
railing, valves, construction of BB masonary chambers for sluice
valves, providing and laying RCC pipe line for drain, cement
plaster for tank from inside with water proofing material.
The structure retaining water should be given a water tightness
test as per IS: 456 -2000.

1.2 GENERAL WORK REQUIREMENT:

Cement Concrete shall be in accordance with IS: 456-2000 and

all liquid retaining RCC shall comply with IS: 3370-1965 (part 1
to VI) and IS: 456- 2000.
Fine and coarse aggregate shall be conforming to IS: 383-1970
or its latest revision. The selection of the type of fine and coarse
aggregates and water to be actually used shall be such as to
produce dense concrete of the required specified standards.
For junctions between vertical cylindrical wall and the basic rib in
case of Intz tanks or base slabs with vertical cylindrical wall
water stoppers in the form of PVC water bars or copper plate of
approved quality and sizes shall be provided for ensuring water
tightness at critical junctions. Similarly for junctions of inclined
cones with staging ring beam for Intz tanks water stoppers bars
shall be provided.
Construction joints for vertical cylindrical walls shall be made in
the form of ‘V’ groove of trapezoidal groove of 50mm top width
and 50mm depth by providing a circular shape wooden form
work to ensure size of groove and after laying concrete the
horizontal surfaces made rough.
1.3 DESIGN AND APPROVAL OF OHSR:

The design of RCC Over Head Service Reservoir shall be got

prepared by the contractor from the reputed Engineering
Institution in Punjab. Approval of design shall be accorded by the
Engineer in charge.

1.4 G.I. PIPE RAILING:

GI pipe railing of medium class as per specification No.1239-

1982 duly ISI marked at roof level and at gallery level shall be
provided as per approved drawing and direction of Engineer in
charge. The pipe works include all necessary GI specials such as
Tees, bends, elbows etc all joints are to be threaded and
screwed, 25mm GI railing 1000mm height with two horizontal
row of pipe and post of RCC 15x15cm at bottom and 10x10cm at
top or angle iron of size 50x50x6mm and placed at 1.5 mt.
interval including painting 2 coats of synthetic enamel paint over
one coat of red oxide primer and anchorage in RCC etc complete.

1.5 M.S. MANHOLE:

M.S. Manhole frame and cover with locking arrangement shall be

provided with ladder for entering into the overhead services
reservoir for maintenance purpose. The size of manhole shall be
1.00 mtr / 0.75 mtr and it should be painted with anticorrosive
paint over a coat of primer.

1.6 LIGHTENING ARRESTOR:

Lightening arrestor shall be provided at the highest level on the

roof of the tank as per IS:2309-1969, code of practice for the
protection of buildings and allied structures against such
lightening. Position and height of lightening arrestor shall be
such that the whole structure shall be enclosed within cone
having its apex at top end of the arrestor and generated by a line
inclined at 60° to the vertical. The arrestor shall be suitably
earthed.

1.7 VENTILATOR:

The RCC hexagonal ventilator shall be provided as per standard

type design. The finish shall be done with CC 1:2:4 for RCC using
20mm and down size granite jelly with reinforcement using 5mm
diameter and MS rods four numbers for each of the pillars, and
 for dome at 12 cms centre to centre both ways. The size of
ventilator shall be 0.45mmx0.5m size. The ventilator shall be
provided with 24x24x5mm. MS frame welded with diamond
mesh to its full width and depth fully covered with brass
mosquito net of 16 mesh finished smooth with CM 1:3 proportion
to required shape and size and ornamental finish, including
providing 2 coats of anti corrosive paint for frame and mesh, and
two coats of cement paint matching to that of the overhead tank
to the ventilator pillars and dome.

1.8 M.S. LADDER:

Providing and fixing MS ladder of 45 cm wide with angle iron

65x65mm with 16mm MS twin round bars fixed at 30cm centre
to center. GI pipe railing on one size (outersize) of 20mm i/d in
one row 50x50x6mm vertical post of 1.0m slant height fixed at
1.5m centre to centre including pipes specials, painted, cutting,
welding, fixing etc complete in all respects shall be provided by
the contractor.

1.9 JOINTING MATERIALS:

All necessary jointing materials for pipes assembly GI pipe

railing, MS ladder etc such as nuts, bolts, rubber packing,
welding and any other miscellaneous.

2.0 SPECIFICATIONS FOR RESERVOIRS:

2.1 GENERAL NOTE:

a) The contractor shall quote the rate in the appended schedule

for the complete work of constructing RCC overhead service
reservoir to be carried out as per his own design based on
above data i.e. he shall tender the rate in appended schedule
for construction of overhead service reservoir of required
capacity including providing and fixing pipes, specials, valves
and providing and fixing lightening conductor, CI manhole
frame and cover, water level indicator, ventilator etc,
complete with contractor’s own design and drawings.
b) The contractor shall submit the name, qualifications and
experience of design Engineer who has prepared detailed RCC
calculations or will prepare design and drawings on
acceptance of the tender.
c) The design Engineer has to prepare and submit a note on
design methodology and construction and drawing. The note
should indicate general description and salient features of the
design covering the following points:
 i) Capacity
ii) Shape and type
iii) Staging height of tank indicating various levels
iv) Safe bearing capacity assumed in the design or safe
bearing capacity of strata based on actual investigation
report of laboratory and type of foundation provided
with proper justification.
v) Maximum and minimum subsoil water level.
vi) Site plan showing location of Over Head Service
Reservoir.
vii) Line diagram showing dimensional sectional elevation
with important levels.
viii) Design parameters proposed to be adopted for detail
design.

d) After acceptance of tender, the contract will have to submit

three copies of detailed design and drawing of the structure
within 20 days of acceptance of the tender.
e) The Design Engineer will be required to attend the office of
Engineer in charge for preliminary discussion for scrutiny
remarks etc whenever required with all reference data, books,
IS codes, specifications etc at his own cost.
f) It will binding on the Design Engineer of contractor to clarify,
modify redesign and drawings after compliance of scrutiny
remarks by the owner within 15 days of communication of
remarks.
g) On approval of the design, contractor shall supply free of cost
eight sets of design and drawing duly bounded for use of the
owner. The contractor / Firm shall also furnish the programme
of execution for completion of work within the time limit
stipulated in the tender.
h) Security, deposit of the tenderer shall be forfeited if he fails to
modify his design as per scrutiny remarks within specified
time after every of compensations as per tender agreement.
i) Even through the design and drawing submitted by the
contractor / firm are approved by the owner /Engineer in
charge, the contractor / firm will not be relieved of his
contractual obligations to hand over the structure sound
condition duly tested.
 In case of any damage / failure either during construction
testing or after commissioning whether due to faulty design of
defective construction, all repairs or reconstruction of the
structure shall have to be carried out by the contractor / firm
entirely at his risk and cost.
No claim for such repairs / reconstructions shall be
entertained.

3.0 CRITERIA FOR DESIGN OF RCC OVERHEAD TANK:

The structural design of water tank shall conform to the following

standard specifications and codes of practice of ICI
IS:456-2000 Code of practice for plain and reinforced
concrete (latest edition)

IS:875 (Part I to V) Code of practice for structural safety of building,

loading standards (latest edition)

IS:3370 (Part I to VI) Code of practice for concrete structures for

storage of liquids (latest edition)

IS:1893-2002 Criteria for earth quake resistant design of

structure (latest edition)

IS:11682-1985 Criteria for design of RCC staging for overhead

water tanks.

IS:2911 (Part I to IV) Code of practice for pile foundation.

IS:4326 Earthquake resistant design, construction

IS:2950 Code of practice for design and construction of

raft foundation.

IS:1080 Code of practice for design and construction of

shallow foundations in soils (other than rafts,
ring and shell)

IS:1904 Code of practice for design and construction

foundations in soil general requirements.

IS:11089 Code of practice for design and construction of

ring foundations.

4.0 GENERAL
a) Parts of the tank in contact with stored water and enclosing
water vapour above FSL shall be concrete M-20 or in richer
grade.
b) The supporting structure shall be designed in M-20 grade or in
richer grade if specified.
c) The tenderer is however advised to verify actual strata before
tendering and designing the structure and offer suitable
design with full justification.
d) Notwithstanding anything mentioned above, if directed by the
Engineer in charge, the contractor shall carry out actual strata
exploration as prescribed in para 0.2 of IS: 1892-1979,
through a Government Laboratory and adopt bearing capacity
so arrived for the design.
e) For special type of foundations, like pile foundations,
undreamed pile foundation etc decision of the Engineer in
charge shall be final and binding on the designer. Sub
Structure to support overhead service reservoir like shaft shall
not be allowed.
f) Classification of soil and characteristics of soil relevant to SBC
and ABP shall be as per the soil investigation reports of
Government Institutions / Government approved
investigation.
g) For the design of foundations of the solid raft type, the ‘Plate
Theory’ shall be adopted.
h) In the vicinity of mines, collieries and blasting sites or areas
which may be subjected to blast or shock, the tanks shall be
designed for dynamic force adopted to shock.
i) If the design and analysis are made by using computer
software or sophisticated advance techniques, contractor may
be asked by the employer to check the accuracy from
Institutions like IIT or any other institutions approved by
employer before checking of the design is taken by the
employer. Expenses for such verification will have to be borne
by the contractor.
SECTION P.H. 12
SOLAR WATER HEATING SYSTEMS :-
The detailed technical specifications of solar water heating systems,
its equipment, components and installation etc. are indicated
hereunder:
1. SYSTEMS CAPACITY
2 NO of SYSTEMS
2. SYSTEM TEMP. OUTPUT
3. SOLAR COLLECTORS
Type
Make
Applicable IS No.
Quantity of Solar collectors
Absorption area
4. COLLECTOR/TANK SUPPORT
FRAME
5. HOT WATER STORAGE TANKS
(INSULATED)
Quantity
Capacity
Material
Insulating material
Insulating material Density
Insulation thickness
Waterproof covering
Cladding material
7. Distribution PIPINGS (Extra
payable as per actual
measurements)
CPVCI/Composite Pipe
Pipe fittings
System Internal piping size
Insulating material
Insulation thickness
covering
Weatherproof coating
/Cladding material
As specified
As specified
60oC year average basis on clear sunny
days
Selectively coated (Cu-cu type)
ISI marked Make BHEL/TATA BP
/EMMVEE SOLAR SYTEMS Pvt. Ltd
IS:12933
As per requirements
2.0 Sqm(MIN)
MS Angle 35x35x5mm/40X40X4mm
minimum adequate for 150 km/hr wind
pressure
1 No. each
As per site requirements
304 Stainless Steel
Rockwool/Glass wool
48 kg/cu.m
100mm (Min.)
polythene lining
Aluminum 22 swg (0.71 mm thick)
ISI marked
ISI marked
As per site requirements
Imported foam pipe section
9mm/10mm thick
Fiber Tissue lining
Imported resin /aluminium sheet 28
SWG
8 PUMPS As per requirements Grundfos/
Kirloskar
9. TEMPERTURE GAUGE
Quantity
Type 1 No. each for each system
Range Dial gauge
End connection 0-120C
Make ½” BSP
H Guru
10. STRAINER
Material
Type Cast Iron
Mesh Y-type Horizontal
Brass
11 ELECTRICAL BACK-UP As PER REQUIRED Heater ISI Marked
12 HEAT EXCHANGER
Material
Type Stainless Steel 304
Surface area Cage
As per site requirements
13 OPERATION GUARANTEE One year
14 ALLIED CIVIL & ELECTRICAL Complete for making the system
WORKS operational/functional in all respects
including wiring upto nearby distribution
board.

Manufacturers or their authorized distributors/specialized firms of solar

water heating system of BHEL /TATA BP solar system/ EMMVEE SOLAR
SYTEMS Pvt. Ltd make. Distributors will be required to produce
documents in support of their authorization from the
manufacturer. The work shall be carried out by trained authored staff
of the company.
Collector specifications: The collectors shall be of Cu-Cu type with
Absorber area of 2.0 sq. mtrs. The absorber riser-tubes shall be made
of high-grade copper & welded to the copper fins with the State of the
Art ULTRASONIC WELDING process to ensure superior conductivity of
heat & long life of absorber plate. The absorber plate shall be
selectively coated with a very special NALSUN coating for efficient
absorption of heat from the Sun-rays. The efficiency of the collectors
has been specified as FR (Ta) = 0.72, FROL =3.62 W/Sq. mtr/ 0 C. The
outer dimensions of the collector box shall be 2000 mm x 1000 mm x
100 mm with Frame made out of Extruded aluminum sections of 16
SWG specifications (powder coated yellow). The insulating material in
the collectors would be 50mm (bottom) and 25mm (sides) Rock-wool
with thermal conductivity of 0.029W/mk and density 48kg/sq. cm. The
top glass would be toughened clear glass of thickness 4.0mm, with
88% transitivity and be of a reputed make like ATUL. The outer sides
shall be having a Powder Coated finish in Yellow colour. The collector
should have very high Absorbtivity of > 0.95 % & Emissivity < 0.2 %.
Anti-Condensation breather outlet shall be incorporated at rear bottom
of collector to drain out condensed moisture if any. This prevents the
inner glass surface from Fogging.

Tank specifications: The Insulated Hot Water Tank shall be of the

vertically oriented cylindrical type made out of SS-304. It shall be duly
insulated with 100mm thick glass-wool insulation with thermal
conductivity of 0.028 to.033 W/mk and density 48 kg/cu.m. This will
be covered with Aluminum cladding of thickness #22 SWG along with
chicken mesh and thin polythene sheet. There shall be a built in Heat
Exchanger of multiple tube type made of SS-304 to transfer the heat
to the water in the tank. This closed loop system shall be provided
with a make up tank. Also provided shall be a sacrificial anode to
prevent Galvanic Corrosion. Electrical backup of as required with SS/Cu
Thermostat (range 30-800C, 15A/250 VAC) shall also be provided. The
Contractor shall prepare and furnish all shop drawings at no extra cost
for approval by the Engineer before commencing
fabrication/manufacture of the equipment. Such shop drawings shall be
based on the Architectural & Plumbing drawings and requirements laid
down in the specifications and as per site conditions. The manufacture
of equipment shall be commenced only after the shop drawings are
approved in writing by the Engineer. Such drawings shall be co-
ordinated with all disciplines of work
SECTION P.H. 13
WATER TREATMENT & PUMPS

1.0 SCOPE OF WORK

Work under this section consists of furnishing all labour, materials, equipment’s and
appliances necessary and required to supply, install and commission pumping and
water filtration as described hereinafter and given in the schedule of quantities
and/or shown in the drawings. Tentative raw water characteristics are given in
Appendix-1

2.0 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

2.1 All materials shall be new and of the best quality conforming to specifications and
subject to the approval of Engineer.

2.2 All equipment shall be of best available make manufactured by reputed firms.

2.3 All equipment shall be installed on suitable foundations, true to level and in a neat
work-man-like manner.

2.4 Equipment shall be so installed as to provide sufficient clearance between the end
walls and between equipment to equipment.

2.5 Piping within the pump houses shall be so done as to prevent any obstruction in the
movement within the pump house.

2.6 Each pumping set shall be provided with a valve and a flap type non-return valve on
the delivery side.

2.7 The contractor shall submit the following documents :

a.Process and hydraulic design calculations for all units.
b. Civil, Structural arrangement , design calculations if included in the scope of
work
c. Plant layout drawings
d. Process flow sheet
e.Design Philosophy
f. All technical brochures,
g.Operation and maintenance manuals and other details of the system offered.
h.Equipments listing & list of consumables.
2.8 The contractor shall supply shop drawings with supporting details for approval
from Engineer before procurement of material. The contractor shall also
obtain approval from local statutory authority / authorities as applicable at no
extra cost.

Four sets of shop drawings shall be submitted for approval showing:

a) Any change in layout from the contract drawings.

b) Equipment layout, piping, wiring diagram and instrumentation.

c) Manufacturer’s or contractor’s fabrication drawings for any material or

equipment.
2.9 COMPLETION DRAWINGS

On completion of the work and before issuance of certificate of virtual

completion, the Contractor shall submit to the Engineer. General layout
drawings, drawn at approved scale indicating layout of pump house piping
and its accessories “As installed ". These drawings shall in particular give
the following:

a. General layout of pump house.

b. Panels and other equipment location and sizes etc.

c. Complete Schematic as installed.

d. Route of all cables and pipes run along with detail sizes and mode of
installation.

2.10 The contractor shall also include the cost of supply and execution any other
item required for the effective functioning of system but not mentioned in
schedule of quantities/ specifications.

2.11 The contractor shall also arrange for the appropriate training for the clients staff.
2.12 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE

At the close of the work and before issue of final certificate of virtual completion by
the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish a written guarantee indemnifying the
Owner against defective materials and workmanship for a period of one year after
completion and handing over. The Contractor shall hold himself fully responsible for
reinstallation or replace free of cost to the Owner.
a. Any defective material or equipment supplied by the Contractor.
b. Any material or equipment supplied by the Owner which is proved to be
damaged or destroyed as a result of defective workmanship by the
Contractor.
2.13 A tentative treatment scheme is shown in the drawings.

3.0 WATER SUPPLY PUMPS

3.1 Water supply pumps shall be centrifugal types as given in the schedule of quantities.

3.2 Water supply pumps shall be suitable for clean filtered water, pump shall be single
stage pumps with cast iron body and gunmetal/bronze/SS impeller and directly
coupled motor suitable for 400X440 volts, 3 phase, 50 cycles A.C. power supply
and mounted on single base frame.

4.0 WATER FILTER (MULTI-GRADE)

Water filters shall be sand/gravel and anthracite pressure filters downward or

upward flow type suitable for a rate of filtration given in schedule of quantities.

Filters shall be vertical types of a required diameter, the shell shall be fabricated
from M.S. plates suitable to withstand a working pressure given in schedule of
quantities. The thickness of shell and of dished ends shall be as per IS: 2825. The
filter shall have two-pressure tight manhole cover one at the top and other at side
shell portion. Each filter shall be provided with screwed or flanged connections for
inlet, outlet, individual drain connections and all other connections necessary and
required. Filters shall be rubber lined with 3mm thick non-toxic, non-leaching
rubber. Rubber lining to be tested with Spark Tester for pinholes etc. Primary
painting of all exposed surfaces to be done.

5.0 UNDER DRAIN SYSTEM

Each filter shall be provided with an efficient under drain system comprising of
collection pipes, polypropylene nozzles of manufacturer’s design. The entire under
draining system shall be provided on M.S. Plate or cement concrete supports
provided by the contractor.

6.0 FACE PIPING

Each filter shall be provided with interconnection face piping comprising of inlet,
outlet and backwash complete with diaphragm valves/ball valves. Piping shall be
fabricated from mild steel pipes as per IS: 1239.

7.0 ACCESSORIES

Each filter shall be provided with the following accessories:

a) Air release valve with connecting piping.

b) 100mm dia Borden type gunmetal pressure gauges with gunmetal isolation cock and
siphon on inlet and outlet.
c) Sampling cocks on raw water inlet and filtered water outlet.

d) Individual drain connection with ball valves for each filter.

e) Connections with valve for air scouring.

f) Rate of Flow Indicators in the raw water inlet line.

g) Quantity meter in the filter water outlet line

8.0 FILTER MEDIA

8.1 Each filter shall be provided with clean and washed filter media, following is
recommended.

Coarse Silex Pebbles 6.0 - 10.0mm size (150mm deep)

Fine Silex Sand 1.4 - 2.5mm size (600mm deep)

Anthracite 0.80 - 1.6mm dia (600mm)

8.2 The above filter media arrangement may be altered to suit contractor’s own design
for the most efficient performance and also keeping the low height available for the
installation of these Vessels.

9.0 TEST KITS

9.1 Provide one test kit with initial requirement of reagents for the following:

Residual Chlorine Indicator

Valve

9.2 Details of equipment with literature shall be supplied with the tender.

100 PAINTING AND CLEAN UP

a) On completion of the installation Contract shall be scrub clean all pumps, piping,
filters and equipment and apply one coat of primer.

b) Apply two or more coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved make and shade.

c) Provide painted identification legend and direction arrows on all equipment’s and
piping as directed by Engineer.

d) All M.S. fabricated items M.S. pipe lines structural, vessels for water treatment plant
shall be painted with zinc/chromate primer after through cleaning. On completion
of the installation Contractor shall scrub clean all pumps, piping, filters and
equipment and again apply one coat of zinc chromate primer.
e) On final completion of the work, contractor shall clean up the site and the pump
room, pump room of all surplus material, rubbish and leave the place in a broom
clean condition.

11.0 MOTOR CONTROL CENTERS

11.1 Switchboard cubicles of approved type shall be fabricated from 2mm thick CRC
sheet with dust and vermin proof construction. It shall be painted with powder
coating of approved make and shade. It shall be fitted with suitable etched plastic
identification plates for each motor. The cubicle shall comprise of the following
(Switchgear as given in the schedule of quantities):

a) Incoming MPCB of required capacity

b) Isolation MPCB/MCCB, one for each motor

c) Fully automatic DOL/Star Delta starters suitable for motor DOL upto 7.5 H.P.;
Star/Delta for 10 H.P. and above H.P. with push buttons one for each motor and
On/Off indicating neon lamps.

d) Single phasing preventor of appropriate rating for each motor

e) Rotary duty selector switch

f) Panel type ampere meters one for each motor shall be with rotary selector switch to
read line currents.

g) Panel type voltmeter on incoming main with rotary selector switch to read voltage
between phase to neutral and phase to phase

h) Neon phase indicating lamps and indicating lamp for each motor and on incoming
mains.

i) Rotary switch for manual or auto operation for each pump

j) Fully taped separate aluminium bus bar of required capacity for normal and
emergency supply where specified.

k) Space for liquid level controllers and other equipment specified separately in the
contract/given in the schedule of quantities

l) The panel shall be pre-wired with colour coded wiring. All interconnecting wiring
from incoming main to switchgear, meters and accessories within the switchboard
panel. Wiring shall have suitable copper or aluminium ferrules.

11.2 Switchboard cubicle shall be floor or wall mounted type as directed by the Engineer.
12.0 WATER SOFTENING PLANT

Mild steel pressure vessel complete with dished ends, supporting legs and facing pad
for pipe connection, internally rubber lined and externally two coats of red oxide
primer and two coats of synthetic enamel paint complete with manhole, cover,
frontal pipe work fitted with valves provided with inlet, outlet pressure gauges and
sample valves and with frontal pipe work complete with manually. Ball Diaphragm
for normal operation and regeneration and hydraulically operated erector, initial
charge of resin and internals consisting of distributor, collector and regeneration
tank to store and measure chemicals for regeneration.

13.0 TREATED WATER QUALITY

The out put from Softener shall conform to commercial hardness. Similarly the
resultant Other output parameters from the system shall with in the Desirable limits
specified in IS :10500 standards.

APPENDIX - I

Tentative Raw Water Characteristics :

S.NO PARAMETER VALUE

1. Hardness 850 mg/l

2. Colour Less than 5

3. Odour Unobjectionable

4. Turbidity 4 NTU

5. PH 6.5 to 8.5

6. Total iron 0.1 mg/l

7. Chlorides 250 mg/l

8. Total Dissolved solids 1100 mg/l

9. Coliform organisms at 37o C (MPN) 221 per 100 ml

10. E-Coli 79/100 ml

Note : The parameters and characteristics of raw water given are tentative only.
The contractor shall on his own collect and assess the nature of water available at
the site and has to design the system according to that.
SECTION P.H. 14
LIST OF CODES (RELATING TO PLUMBING WORKS )

Vitreous IS:2556-1974 (Part I)

IS:2556-191 (Part-II) IS:2556-1984 (Part III)
Cast Iron Cistern IS:774-1984
Ball Valve IS:1703-1977
Cistern Brackets IS:775-1970
Toilet Seat Cover IS:2548-1983
Vitreous China Cistern IS:2326-1987
Sand Cast Iron Pipes & Fittings IS:1729-1979
Spun Cast Iron Pipes & Fittings IS:3989-1984
GI pipes IS:1239-1979
Galvanizing for GI pipes IS:4736-1986
Pipe Threads IS:554-1985
Malleable Iron Fitting IS:1879-1987
Cast Iron Sluice Valves IS:780-1984
Fully Way Valves IS:778-1984
Brass Ferrule IS:2692-1978
Stone Ware Gully Trap IS:651-1980
RCC pipes IS:458-1971
Cast Iron Class LA Pipes IS:1536-1989
Cast (Spun) Iron Fittings IS:1538-1976
Pig Lead IS:782-1966
Induction Motors IS:4691
IS:325
IS:4029
IS:4728
SECTION P.H. 14
LIST OF CODES (RELATING TO FIRE FIGHTING WORKS )

MS/GI Tubes upto 150mm IS:1239

MS Tubes above 150mm IS:3589

Malleable Iron/GI Fittings IS:1239-1982 (Part-I)

Cast Iron Sluice Valves IS:780-1984

Check Valves IS:5312-1975

External Fire Hydrant Valve IS:908-1975

Internal Fire Hydrant Valve IS:5290-1983

Rubberized Fabric Lined Hose IS:636-(Type-I)

Couplings, Branch Pipe, Nozzles IS:903

First Aid Fire Hose (Rubber) IS:5132-1969

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR E.I.
WORK.
1.0 GENERAL:-

1.1 Separate earth wire (copper) will run for the light and power
sockets and extra payment will be made for the same.

1.2 The main switches and BDB’s shall be connected with thimbles/
lugs duly crimped with crimping tools.

1.3 Only ISI mark or as per ISI copper cable should be used( as per
list of approved makes attached) or equivalent as approved by
the Engineer-in-charge.

1.4 The cable and connection should be done to the switch gear by
suitable size glands.

1.5 The insulation test continuity test, earthing test and other
electrical installation test will be done by the bidder in the
presence of Engineer- in-charge at site of work after the
completion of the work.

1.6 ELCB should be of approved makes as per list attached or

equivalent or approved by the Engineer-incharge.

1.7 The piano type accessories such as switches, sockets, ceiling

roses etc. should be of ISI mark only.

1.8 The fans should be of approved makes as per list attached.

1.9 The fluorescent fitting, minor optics fittings and street light
fittings etc. should be of approved makes as per list attached.

1.10 The switch gear should be got approved from the Engineer-
incahrge of work before installation at site.

1.11 The junction box from where wires lead to BDB shall be at least
100mm deep and 150mm high and long enough to accommodate
the conduit pipe in a straight line.

1.12 The light plug shall be tapped tapped from nearby power by
means of 2.5 sqmm(1/1.80mm) cable through 20mm i/d conduit
pipe and max. 2 Nos light plugs can be tapped from the power
plug. Where there is no power plug separate circuit with 2.5
sqm. Cable shall be drawn for feeding the supply to the light
plugs.
1.13 The bakelite sheets to be provided should be of 3mm thickness
of makes HYLAM, FORMICA or any other make approved by the
Engineer- incharge.

1.14 Only ISI mark Button Holders and bakelite accessories shall be
used or as approved by the Engineer-incharge.

1.15 The work shall be carried out strictly in accordance with the
Punjab PWD Govt. specifications 1985 revised for electrical works
in Govt. Building in the State and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-incharge.

1.16 The C.I/ M.S fan box for suspension hook should be of size 4.5”
i/d, 4” deep and of 16 gauge with 0.5”i/d (plain steel for
suspension hook. The rod should be projected 6” on each side of
the box or the design of the fan box shall be as approved by the
Engineer-incharge.

1.17 The breaking up and making good of wall ceiling and floors shall
be done by the contractor at his own cost and to the entire
satisfaction of the Engineer-incharge of the work. No extra
payment will be made for the same.

1.18 Looping in system of wiring shall be adopted for all sub circuit
wiring.

1.19. The size of Branch Distribution Board (BDB) are designed on the
basis of 8 points ( light, fan, call bell) and light plug connected
tone way of BDB and in case of 10/ Amp, Power plug points, two
power plugs are to be connected to one way of 32 Amp. , DBD’s
or one point per way 16 Amp. BDB’s. This practices should
strictly be followed for connecting points to way of the BDB’s.

1.20 The G.I. pipe for earthing purpose for protection of earthern
wires should be class ‘A’ water quality.

1.21 Before energizing the system the following tests shall be given
by the contractor so as to find out the installation to the relevant
rules/ regulations.

a) Earth resistance test.

b) Earth continuity test of conduit pipe or other iron cad
system etc.
c) Insulation test.
d) Polarity test.
1.22 The control switch should not be installed at height less than
120cm from floor level or as directed by the Engineer-incharge.

1.23. The body of branch distribution fuse board should be machine

made with 1.60mm thick solid steel sheet.

1.24 Grip fuse units of sheet metal clad, switches and branch
distribution fuse boards should be of N.C type so as to have the
facility of interchangeability.

1.25 Brass screws to fix brown bakelite/ white glazed or translucent

back side painted sheet cover 3mm thick. This should be fixed by
means of flat headed brass machine screws with brass ring
washers underneath.

1.26. All conduit use in work shall be adequately bushed with PVC
bushes to prevent abrasion of insulation of conductor and shall
also be bonded to earth.

1.27 The connection of earth wire with sheet metal/ iron clad switch
and branch distribution fuse boards of other metallic cases shall
be according to the Indian Electricity Rules and made by means
of suitable cable socket solded at the end of earth wire.

1.28 All shutters for covering the switches, BDB,s should be as per
architectural drawing.

1.29 Welded conduit pipe (screw type) made from 1.60 mm thick
sheet as stipulated in schedule emanalled/coated with two coats
of approved paint shall be used. The conduit pipe shall be joined
by means of screwed sockets to that it shall be electrically
continuous throughout. The threads shall be free from grease oil
etc. and no material of nature should be allowed to come in
contact with the conduit. Sharp edges or bare should not be
allowed to remain due to which insulation of conduit pipe is likely
to be damaged.

1.30 For the complete work of E.I. circuit key diagram shall be
provided by the Contractor before the finalizing of bill for display
at the important places in the Hospital as per the instructions of
XEN (elect,)

1.31 The electrical installation work shall be carried out in accordance

with Indian Standard Code of practice for Electrical wiring
installation IS 732-1989 and IS 2274-1963. it shall also be in
conformity with the current Indian Electricity Rules & Regulations
& Requirements of the Local Electricity supply authority and fire
 insurance regulation. Electrical work in general shall be carried
out as per following PWD specifications with upto date
amendment.

1.32 SCOPE OF WORK:

The scope of work shall cover internal and external electrical

works for proposed hospital. The items/activities covered under
internal electrical works shall include the following:

i) Main Distribution Boards, Sub Distribution Boards, Switch fuse

unit/MCB Isolator lifts etc complete in all respects.
ii) Cables from Main Distribution Board to Sub Distribution Boards,
sub main wiring from Main/Sub Distribution Boards to various
final distribution Boards. Power wiring for Hospital Equipment
etc. complete in all respects.
iii) Point wiring of all lights points, Ceiling fan points, exhaust fan
points, light plug points, general power points, metal clad plug &
socket outlet points etc. including supply and fixing of light and
power accessories etc. complete in all respects.
iv) Light fixtures, ceiling fans, exhaust fans.
v) Provision for telephone system consisting of conduit and cabling
from telephone distribution board upto each outlet including
main & sub tag blocks, telephone outlets incoming GI/RCC pipe
etc. complete in all respects.
vi) RCC/GI pipes for cables, manholes, cable tray and other items
required to complete in all respects.
vii) Providing for telephone system consisting of conduit and cabling
from telephone distribution board upto each outlet including
main and sub tag blocks. Etc.
viii) Fire Detection and alarm system consisting of manual call points,
smoke detectors, heat detectors, response indicators, fire alarm
bells/hooters, main fire detection and alarm panel including all
conducting and cabling required completed.
ix) Earthing of electrical installation complete in all respects.
x) Scope of work shall include supply installation, testing and
commissioning of complete electrical installation as described
above.
xi) Providing stand by power by installation DG set of suitable
capacity.
Sub-stain work covering 11 KV board, 11 KV cable, 400 KVA
Transformer, LT cable and main LT panel and Emergency panel.
Etc.
xii) External cabling from substation to various blocks.
Xiii) UPS system, CCTV, lifts wherever required.
Xiv) Based on the tender drawings Contractor has to prepare the
shop/ working drawings including conduiting layout showing all
switches, cable route etc. Based on the site layout Contractor will
also prepare the drawing of the external lighting, cable routes,
hume pipes location for crossing the cable etc. and will get the
approval from the client.

1.33 STANDARD AND REGULATIONS;

All equipments, switchgear, cables and other items of work shall
conform to Indian standard specifications. The installation shall
conform in all respects to Indian Standards Code of Practice for
Electrical wiring installation IS: 732-1989. it shall also be in
conformity with the current Indian Electricity Rules and the
Regulations and Requirements of the Local Electric Supply
Authority Local bay laws / by laws in so far as these become
applicable to the installation. Wherever the specifications call for
a higher standard of materials and/or workmanship than those
required any of the above regulations, these specifications shall
take precedence over the said regulation and standard. In
general, the materials, equipment and workmanship shall
conform to following Indian Standards with up to date
amendments / revisions if any unless otherwise cable for

Specification for DG set 415 V

3 phase 4 wire, 50 Hz IS 4722-19952
BS 5514

11 KV vacuum Circuit Breaker IS 3427-1991

IS 12729-1988

transformer 11 KV / 0.433 KV IS 2026-1977

XLPE cable 11 KV IS 7098 Part I &

II 1988/1985

PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric

Cable part I for voltage upto 1100 volt IS 1554-1988

Marking & arrangements for Switchgear;

Bus bars, main connection & auxiliary wiring IS 378-1963

Specifications for normal duty air break

Switches & composite units for air break
Switches & fuses for voltage not exceeding
1000 volts IS 13947-1993
(part I to V)

specification for low voltage switchgear
& control gear assemblies. IS 8623-1993
(part I to III)

specifications for enclosed distribution IS 2675-1983

installation & maintenance of switchgear IS 10118-1982

(part I to IV)

HRC fuses IS 9224-1979

Specification for rigid steel conduits

For electrical wiring IS 9537-1981
(part II)

Specifications for accessories for rigid steel

Conduits for electrical wiring IS 3837-1976

3 pin plug & socket outlets IS 1293-1988

General & safety requirements for

electric light fittings IS 1913-1978

Electric ceiling fans & regulators IS 374-1979

Code of practice for earthing IS 3043-1987

Current transformers IS 2705-1992

(part – I)

Shunt capacitors for power system IS 2834-2986

Exhaust chimney IS 6533-1989

(part II)

HSD storage tanks IS 803/864

Inspection and approval of the work by local authority. On

completion of this work, the contractor shall obtain and
deliver to the PHSC all the certificates of inspection and
approval by the electrical inspectorate as required. PHSC
shall have access to the manufacturers premises for
inspection of any item of the tender for which contractor
has to make arrangement with different manufacturers.
2.0 PANEL, MAIN DISTRIBUTION BOARDS / SUB
DISTRIBUTION BOARD:

2.01 GENERAL:
Main Distribution Board / Sub Distribution Boards shall be
metal clad totally enclosed, rigid, floor mounting, air
insulated, cubicle type for use on 415 volts, 3 phases, 50
cycle system. System shall be suitable for a fault withstand
capacity of 50 KA RMS symmetrical. Equipment shall be
designed for operation in high ambient temperature and
high humidity tropical atmospheric conditions.

2.02 STANDARDS

2.02.1 The equipment shall be designed to conform to the

requirements of:

i) IS 8623-Factor built assemblies of switchgear and control

gear.
ii) IS 4237- General requirements for switchgear and control
gear for voltages and exceeding 1000 volts.
iii) IS-2147 – Degrees of protection provided by enclosures for
low voltage switchgear and control gear.

2.02.2 Individual equipment housed in the Main & Sub Distribution

Board shall conform to the following Is specifications; with
upto date amendments if any

i) Moulded case circuit -IS 2516(part I&II/Sec.I)1977

breakers
ii) Fuse switch & switch -IS 4064-1978
fuse units
iii) HRC fuse links -IS 2208-1962 or IS 9224-1979
iv) Current transformers -2705
v) Voltage transformer -IS 3156
vi) Relays - IS 3231
vii) Indicating instruments - IS 1248
viii) Integrating -IS 722
instruments
ix) Control switches & - IS 6875
push buttons
x) Auxiliary contractors -IS 2959

2.03 All panels and Main Distribution Board / Sub Distribution

Board shall be metal enclosed, indoor floor mounted free
standing type made up of the required vertical section,
which when coupled together shall form continuous dead
front distribution board. Main Distribution Board / Sub
Distribution Board shall be dust and damp protected.
Panels and Main Distribution Board shall be extensible on
both sides by the addition of side section after removal of
end covers. Panels Main Distribution Board / Sub
Distribution Board shall be fabricated with a framed
structure with rolled / folded sheet steel channel section of
minimum 2 mm thickness, doors and covers shall be of
minimum 2 mm thick sheet steel. Sheet steel shroud and
partitions shall be of exterior of Main Distribution Board /
Sub Distribution Board shall be smoothly finished, leveled
and free from flaws. The corners to be rounded. Front and
rear doors to be fitted with dust excluding neoprene gasket
with fastners designed to ensure proper compression of the
gaskets. When covers are provided in place of doors,
generous overlap shall be ensured between sheet steel
surface with closely spaced fastners to preclude the entry
of dust.

Following minimum clearances to be maintained after

taking into account connecting bolts clamps etc.

i) Between phases - 32 mm
ii) Between phases & neutral - 26 mm
iii) Between phases & earth - 26 mm
iv) Between neutral - 26 mm

All including materials used in the equipment shall be of

non hygroscopic materials, duly treated to withstand the
effect of high humidity, high temperatures, tropical
ambient service conditions.

Functional units such as fuse switch / switch fuse unit /

moulded case circuit breakers shall be arranged in multi-
tier formation. The design of the Main Distribution Board /
Sub Distribution Board shall be such that fuse switch /
switch fuse unit / MCCB shall be fully compartmentalized
insulated barriers shall be provided with a vertical section
and between adjacent section to ensure prevention of
accidental contact with main bus-bars and vertical risers
during operation inspection or maintenance of functional
unit. All doors / covers providing access to live power
equipment / circuits shall be provided with tool operated
fastners to prevent unauthorized access. The panel shall be
so constructed that the cable alley shall be sufficient
enough to accommodate all the outgoing and incoming
cables. For each cable, there shall be separate cable gland
 plate of detachable type at the bottom and / or top of the
panel as required. Gland plate shall be 3 mm thick.

2.04 METAL TREATMENT AND FINISH

All metal work used in the construction of the panels and

Main Distribution Board / Sub Distribution Board should
have under gone a rigorous metal treatment process as
follows:

i) Effective cleaning by hot alkaline degreasing solution

followed by cold water rising to remove traces of alkaline
solution.

ii) Pickling in dilute sulphuric acid to remove oxide scales &

rust formation, if any, followed by cold water rinsing to
remove traces of acidic solution.

iii) A recognized phosphating process to facilitate durable

coating of the paint on the metal surfaces and also to
prevent the spread of rusting in the event of the paint film
being mechanically damaged. This again shall be followed
by hot water rinsing to remove traces of phosphate
solution.

iv) Passivating in de-oxalite solution to retain and augment

the effects of phosphating

v) Drying with compressed air in dust free atmosphere.

vi) Primer coating with two coats of a highly corrosion

resistant primer, applied wet on wt and stove dried under
strictly controlled conditions of temperature and time.

vii) A finishing coat of staving synthetic enamel paint of grey

colour

2.5 BUS BARS:

The bus-bars shall be air insulated and made of high
conductivity, high strength aluminium alloy complying with
the requirement of grade E-91E or IS – 5082. The bus-bars
shall be suitable braced with non hygroscopic SMC
supports to provide a through fault withstand capacity of
50 KA RMS symmetrical for one second and a peck short
circuit withstand capacity of 105 KA.
 The neutral as well as the earthbar should be capable of
withstanding the above level. Ridges shall be provided on
the SMC supports to prevent tracking between adjacent
bus-bars. Large clearances and creepage distances shall be
provided on the bus bar system to minimize to possibility
of fault. The main phase bus-bars shall have continuous
current rating throughout the length of the panel. The
cross section of neutral bus-bars shall be same as that of
the phase bus-bar for bus-bars of capacity upto 200 amp.
For higher capacities, the neutral bus-bar shall not be less
than half (50%) the cross section of that of the phase bus-
bars. Connections form the main bus-bars to function
circuit shall be so arranged and supported to withstand
without any damage or deformation the thermal and
dynamic stresses due to short circuits. Bus-bars shall be
colour coded with PVC sleeves.

The Main Distribution Board / Sub Distribution Board shall

be designed that the cables are not directly terminated on
the terminals of switch fuse / fuse switch etc. but are
terminated on cable termination links. Capacity of
aluminium bus-bars shall be considered as 1.0 Amp per
sq.mm of cross section area of the bus-bars.

2.06 SWITCH FUSE / FUSE SWITCH UNIT

2.06.1 GENERAL

Switch fuse / fuse switch shall be incorporated in the Main

Distribution Board / Sub Distribution Boards wherever
specified. Switch fuse / fuse switch units shall conform to
IS 4064-1978. Switch fuse / fuse switch units upto 63 Amp
rating shall conform to AC-23 duty switch fuse / fuse
switch unit shall be suitable for 415 volts, 3 phase, 4 wire,
50 Hz, AC supply. In case of non availability of SPN switch
fuse units with HRC fuses, three pole switch with fuse base
& HRC fuses may be used at no extra cost to the client.

2.06.2 CONSTRUCTIONS:

The unit housing shall be of robust construction designed

to withstand arduous conditions encountered in the
electrical system. Sheet material used for switch fuse /
 fuse switch enclosure shall be given a rigorous rust
proofing treatment before it is fabricated and painted. Unit
shall preferably be double break per phase in order to
isolate fuse links when the switch is in “OFF” position.

2.06.3 FUSES:

The units shall contain fuse base & carriers for

accommodating HRC units. HRC fuse units of specified
rating & conforming to IS 2208. IS 9224-1979 shall
provided.

2.06.4 OPERATING MECHANISM

The operating mechanism of the unit shall be positive in

action with quick make, quick-break silver plated contacts,
the operating handle shall be suitable for rotary operation
unless otherwise specified. Position of the handle such as
“ON” “OFF” shall be clearly indicated.

2.06.05 SHROUDING

All the live parts inside the switch fuse / fuse switch units
shall be shrouded to prevent any accidental contact.

2.06.6 TERMINALS:

All the terminals shall be liberally designed.

2.06.7 INTERLOCKING

All switch fuse / fuse switch unit shall be provided with

suitable interlock such that the door of the switch board
panels shall not open unless the switch is in “OFF” position.

2.06.8 TESTING

Routine test shall be conducted as per IS 4064 & type test

certificates shall be furnished.

2.07 MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

2.07.1 GENERAL:

Moulded case circuit breakers shall be incorporated in the

Main Distribution Board and Sub Distribution board
 wherever specified. MCCBs shall be suitable either for
single phase AC 230 volts or three phase 415 volts.

2.07.2 FRAME SIZES:

The MCCBs shall have the following frame size subject to

meeting the fault level
a) Upto 100 A rating - 100 A frame
b) From 125-225 - 225 A frame
c) Form 250-400 - 400 A frame
d) Above 400 A - 600 A frame

2.07.3 CONSTRUCTIONS:

The MCCB cover & case shall be made of high strength

heat treatment & flame retardant thermo setting insulating
material. Operating handle shall be quick make / quick
break, trip free type. The operating handle shall have
suitable “ON” “OFF” and “TRIPPED” indicators. Three phase
MCCBs shall have common operating handle for
simultaneous operation and tripping of all the three
phases. Suitable for extinguishing device shall be provided
for each contact. Tripping unit shall be of thermal magnetic
or static type provided in each pole and connected by a
common trip bar such that tripping of any one pole
operates all three poles to open simultaneously. Thermal
magnetic or static tripping device shall have IDMT
characteristics for sustained over loads and short circuits.
Contacts trips shall be made of suitable are resistant,
sintered alloy for long electrical lift. Terminals shall be of
liberal design with adequate clearance.
2.07.4 TESTING:

a) Original test certificate of the MCCB as per Indian Standard

(IS)
b) Pre-commissioning tests on the MV panel incorporating the
MCCB shall be done as per standard.

2.08 MEASURING INSTRUMENTS FOR METERING:

2.08.1 GENERAL

Direct reading electrical instruments shall be in conform to

IS 1248. The accuracy of direct reading shall be 1.0 for
voltmeter and 1.5 for ammeters. Other type of instruments
shall have accuracy of 1.5. The errors due to variation in
temperature shall be limited to a minimum. The meter
 shall be suitable for continuous operation between 10
degree C to + 50 degree C. All meters shall be of flush
mounting type of 96 mm square pattern. The meter shall
be enclosed in a dust tight housing. The housing shall be of
steel or phenolic mould. The design and manufacture of
the meters shall ensure the prevention of fogging of
instruments glass. Instruments meters shall be sealed in
such a way that access to the measuring element and to
the accessories with in the case shall not be possible
without removal of the seal. The meters shall be provided
with white dials and black scale makings.

The pointer shall be black in colour and shall have zero

position adjustment device which could be operated from
outside. The direction of defection shall be from left to
right. Suitable slector switches shall be provided for all
ammeters and voltmeters intended to be used on three
phase supply.

The specifications here in after laid down shall also cover

all the meters, instrument and protective devices required
for the electrical works. The ratings type and quantity of
meters instruments and protective devices shall be as per
the schedule of quantities.

2.08.2 AMMETERS:

Ammeters shall be moving iron or moving coil type. The

moving part assembly shall be with jewel bearing. The
jewel bearing shall be mounted on a spring to prevent
damage to pivot due to vibrations and shocks, the
ammeters shall be manufactured and calibrated as per the
latest edition of IS 1248 ammeters shall be instrument
transformer operated, and shall be suitable for 5 A
secondary of instrument transformer. The scales shall be
calibrated to indicate primary current, unless otherwise
specified. The ammeters shall be capable of carrying
sustained overloads during faults conditions without
damage or loss of accuracy.

2.08.3 VOLTMETERS:

Voltmeters shall be of moving iron or moving coil type. The

range for 415 volts, 3 phase voltmeter shall be 0 to 500
volts. Suitable selector switch shall be provided for each
voltmeter to read voltage between any two lines of the
 systems. The voltmeter shall be provided with protection
fuse of suitable capacity.

2.08.4 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

Current transformers shall be in conformity with IS: 2075

(part I, II & III) in all respects. All current transformers
used for medium voltage applications shall be rated for I
Kv. Current transformers shall have rated primary current,
rated burden and class of accuracy as required. However
the roted secondary current shall be 5A unless otherwise
specified. The acceptable minimum class of various
applications shall be as given below.

Measuring : Class 1

Protection : Class 5 to 10

Current transformers shall be capable for withstanding

without damage. Magnetic and thermal stresses due to
short circuit fault of 50 KA on medium voltage system.
Terminals of the current transformers shall be marked
permanently for easy identification of poles. Separate CT
shall be provided for measuring instruments and protection
relays. Each CT shall be provided with rating plate.

Current transformers shall be mounted such that they are

easily accessible for inspection, maintenance and
replacement. The wiring for CT’s shall be copper conductor,
PVC insulated wires with proper termination lugs and
wiring shall be bunched with cable straps and fixed to the
panel structure in a neat manner.

2.08.5 MISCELLANEOUS:

Control switches shall be of the heavy duty rotary type

with escutcheon plates clearly marked to shown the
operating position. They shall be semi flush mounting with
only the front plate and operating handle projecting.

Indicating lamps shall be of the filament type of low watt

consumption, provided with series resistor where
necessary, and with translucent lamps covers. Bulbs &
lenses shall be easily replaced from the front.
 Push buttons shall be of the momentary contact, push to
actuate type fitted with self rest contact & provided with
integral escutcheon plates marked with its functions.

2.08.6 CABLE TERMINATIONS:

Cable entries and terminals shall be provided in the

distribution board to suit the number, type and size of
aluminium conductor power cables ad copper conductor
control cable specified.

Provision shall be made for top or bottom entry of cables

as required. Generous size of cabling chambers shall be
provided with the position of cable gland & terminals such
that cables cab be easily & safely terminated.

Barriers or shrouds shall be provided to permit safe

working at the terminals of one circuit without accidentally
touching that of another live circuit.

Cable risers shall adequately supported to withstand the

effects of rated short circuit currents without damage and
without causing secondary faults.

2.08.7 CONTROL WIRING:

All control wiring shall be carried out with 1100/660 V

grade single core PVC cable conforming to IS 694/ IS 8130
potential standard copper conductors of minimum 1.5 sq.
mm for potential circuits and 2.5 sq. mm for current
transformer circuits, wiring shall be neatly bunched
adequately supported and properly routed to allow for easy
access and maintenance. Wiring shall be identified by
numbering ferrules at end. All control fuses shall be
mounted in front of the panel and shall be easily
accessible.
2.08.8 TERMINAL BLOCKS:

Terminal blocks shall be 500 volts grade of the stud type.

Insulating barriers shall be provided between adjacent
terminal. Terminal blocks shall have a minimum current
rating of 10 Amps and shall be shrouded. Provisions shall
be made for label inscriptions.

2.08.9 LABELS:
 Labels shall be of anodized aluminium, with white
engraving on black back ground. They shall be properly
secured with fastners.

2.09 TEST AT MANUFACTURES WORK.

All routine tests specified in IS 8623-1977 shall be carried

out and test certificates submitted to the Engineer.

2.10 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Commissioning checks and tests shall be included all wiring

checks and checking up of connections. Primary /
secondary injection tests for the relays adjustment/setting
shall be done before commissioning in addition to routine
meggar test. Checks and tests shall include the following:

a) Operation checks and lubrication of all moving parts.

b) Interlocking function checks.
c) Insulation test: When measured with 500 V meggar, the
insulation resistance shall not be less than 100 mega
ohms.
d) Trip tests & protection gear test.

3.0 DISTRIBUTION BOARDS:

3.01 Distribution Board shall be double door type with extended

loose wire box at the top and suitable for flush installation.
All distribution boards shall be of three phase (415 volts)
or single phase (240 volts) type with incoming isolator or
MCB &/or ELCB as in Schedule of quantities. Distribution
boards shall contain plug in or bolted type miniature circuit
breaker mounted on bus bars. Miniature circuit breakers
shall be quick made and quick break type with trip free
mechanism. MCB shall have thermal and magnetic short
circuit protection. MCB shall conform with IS 8828-1978.
Neutral busbars shall be provided with the same number of
terminals as there are single ways on the board, in addition
to the terminals for incoming mains. As earth bar of similar
size at the neutral bar shall also be provided. Phase barrier
shall be fitted and all five parts shall be screened from the
front. Ample clearance shall be provided between all lie
metal and the earth case and adequate space for all
incoming and outgoing cables. All distribution boards
enclosures shall have an etched zinc base stove painted
followed by synthetic stoved enamel, colour light gray. A
 circuit identification card in clear plastic cover shall be
provided for each distribution board.

3.02 Miniature Circuit Breakers for lighting circuits shall be of

“L” series where “G” series MCB’s shall be invariable used
for motor loads, halogen lamps fittings, sodium/mercury
discharge lamps and for all power circuits. All miniature
circuit breakers shall be of 9KA rated rupturing capacity.

3.03 EARTH LEAKAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER / RESIDUAL

CURRENT CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

Earth leakage circuit breaker shall be current operated type

and of 100ma. Sensitivity unless otherwise stated. For
single phase distribution ELCB shall be housed within the
DB box. For three phase distribution board, either the ELCB
shall be housed in the same box or in a separate box of
shall be width and depth of DB box. ELCB box shall be of
same finish. Height of ELCB box shall be sufficient to
accommodate ELCB and termination of incoming and
outgoing wires.

4.0 METALLIC CONDUIT WIRING SYSTEM:

4.01 TYPE AND SIZE OF CONDUIT:

All conduit pipes shall be of approved gauge (not less than

165 WG for conduits of sizes upto 32mm diameter) solid
drawn or reamed by welding finished with stove enameled
surface. All conduit accessories shall be of threaded type
and under no circumstances pin grip type accessories shall
be used. The maximum number of PVC insulated 650/1100
volts grade copper conductor cable that can be drawn in
conduit of various sizes shall be as per IS:Code. No steel
conduit less than 20mm in diameter shall be used.

4.02 CONDUIT JOINTS:

Conduit pipes shall be joined by means of threaded

couples, and threaded accessories only. In long distance
straight run of conduits, inspection type couples at
reasonable internvals shall be provided or running threads
with couples and jamnuts shall be provided. In the later
case the bare threaded portion shall be treated with anti
corrosive preservative. Threads on conduit pipes in all
cases shall be between 13mm to 19mm long sufficient to
 accommodate pipes to full threaded portion of couplers or
accessories.

Cut ends of conduit pipe shall have no sharp edges nor any
burrs left to avoid damage to the insulation of conductor
while pulling them through such pipes.

4.03 PROTECTION AGAINST CONDENSATION:

The layout of conduit should be such that any condensation

or seating inside the conduit is drained out. Suitable
precaution should also be taken to prevent entry of insect
inside the conduit.

4.04 PROTECTION OF CONDUIT AGAINST RUST:

The outer surface of conduit including all bends, unions,

tees, junction boxes etc forming part of conduit system
shall be adequately protected against rust when such
system is exposed to weather by being painted with two
coats of oxide paint applied before they are fixed. In all
cases, no bar threaded portion of conduit pipe shall be
allowed. Unless such bare thread portion of conduit is
treated with anti-corrosive preservative or covered with
approved plastic compound.

4.05 PAINTING OF CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES:

After installation, all accessible surface of conduit pipes,

fittings, switch and regulator boxes etc shall be painted
with two coats of approved enameled paint or aluminium
paint as required to match the finish of surrounding wall,
trusses etc.

4.06 FIXING OF CONDUITS:

4.06.1 SURFACE OF CONDUIT:

Conduit pipes shall be fixed by heavy gauge saddles,

secured to suitable wood plugs or other approved plugs
with screws in an approved manner at an interval of not
more than one meter but on either side of the couplers or
bends or similar fittings, saddles shall be fixed at a
distance of 30cm from the centre of such fittings. The
saddles should not be less than 24 gauge for conduits upto
25mm dia and not less than 20 gauge for larger diameter
conduits. The corresponding widths shall be 19mm and
25mm. where conduit pipes are to be laid along the
 trusses, steel joint etc the same shall be secured by means
of special clamps made of MS. Where as it is not possible
to drill holes in the trusses members suitable clamps with
bolts and nuts shall be used.

Where conduit pipes are to be laid above false ceiling,

either conduit pipes shall be clamp to false ceiling frame
work or suspended with suitable supports from the soffit of
slab. For conduit pipe run along with wall, the conduit pipe
shall be clamped to wall above false ceiling in uniform
pattern with special clamps if required to be approved by
the Engineer at site.

4.06.2 RECESS/ CONCEALED CONDUIT:

The chase in the wall shall be neatly made and of ample

dimensions to permit the conduit to be fixed in the manner
desired. In the case of building under construction, conduit
shall be buried in the wall before plastering and shall be
finished neatly after erection of conduit. In case of exposed
brick/ rubble masonary work, special care shall taken to fix
the conduit and accessories in the position along with the
building work. Entire work of chasing the wall, fixing the
conduit in chases, and burying the conduit in mortor before
the plastering shall form part of point wiring work. The
conduit pipe shall be fixed by means of staples or by
means of saddles not more than 60cm apart or by any
other approved means of fixing.

Fixing of standard bends and elbows shall be avoided as far

as practicable and all curves maintained by bending the
conduit pipe itself with treated with some approved
preservative compound to secure protection against rust.
Suitable inspection boxes to the barest minimum
requirement shall be provided to permit periodical
inspection and to facilitates replacement of wires, if
necessary. These shall be mounted flush with the wall.
Suitable ventilating holes shall be provided in the
inspection box covers. Wherever the length of conduit run
is more than 10 meters then circular junction box shall be
provided.

4.07 OUTLET BOXES & COVERS:

The switch box shall be made of metal on all sides except

on the front. Boxes shall be hot dip galvanized mild steel.
Upto 20x30cm size MS box shall have wall thickness of
 185WG and MS boxes above 20x30cm size shall be of
165WG. The metallic boxes shall be painted with anti-
corrosive paint before erection. Clear depth of the box shall
not be less than 60mm. All fittings shall be fitted in the
flush pattern. Phenolic laminated sheet of approved shade
shall be used for switch box covers. These shall be of 3mm
thick synthetic phenolic resin bonded laminated sheet as
base material and conform to grade P-1 of IS 2036-1994.

4.08 ERECTION AND EARTHING OF CONDUITS:

The conduit of each circuit or section shall be completed

conductors are drawn in. The entire system of conduit after
erection shall be tested for mechanical and electrical
continuity throughout and permanently connected to earth
conforming to the requirement by means of special
approved type of earthing clamp effectively fastened to
conduit pipe in a workmen like manner for a perfect
continuity between the earth and conduit. Gas, water pipe
shall not be used as earth medium.

4.09 SWITCHES:

All 5 and 15 amps switches shall be piano type of 240 volts

AC grade. All switches shall be fixed on 3mm thick
laminated sheet cover. All 5 amp socket shall be 3 pin
type. All 15amp socket shall be 6 pin type suitable for
15/5amp. All switches, sockets, telephone and TV outlets
controlling the lights or fans shall be connected to the
phase wire of the circuit. Switches shall be located at 1200
mm above finished floor level unless otherwise indicated on
drawings, or as directed by the Engineer in charge.

4.10 FLUSH COVER PLATES:

All switches, sockets, telephone and TV outlet etc shall be

fixed on 3mm thick phenolic laminated sheet cover unless
otherwise called for in drawings or BOQ. Flush cover plate
shall be secured to the box with counter sunk brass screws
and cup washers.

4.11 WALL SOCKET PLATE:

All 5 and 15 amp socket outlet shall be 3 and 6 pin

respectively. Each outlet shall have a switch located beside
the socket preferable on the same flush cover plate. The
 earth terminal of the socket shall be connected to the earth
wire.

4.12 WIRING:

All internal wiring shall be carried out with PVC insulated

wire of 650/1100 volts grade. The circuit wiring for points
shall be carried out in looping in system and no joints shall
be allowed in the length of the conduits. Circuit wiring shall
be laid separate conduit originating from distribution board
to switch board for light / fan. A light / fan switch board
may have more than one circuit but shall have to be of
same phase. Lopping circuit wiring shall be drawn in same
conduit as for point wiring. Each circuit shall have a
separate neutral wire. Neutral looping shall be carried out
from point to point or in light/fan switch boards. A separate
earth wire shall be point wiring red colour wire shall be
used for phase and black colour wire for neutral. Circuit
wiring shall be carried out with red, yellow or blue colour
PVC insulated wire for RYB phase wire respectively and
black colour PVC insulated wire for the neutral wires. Bare
copper wire shall be used as earth continuity conductor and
shall be drawn along with other wires. No wire shall be
drawn into any conduit until all work of any nature, that
may cause injury to wire is completed. Care shall be taken
in pulling the wires so that no damage occurs to the
insulation of the wire.

Before the wires are drawn into the conduit, the conduits
shall be thoroughly cleaned of moisture dust and dirt.
Drawing and jointing of copper conductor wires and cables
shall be as per PWD specifications.

4.13 JOINTS:

All joints shall be made at main switchs, distribution board

socket and switch boxes only. No joints shall be made in
conduits and junction boxes. Conductors shall be
continuous from outlets to outlet.

4.14 MAINS AND SUBMAINS:

Mains and submains cable where called for shall be of the

rated capacity and approved make. Every main and
submain shall be drawn into an independent adequate size
 conduit. Adequate size draw boxes shall be provided at
convenient locations to facilitate easy drawings of the
submain and main cables. Cost of junction box/drawn box
is deemed to be included in the rates of submain wiring. As
independent earth wire of proper rating shall be provided
for every submain. Single phase submain shall be provided
with two earth wire. The earth wire of proper rating shall
be fixed to conduits by means of suitable MS clips at not
more than 1000mm distance.

Where mains and submains cables are connected to the

switchgear, sufficient extra lengths of submain and mains
cable shall be provided to facilitate easy connections and
maintenance for termination of cables crimping type cable
socket/ lugs shall be provided. Same colour code as for
circuit wiring shall be followed.

4.15 LOAD BALANCING:

Balancing of circuits in three phase installation shall be

planned before the commencement of wiring and shall be
strictly adhered to.

4.16 COLOUR CODE FOR CIRCUIT & SUBMAIN WIRING:

Colour code for circuit and submain wiring installation shall

be red, Yellow, Blue for three phases. Black for neutral and
yellow/green or green only for earth in case of insulated
earth wire.

4.17 CLASSIFICATION OF POINTS:

Classification and measurement of point wiring shall be as

per PWD specification for Electrical Works (Part-I Internal)-
1994.

4.18 CONDUCTOR SIZE:

Wiring shall be carried out with following size of PVC

insulated stranded single core copper conductor wire/
cable.

i) Light point 1.5 sq.mm

ii) Ceiling /Cabin/Exhaust Fan point 1.5 sq.mm
iii) Call Bell Point 1.5 sq.mm
 iv) Plug Point (5 ASS outlet) 1.5 sq.mm
v) Circuit Wiring 1.5 sq.mm
vi) General Power Point 4.0 sq.mm
vii) Power Point for AC unit 6.0 sq.mm
viii) Power Point for Geyser, Drinking 4.0 sq.mm
water, Coolers & Hand Dryers

4.19 TELEPHONE WIRE / CABLES:

Separate conduits shall be provided for internal telephone
wiring of telephone wiring of telephone system
commencing from tag block. Each telephone outlet shall be
wired with2 pair telephone cable from the tag block. All
telephone wires shall be of 0.61mm dia annealed tinned
high conductivity copper conductor PVC insulated and PVC
sheathed grey conforming to ITD specifications SWS 113
B&C. Multipair PVC insulated cables laid in conduit shall be
provided for connecting various tag blocks. Telephone
cables used for external connections, shall be armoured.
These cables shall be laid directly in ground or in pipe etc
as call for else where.

Following number of 2 pair wires/cables shall be drawn in

various sizes of conduits as listed below:

20mm conduit : Upto 3 cables

25mm conduit : More than 3 upto 6 cables

4.20 Maximum number of wires that can be taken in any conduits

shall be as per the table give below:

PVC INSULATED 650/1100V GRADE ALUMINIUM/COPPER

CONDUCTOR CABLE CONFORMING TO IS:694-1990

Nominal 20mm 25mm 32mm 38mm 51mm 64mm

cross S B S B S B S B S B S B
sectional
area of
conductor
in sq.mm
1.5 5 4 10 8 18 12 - - - - - -
2.5 5 3 8 6 12 10 - - - - - -
4 3 2 6 5 10 8 - - - - - -
6 2 - 5 4 8 7 - - - - - -
10 2 - 4 3 6 5 8 6 - - - -
16 - - 2 2 3 3 6 5 10 7 12 8
25 - - - - 3 2 5 3 8 6 9 7
35 - - - - - - 3 2 6 5 8 6
50 - - - - - - - - 5 3 6 5
70 - - - - - - - - 4 3 5 4
Note:
1. The above table shows the maximum capacity of conduits for a
simultaneous drawing in of cables.
2. The columns headed “S” apply to runs of conduits which have distance
not exceeding 4.25m between draw in boxes and which do not deflect
from the straight by an angle of more than 15 degree. The columns
headed “B” apply to runs of conduit which deflect from the straight by
an angle of more than 15 degrees.
3. Conduit sizes are the nominal external diameters.
5.0 LIGHTING FIXTURE AND FANS:
5.01 GENERAL

a) The contractor shall supply and install lighting fixtures including

but not limited to lamps, ballasts, accessories fixing hardware
necessary for installations, as shown on the drawings, as
required, and as herein specified.

b) All fixtures shall be delivered to the building complete with

suspension accessories, canopies, hickeys, casing, sockets,
holders, reflectors, ballasts, diffusing material, louvers, plaster
frames, recessing boxes etc all wired and assembled as
indicated.

c) Full size shop detail drawings of special fixture or lighting

equipment, where called for in the fixtures schedule shall e
submitted to the Engineer for approval.

d) Fixtures, housing, frame or canopy, shall provide a suitable cover

for fixture outlet box or fixture opening.

e) Fixtures shall comply with all applicable requirements as herein

outlined unless otherwise specified or shown on the drawings.

f) Manufacturer’s name and catalogue number of lighting fixtures

are given for general reference only. It shall be understood that
the actual fixtures supplied shall meet all the requirements of the
specification, and it necessary, the standard fixture indicated for
reference, shall be modified accordingly.

g) fixtures shall bear manufacturer’s name and the factory

inspection label.

h) Fixtures shall be completely wired and constructed to comply

with the IEE wiring regulation requirements for lighting fixtures,
unless otherwise specified.
i) Relamping the fixture shall be possible without having to remove
the fixture from its place.

j) Lamps of the proper type, wattage and voltage rating shall be

furnished and installed in each fixtures.

5.02 CONSTRUCTION

a) Fixtures shall be constructed of 0.5mm thick steel minimum. If

other metals are used they shall be of the required thickness to
have at lest the same mechanical strength. Cast portions of
fixtures shall be not less than 1.5mm thick.

b) Metal parts of the fixtures, shall be completely free from burrs

and tool marks. Solder shall not be used as a mechanical
fastening device on any part of the fixture. Fixture joints shall be
welded and ground smooth.

c) Fixtures with visible frame shall have concealed hinges and

catches.

d) Recessed fixtures shall be constructed so as to fit into ceiling

without distorting either the fixture or the ceiling. Plaster rings
shall be provided for plaster ceilings. The contractor shall
coordinate the dimensions with the false ceiling tile dimensions.

e) Outdoor fixtures (under canopy or directly exposed to the

weather) shall be constructed of an appropriate weather
resistant material including gasketing preventing entrance of
water into wiring, and shall be marked by the manufacturer
“Suitable for outdoor use”.

f) Fixtures with hinged diffuser doors shall be provided with spring

clips or other retaining devices to prevent the diffuser from
moving.

g) All plastic diffusers shall be or acrylic, unless otherwise noted.

h) Incandescent fixtures shall be equipped with porcelain medium

base with nickel plated shells.

i) Pendent fixtures and lamp holders shall be provided with ball

type alingners.

j) Fluorescent fixtures shall be provided with white lamp holders.

k) Industrial type fluorescent fixtures shall have turret type lamp
holders.

5.03 FINISH:

a) All hardware shall be bonderised, cadmium plated, given a

corrosion –resistant phosphate treatment or other approved rust
inhibiting prime coat, to provide a rust proof base before
application of finish. Finish shall be baked enamel.

b) Non reflecting surfaces such as fixture frames and trims, shall be

finished with baked enamel paint, unless otherwise specified. The
colour of the paint shall be as indicated on the drawings or as
directed later by the Engineer.
c) Light reflecting surfaces shall be finished with baked white
enamel paint having a reflection factor of not less than 85%.

d) All parts of the reflector shall be completely covered by the

finished and free from irregularities.

e) Unpainted surfaces shall finished with a clear lacquer except for

anodized or “Azac” surfaces.

f) After finish has been applied and cured, it shall be capable of

withstanding a 1 cm radius bend without showing sings of
cracking, peeling or loosening from the base metal.

g) Finish shall be capable of withstanding 72 hours exposures to an

ultra – violet RS sun lamp placed 10cm from the surface without
discoloration, hardening or warping and shall retain the same
reflection characteristics after exposure.

5.04 WIRING:

a) Fluorescent fixtures shall be wired with not smaller than

1.5 sqmm asbestos covered wire. No splice or tap shall be
located within an arm, stem or chain. Wire shall be
continuous from splice in outlet box of the building wiring
system to lamp socket or to ballast terminals.

b) Wiring within incandescent fixtures and for connection to

the branch circuit wiring upto the outlet box of lighting
point shall not be less than 1.5 sqmm silicone rubber
insulated wire (150 degree centigrade temperature).

5.05 INSTALLATION:
 Fixtures shall be installed at mounting heights as detailed
on the drawings or as instructed on site by the Engineer.

Pendent fixtures within the same room or area, shall be

installed plump and at a uniform height from the finished
floor. Adjustment of height shall be made during
installation. Flush mounted recessed fixtures, shall be
installed so as to completely eliminate leakage of light
within the fixtures and between the fixtures and adjacent
finish.

Fixture mounted outlet boxes shall be rigidly secured to a

fixture stud in the outlet box. Hickeys or extension pieces
shall be installed where required to facilitate proper
installation.

Fixtures located on the exterior of the building shall be

installed with non-ferrous metal screws finished to match
the fixtures.

5.06 LAMPS – GENERAL

Lamps shall be supplied and installed in all lighting fixtures

listed in the Schedules of lighting fixtures on the drawings.

Lamps used for temporary lighting service shall not be

used in the final lamping of fixture units.

Lamps shall be of wattage and type as shown in the

schedule of lighting fixtures.

Lamps for permanent installation shall not be placed in the

fixtures, until so directed by the Engineer and this shall be
accomplished directly before the building areas are ready
for occupancy by the Client.

5.07 LAMPS – FLUORESCENT:

Lamp shall be of hot electrodes, preheated, normal start

type.

Lamps shall have bi-pin bases and a minimum approx.

rated lift of 8,000 hrs.

Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings. Lamps shall

have the colour rendering features and lumens/watt output
 of lamps with WHITE colour designation as manufactured
by Philips (India) or approved equal.

5.08 LAMPS – INCANDESCENT:

Incandescent lamps shall be inside frosted type. Lamps

shall have minimum approx. rated life of 750 hours.

Lamps shall be manufactured by Philips (India) or

approved equal.

5.09 BALLASTS – FLUORESCENT:

Only single and / or two lamp ballast shall be used in any

one fixture. Ballast shall conform to IS 1534 (Part-1) -
1977.

Ballast shall be high power factor type.

Ballast shall have manufacturer’s lowest sound level and

case temperature rise rating.

Ballasts shall be special cool operated type.

Ballasts for indoor fixtures shall be protected by an integral

thermal automatic resetting protective unit which shall
disconnect the ballast in the event of overheating.

Ballasts shall be of the same manufacture as the lamps.

5.10 FIXTURE SAMPLES:

Detailed catalogue for all fixtures or if so required by the

Engineer sample fixtures shall be submitted for prior
approval of Engineer before orders for the fixtures are
placed.

5.11 LAMPS MERCURY:

Mercury lamps shall be high pressure mercury–vapour

fluorescent lamps with a quartz discharge tube enclosed in
an internally coated avoid outer bulb.

The quartz discharge tube shall contain a small quantity of

mercury and a starting gas.
 The number of minutes after which the lamp has reached
80% of its final luminous flux shall not exceed 5 minutes
for 50 W lamps, above shall be fitted with hard glass.

Lamps shall be similar to Philips HPL-N type or approved

equal.

5.12 BALLASTS – MERCURY VAPOUR:

Ballasts shall be suitable for outdoor use. Ballast shall

conform to IS 6616-1982.

The housing and the cover are made of polyamide, which is

heat, impact and stress resistant, with very good insulating
properties. The ballast box shall be protected to IP 54.

All ballast boxes shall include the integral ballast, the

igniter, the capacitors, a terminal block, and two properly
rated fuses.

5.13 TESTING:

After all lighting fixtures are installed and are connected

their respective switches test all fixtures to ensure
operation on their correct switch in the presence of the
Engineer. All un-operating fixtures or ones connected to
the wrong or inconveniently located switch shall be
correctly connected as directed by the Engineer.

5.14 CEILING FANS:

All ceiling fans shall be provided with suspension

arrangement in the concrete / slab / roof member.
Contractor to ensure that provision are kept at appropriate
stage at locations shown on the drawings. Fan box with MS
hook to be provided under by electrical contractor covered
under subhead point wiring item No.1. Ceiling fan shall be
double ball bearing type, copper wound motor complete
with canopy, down rod, blades etc and shall conform to
relevant IS standard ceiling fan shall be white in colour.
Ceiling fan shall be provided with standard regulator.
Regulator shall be suitable for 240 volts AC supply 50 Hz
and shall be continuous duty type.
5.15 EXHAUST FANS:

Exhaust fans shall be heavy duty type with double ball

bearing and conforming to IS 2312-1967. Exhaust fan shall
be complete with copper wound motor, capacitor louvers/
shutter frame & mounting bracket. Exhaust fan shall be
suitable fan operation on 240 volts single phase AC supply.

6.0 L.T. CABLES

6.01 GENERAL

LT cables shall be supplied, inspected, laid tested and

commissioned in accordance with drawings specifications,
relevant Indian Standards specifications and cable
manufacturer’s instructions. The cable shall be delivered at
site in original drums with manufacturer’s name clearly
written on the drums. The recommendations of the cable
manufacturer with regard to jointing and sealing be strictly
followed.

6.02 MATERIAL:

The LT Cable shall be PVC insulated PVC sheathed

aluminium conductor armoured cable conforming to
IS:1554-1988 (Part-I) with upto date amendments or
revision. The cable shall be laid directly in ground pipes,
masonary ducts, cable tray surface of all etc as shown on
drawings.

6.03 INSPECTION:

All cables shall be inspected at site and checked for any

damage during transit.

6.04 JOINTS IN CABLES :

The contractor shall take care to see that the cables

received at site are apportioned to various locations in such
a manner as to ensure maximum utilization and avoiding of
cable joints. This apportioning shall be got approved from
Engineer before the cables are cut to lengths.

6.05 INSTALLATIONS OF CABLES:

Cable laying work shall be carried out as per Pb. PWD

specifications.
6.05.01 LAYING CABLES IN GROUND: As per Pb. PWD
specifications.

6.05.02 PROTECTION OF CABLES:

The cables shall be protected by bricks laid on the top layer

of the sand for the full length of underground cable. Where
more than on cables is laid in the same project a minimum
of approximately 80mm on either side of the cables. Cable
under road crossing and any other places subject to heavy
traffic, shall be protected by running them through Hume
Pipes of suitable size.

6.05.03 EXCAVATION & BACK FILL:

All excavation and backfill required for the installation of

the cables shall be carried out by the contractor in
accordance with the drawings and requirements laid down
elsewhere. Trenches shall be drug true to line and grades.
Back fill for trenches shall be filled in layer not exceed
150mm. Each layer shall be properly rammed and
consolidated before laying the next layer.

06.05.04 LAYING OF CABLES ON CABLE TRAY/ SURFACE OF

WALL CEILING

Cable shall be laid on purpose made cable try. Cables shall

be properly dressed before cables ties/ clamps shall be
fixed. Wherever cable tray is not proposed, cables shall be
fixed on surface of wall or ceiling slab by suitable MS
clamps/ saddles. Care shall be taken to avoid crossing of
cable.

6.06 TESTING OF CABLES:

Prior to installation burying of cables, following tests shall

be carried out. Installation test between phase, phase and
neutral, phase and earth for each length of cable.

a) Before laying
b) After laying
c) After jointing
 On completion of cable laying work, the following tests
shall be conducted in the presence of the Engineer.

a) Insulation Resistance Test (Sectional & Overall)

b) Continuity Resistance Test
c) Earth Continuity Test

All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant

Indian Standard code of practice and Indian Electricity
Rules. The contractor shall provide necessary instruments,
equipments and labour for conducting the above tests and
shall bear all expenses of conducting such tests.

7.0 CABLE TRAY:

7.01 The cable tray shall be fabricated out of slotted/ perforated MS

sheets as channel sections, single or double bended. The
Channel sections, single or double bended. The channel sections
shall be supplied in convenient lengths and assembled at site to
the desired lengths. These may be galvanized or painted to the
desired lengths. These may be galvanized or painted as
specified. Alternatively, where specified, the cable tray may be
fabricated by two angle irons of 50x50x6mm as two longitudinal
members with cross bracings between them by 50x5mm flats
welded / bolted to the angles at 1m slacing. 2mm thick MS
perforated sheet shall be suitable welded / bolted to the base as
well as on the two sides.

7.02 Typically, the dimensions, fabrication details etc are shown in

PWD General Specification for Electrical Works.

7.03 The jointing between the sections shall be made with coupler
plates of the same material and thickness as the channel section.
Two coupler plates, each of minimum 200mm length, shall be
bolted on each of the two sides of the channel section with 8mm
i/d round headed bolts, nuts and washers. In order to maintain
proper earth continuity bound, the paint on the contact surfaces
between the coupler plates and cable tray shall be scraped and
removed before the installation.

7.04 The maximum permissible uniformly distributed load for various

sizes of cables trays and for different supported span are as PWD
General Specification of Electrical Work. The sizes shall be
specified considering the same.
7.05 The width of the cable tray shall be chosen so as to
accommodate all the cable in one tier, plus 30 to 50% additional
width for future expansion. This additional width shall be
minimum 100mm. The overall width of one cable tray shall be
limited to 800mm.

7.06 Factory fabricated bends, reducers, tee/cross junctions, etc shall

be provided as per good engineering practice, the radius of
bends, junctions etc. shall not be less than the minimum
permissible radius of bending of the largest size of cable to be
carried by the cable tray.

7.07 The cable tray shall be fixed on surface with 25x3mm MS clamps
and bolted to the cable tray or to independent support at the
bottom end as specified, as approved by the Engineer to take the
weight of the cable tray with the cables.

7.08 The entire tray (except in the case of galvanized type) and the
supports shall be painted with two coats of red oxide primer
paint after removing the dirt & rust, and finished with two coats
of spray paint of approved make synthetic enamel paint.

7.09 The cable tray shall be bonded to the earth Terminal of the
switch bonds at both ends.

7.10 The cables tray shall be measured on unit length basis, along the
center line of the cable tray, including bends, reducers, tees,
cross joints, etc and paint for accordingly.

8.0 EPABX TELEPHONE EXCHANGE:

8.01 SCOPE:
This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing
and supply of Electronic Private Automatic Branch
Exchange (EPABX), telephone sets, MDF, Backup Power
Supply System etc.

8.02 CODE AND STANDARDS:

The telephone system and the components shall conform
to the latest edition of “The International Telegraph and
Telephone Consultative Committee (CCITT)” and other
Indian and International Standards as applicable.

8.03 SITE CONDITIONS:

 All the equipments shall be designed and tropicalised to
withstand the site conditions as specified in the schedule of
quantities.

8.04 TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS:

i) Automatic Call Back
ii) Abbreviated Dialing
iii) Automatic Wakeup
iv) Boss/Secretary Feature
v) Call Forwarding
vi) Call Pickup
vii) Call Metering with call date recording and printing
viii) Call Party’s Name display on operator console &
digital phone.
ix) Discriminative Ringing
x) Do Not Disturb
xi) Emergency transfer connections for at least 4 trunk
lines
xii) Flexible Director
xiii) Hot Line Station
xiv) Hunting Group
xv) Intrusion
xvi) ISDN Compatible
xvii) Last Number Redial
xviii) Locking of Key by using Pass code
xix) Music on Hold
xx) Operator console or digital phone with 32 character
display, call transfer facility without answer, busy
over ride with warning indication
xxi) Night Service
xxii) STD/ISD Dialing

8.05 CONSTRUCTION

The system shall be composed of vendors standard

products with proven history of satisfactory operation in
the field for atleast 24 months prior to the date on which
the bids are opened.

8.06 SUBSCRIBER INSTRUMENTS:-

Desk mounted telephones with push button key boards

shall be provided. These telephones shall be compatible
with the EPABX and trunk interconnection, the instrument
shall have the memory facility to register the last number
dialed, which can be recalled on pressing of a key. Tone
 pulse switch-able. Minimum one meter coiled cable shall be
provided between telephones and handset receiver/
transmitter.

8.07 POWER SUPPLY:-

8.07.1 The system shall be suitable to operate from a single point

AC supply. Any voltage other than above such as 48 VDC
etc shall be derived within the system from above supply.

8.07.2 The power supply shall be sized for the ultimate capacity of
the exchange.

8.07.3 S.M.F batteries shall be sized to cater to the system power

requirements for at least 4 hours at the maximum rated
power consumption of the system. The batteries shall be
sized for ultimate capacity of the exchange.

8.07.4 The power supply unit shall be designed to trickle charge/

boost charge the batteries. The boost charging time shall
not exceed 10-14 hours.

8.07.5 Normally the exchange shall derive power from AC supply

and the batteries shall float only. In case of failure of AC
power the batteries shall be automatically transferred to
the AC supply.

8.08 MAIN DISTRIBUTION FRAME(MDF)

A Krone MDF mounted in sheet steel enclosure shall be
supplied alongwith the exchange I.P.M shall be provided in
the MDF for all junction lines and external one. All cables
coming from field will be terminated on the MDF.

8.09 OPERATOR’S CONSOLE:-

The operator’s console shall be desk top type, compact in
design and electronic based Electronic switching shall be
used to make various connections, cord connections shall
not be accepted. The operator console should work on
single pair.

8.10.1 The console shall provide the following facilities:-

i) Answering the incoming call

Operator can answer an incoming call, whether from an
internal extension or from external junction line.
 ii) Call waiting:-
An unattended call waiting for more than a predetermined
time shall automatically go to standby operator.

iii) Setting up External call.:-

It shall be possible for a operator to set up external calls.

iv) Automatic recall:-

Incoming calls will be automatically returned to the
operator if the called extension does not answer within a
pre determined time or called extension is busy.

8.10.2 The display shall indicate the time, day and date. The
display shall indicate the current condition of exchange,
such as alarm (a system malfunction has occurred),
power failure or fuse blown out etc.
In addition to above, operators console shall have all other
facilities which are necessary for smooth and trouble free
operation.

8.11 ALARM INDICATION:-

a) A fault diagnostic module shall be provided to detect the

fault automatically.

b) LED indication shall be provided on line card, indicating

status of the call.

c) Audible alarm and alarm display shall be provided in case

of a fault in the system and maintenance/ operators
console.

d) The fault conditions shall also be repeated at the

maintenance centre and Maintenance/ Operator’s console.

8.12 PROTECTION:-
Main power supply incomer shall be provided with
protective fuses. All other circuits such as individual
subscribers, memory etc. shall be protected with current
limiting devices or semi conducting fuses,. Surge arrestors
G.D tubes shall be provided for subscriber lines.

8.13 WARRANTY:-
Vender shall have final and responsibility for the design
and performance of all equipments supplied under this
 spec. The equipment shall be guaranteed for 12 months
from the date of commissioning or 15 months from the
date of dispatch, whichever is earlier. All defective
component during the warranty period shall be replaced
free of cost by the vendor.

9.0 NURSES CALL BELL SYSTEM:-

SYSTEM OPERATION:-
The Nurses Call System shall consists of Nurse Station
indicator panel.

The system shall operates as under:-

When a patent need nursing assistance, he/she presses the

call push button on the bed sides. A lamp flashing signal
with a soft buzzer audible signal (of short duration) to
indicate the number of room/bed at the nurses station. The
nurse acknowledge the call at the nurse station by pressing
push button on the indicator panel.

10.0 UNDERGROUND L.T. CABLES AND CONTROL CABLES:

10.01 GENERAL:

MV Cables shall be supplied, inspected laid tested and

commissioned in accordance with drawings, specifications,
relevant Indian Standards Specifications and cable
manufacturer’s instructions. The cable shall be delivered at
site in original drums with manufacturers name clearly
written on the drum.

The recommendation of the cable manufacturer with

regard to joining and sealing shall be strictly followed.

10.02 MATERIAL:

The MV Cable shall be PVC insulated. Aluminium conductor

armoured cable conforming to IS:1554-1988 (Part-I) laid
in trenches / ducts as shown on drawings.

10.03 All cables shall be inspected upon receipt at site and

checked for any damage during transit.
10.04 JOINTS IN CABLES:

The Contractor shall take care to see that all the cables
received at site are apportioned to various locations in such
a manner as to ensure maximum utilization and avoidance
of joining cables. This apportioning shall be got approved
by the Architect before the cables are cut to lengths,
straight joints are prohibited.

10.05 LAYING CABLES:

Cables shall be laid by skilled and experienced workmen

using adequate rollers to minimize stretching of the cables.
The cable drum shall be placed on jacks before unwinding
the cable great care shall be exercised in laying cables to
avoid forming kinks, the drums shall be unrolled and cables
run over wooden rollers in trenches at intervals not
exceeding 2 meters. Cables shall be laid at depth of 0.7
meter below ground level. A cushion of sand, not less than
80mm shall be provided both above and below the cable
and joints boxes and other accessories. Cable shall not be
laid in the same trench or along side a water main. The
cable shall first be laid excavated trench 80mm layer of
sand and shall be spread over the cable. The cable then
shall be lifted and placed over the sand bed, the second
layer of 80mm sand shall then be sprayed over the cable.
The relative position of the cables, laid in the same trench
shall be preserved and the cables shall not cross each
other as for as possible, at all changes in directions in
horizontal and vertical planes, the cable shall be bent
smooth with a radius of bend not less than 8 times the
diameter of cable. Minimum 3 meters long loop shall be
provided at both sides of every ; straight joint and 3 mtr at
each end of cable. Distinguishing marks shall be made on
the cable ends for identification. Insulation tapes of
appropriate voltage and in red, yellow and blue colour shall
be wrapped just below the sockets for phase identification.
In general laying of cable will be as per Pb PWD
specifications.

10.06 PROTECTION OF CABLES:

The cables shall be protected by bricks on the top layer of

the sand for the full length of underground cable. Where
more than one cable is running in the same trench, the
bricks shall cover all the cables and shall project a
 minimum of approximately 80mm on either side of the
cables. Cables under road crossings and any other places
subject to heavy traffic, shall be protected by running them
through Hume Pipes of suitable size. The depth of the
Hume Pipe shall be 1 meter below the finished floor level.

10.07 EXCAVATION & BACK FILL:

All excavation and back fill including timbering, shoring and

pumping quired for the installation of the cables shall be
carried out by the contractor in accordance with the
drawings and requirements laid down elsewhere. Trenches
shall be dug true to line and grades. Back fill for trenches
shall be filled in layer not exceed 150mm. Each layer shall
be properly rammed and consolidated before laying the
next layer. The contractor shall restore all surface,
roadways, curbs, walls of other works cut by excavation to
their original condition, satisfactory to the owner’s
representative.

10.08 TESTING OF CABLES:

Prior of burying cables, following tests shall be carried out:

a) Insulation test between phases and phase and earth for

each length of cable before and after jointing.
On completion of cable laying work, the following test shall
be conducted in the presence of owner’s representative.

i) Insulation Resistance Test (Sectional & Overall)

ii) Continuity Resistance Test
iii) Sheathing Continuity Test
iv) Earth Test

All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant

Indian Standard Code of Practice and Indian Electricity
Rules. The contractor shall provide necessary instruments,
equipment and labour for conducting the above test and
shall bear all expenses in connection with such tests. All
tests shall be carried out in the presence of the Architect /
Consultant.

11.0 DIESEL GENERATOR SET:

The Diesel Generator Set shall consist of AC Alternator of

suitable capacity 0.8 PF. Capacity coupled with diesel
 engine with all accessories and control such as starting
device, lubricating arrangements, speed control, automatic
control devices, protection gear, instruments etc as
required and specific here in after. The diesel generator
shall be factory assembled and factory tested completed in
all respects.

11.01 DIESEL ENGINE:

Diesel engine shall be of heavy duty, robust construction,

suitable for continuous duty. Engine shall be enclosed
construction and engine case shall be made of grey iron
castings. The cylinder head shall be cast iron and shall
accommodate one suction valve, one starting valve, one
injection valve and one safety valve etc. Piston shall be of
cast aluminium and shall be provided with adequate
number of sealing ring and strapping rings. The big and
small ends shall be fitted with bearings.

11.02 ENGINE:

The diesel engine shall be naturally aspired water cooled

type, air cool type 4 stroke, 4 cylinder, direct injection
type, water cooled, electric starting, multi-cylinder diesel
engine confirming to BS:5514/ BS:649 with 10%
overloading for one hour in any 12 hrs duration.

11.03 END FRAMES:

The end frames shall be of well ribbed cast iron design. The
end frames shall spigotted to the stator frame and secured
by easily available set screws. Ventilation openings shall be
cast into the vertical and bottom side face which shall be
screen protection and drip proof.

11.04 BEARING

The bearing shall be of heavy duty pre-lubricated cartridge

ball or roller bearing. Single bearing alternators shall have
self align ball on roller bearing. The end frame of the rotor
shall be removable from stator without disturbing the
bearings.

11.05 ROTOR:
 The rotor shaft shall be turned either from a tensile MS bar
or from a MS forging. Field coils shall be wound with
synthetic enamel covered or varnish bounded end glass
cover copper strips of high conductivity. Poles shall be bold
on type made sheet steel of high permeability. The
insulation between the pole and coil shall comprises of
varnished fiber glass cloth backed mica around the body
and thick insulating washers on the top and bottom of the
coil. Coil shall be impregnated with resin and the complete
rotor shall be spray finished with a moisture protection
varnish suitable for tropical conditions. However 100%
epoxy impregnation and an overcoat of resilient insulating
material shall be preferable.

11.06 DAMPER WINDING:

The Damper bars of copper brazed to heavy copper and

connectors shall be located in a semi closed circular slots
situated in the pole faces.

11.07 TYPE:

Alternator shall be brushless

11.08 COUPLING:

Engine and alternator shall be directly coupled through a

sturdy flexible coupling.

11.09 TERMINALS:

Terminals shall be housed in a suitable cast iron box fixed

on to the stator frame. The terminals shall have ample
clearance between phases and between phases to earth
and shall be readily accessible. The terminal shall be
suitable for receiving suitable size of aluminium conductor
PVC insulated, PVC sheathed and steel armoured cables or
for bus bar duct system top entry.

11.10 BATTERY CHARGING EQUIPMENTS:

Battery boost charger of suitable capacity intended to

operate on single phase 230 volt, 50 cycle supply system
and suitable for charging current. The battery boost
charger shall be provided with the following accessories.

a) AC and DC ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ switches with HRC fuses.

 b) Indicating lamps for indicating mains ‘ON’ and battery
charging
c) Ballast to give charging.
d) Single phase double wound (copper conductor)
impregnated natural air cooled mains transformer for
rectifier stack.
e) Rotary switch to give step control.
f) Moving coil ammeter to indicate charging current.
g) Single phase full wave bridge connected; silicon rectifier
stack.
h) Moving coil voltmeter with a selector switch to measure the
battery / charger voltage.
i) Silicon blocking diode connector to suitable tap to maintain
continuity of DC supply.
j) AC and DC contractors of suitable rating as required.

All the components for battery charger shall be adequately

rated and housed in a well ventilated sheet steel cubical
with input and output terminals. Proper cable glands shall
be provided for incoming and outgoing cables. Battery
charger shall form part of Auto Main Failure Control Panel.

11.11 WIRING:

All the wiring outside the panel interconnection between

AMF and DG set shall be drawn into 14 gauge MS conduits
or enclosed trunking.

The minimum size of wire outside the AMF panel shall be

2.5 sqmm copper conductor.

The minimum size of control cable inside the panel shall

1.5 sq.mm copper control cable and connection shall form
part of contract and deemed to be included in the cost.

All the wires and cables shall be suitable for 650/1100

volts.

12.0 EARTHING:

12.01 GENERAL:

All the non current metal parts of electrical installation

shall be earthed properly. All metal conduits trunking,
switchgear, distribution boards, switch boxes, outlet boxes
and all other parts made of metal shall be bounded
 together and connected by means of specified earthing
conductors to an efficient earthing system.

12.02 EARTHING CONDUCTOR:

Earth continuity conductor along with sub main wiring from

Main / Sub distribution boards to various distribution
boards shall be of copper. Earth continuity conductor
connecting Main and Sub distribution boards to earth
electrode shall be with galvanized MS strip.

12.03 SIZING OF EARTHING CONDUCTOR:

All fan regulator, 5 & 15 amp outlet points, switch boxes

shall be earthed with 2mm dia (14 SWG) bare copper wire.
Separate earth wire shall be drawn alongwith earth circuit.
From Main /Sub Distribution Board to distribution boards,
earth continuity conductor shall be of 4mm id (85 SWG)
bare copper. Single phase distribution board shall have one
earth continuity conductor while three phase distribution
board shall be provided with two earth continuity
conductors. Earthing of main switch board and sub switch
boards shall be earthed with two independent earth
electrodes or as indicated elsewhere. Earth conductor laid
in ground shall be protected for mechanical injury and
corrosion by providing GI pipe.

GI pipe shall be of medium class 40mm dia and 4.5 meter

length.

Galvanizing of the pipe shall conform to relevant Indian

Standards GI pipe

Electrode shall be cut tapered at the bottom and provided

with holes of 12mm dia drilled not less than 7.5cm from
each other upto 2 meter of length from bottom. The
electrode shall be buried in the ground vertical with its top
not less tan 20cm below ground level as per detail
enclosed. Earth electrode shall not be situated less than 2
meters from the building. The location of the earth
electrode will be such that the soil has reasonable chance
of remaining moist as far as possible. Masonary chamber of
size 300x300x300mm shall be provided with water funnel
arrangements a cast iron or MS frame and cover having
locking arrangement at the top.
12.04 PLATE EARTH ELECTRODE :

Earthing shall be provided with either GI pipe electrode and

copper plate electrode of following minimum dimensions
i) GI Plate Electrode : 300x1200x6mm thick
ii) Copper Plate Electrode : 300x1200x3mm thick

The electrode shall be made cylindrical buried in ground

with its faces vertical and not less than 3 meters below
ground level. 20mm dia medium class GI pipe shall be
provided and attached to the electrode. A funnel with mesh
shall be provided on the top of this pipe for watering and
earth electrode. Earth electrode the watering funnel
attachment shall be housed in masonary enclosures of not
less than 300x300x300mm deep. A cash iron or MS frame
with cover having locking arrangement shall be provided at
top of meters from the building. Care shall be taken that
the excavation for earth electrode may not affect the
column footing or foundation of the building. In such cases
electrode may be further away from the building.

12.05 ARTIFICIAL TREATMENT OF SOIL:

If the earth resistance is too high ad the multiple electrode

earthing does not give adequate low resistance to earth,
then the soil resistivity immediately surrounding the
electrodes shall be reduced by addition of sodium chloride
calcium chloride, sodium carbonates copper sulphate, slat
and soft coke or charcoal in suitable proportions.

12.06 RESISTANCE TO EARTH:

The resistance of earthing system shall not exceed 2 ohm.

13.0 11 KV SWTICH BOARD

13.01 SYSTEM DESIGN PARAMETERS
Nominal System Voltage : 11 KV
Frequency : 50 Hz
System Fault Level : 350 MVA
Site Attitude Level : Less than 1000m above sea
level

13.02 11 KV, 350 MVA SWITCH BOARD

The panel shall be fully compartmentalized with separate

compartments for CT/cable termination, busbar chamber,
breaker compartment and LT chamber, housing the LT
equipment, like meters/relays etc. The panels shall be
suitable for fully drawout execution with horizontal
isolation. The breaker truck to have three distinct
positions, i.e. test, service and isolated. Necessary
interlocks to be provided to prevent operation of breaker in
any intermediate position.

Busbars shall be fine electrolytic copper, air insulated. The

busbars shall enclosed in a separate compartments and
shall be air insulated. The busbar supported on bus support
insulators shall be able to withstand the dynamic stresses
during short circuits.

The partitions between the breaker compartment and the

bus and cable connecting compartment respectively shall
be made of metal clad plates. These plates shall carry
individual metallic shutters for primary contact arms. The
shutters shall operate automatically without any complex
operating mechanism but under no circumstances be
pushed open inadvertently when the breaker truck is
removed. Scaling of the breaker room against the bus and
cable compartments must be ensured even when the
breaker is withdrawn.

The breaker panel is to have both power and control cable

entries from bottom.

Current Transformer: For metering and protection, panel

shall be provided with two core wound epoxy cast resin
current transformers.

Potential Transformer: For metering, panels shall be

provided with epoxy cast resin potential transformers in
single phase design. No HT fuses shall be provided on 11
KV side of potential transformer.

LT Compartment: A separate LT compartment shall be

provided, which houses the relays, meters etc.

Earthing: Positive scrapping earth shall be provided by

means of a copper busbar, which remains in contact with
the breaker trolley in all positions till the breaker is
withdrawn fully outside the panel.

Installation, Operation and Maintenance: The switch

gear shall be supplied in fully assembled, transportable
sections, ready for installation and connection. The details
 of this shall be given in the operating instructions supplied
with the panel board.

13.03 11 KV VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER

OPERATING CONDITIONS

The 11 KV drawout type vacuum circuit breaker shall be

suitable to operate on an electric power supply system
having 3 phases, 4 wire, 50 Hz, 11 KV earthed system and
having a fault level of 350 MVA at 11 KV.

Enclosure and Protection: The breaker enclosure shall

be metal clad and shall comprise of standard prefabricated
cold rolled sheet units assembled to form a rigid free
standing dead front structure.

The breaker shall be totally enclosed dust and vermin proof

housing conforming to protection class IP 42. It shall have
opening for natural ventilation. The openings shall be
louvered with wire mesh.

Doors and openings shall be provided with neoprene

gaskets.

Each units of breaker enclosure shall have internal sheet

metal barriers to form separate compartment for fuses,
busbars, instruments, relays cable connections etc.

It shall be possible to extend the enclosure in either

directions in future. Ends of busbars shall be suitable
drilled for this purpose.

The draw out carriage on the board shall three position

viz.Service, test and draw out. Automatic safety shutters
shall be provided to ensure inaccessibility of all live parts
after the breaker is draw out. It shall not be possible to
draw out the carriage with circuit breaker closed. Suitable
interlocks shall be provided to prevent faulty operation.

Accessibility: It shall be possible to remove / check

components without disturbing adjacent equipment. All
auxiliary equipment shall be easily accessible. All mounted
equipment shall have identification tags. Unused current
transformer secondary terminals must be short circuited.

13.04 BUS BARS CONNECTIONS:

 The board shall comprise of one sets of 3 phse bus bars
extending throughout all the unit of the breaker. All phase
busbars shall be of uniform cross section and shall be sized
to carry continuously the current specified on the single
line diagram. Busbars shall be made of electrolytic copper
and shall be sleeved. Joints shall be shrouded. The busbars
and the supports shall be adequately sizes and braced to
withstand the specified short circuit level.

13.05 POWER CONNECTIONS:

The incoming and outgoing power connections shall be

through 11 KV 1x3core, XLPE aluminium cable
respectively. Ample space shall be provided for connection
of this cable at the rear of the breaker. The power cable
shall enter the breaker from bottom.

13.06 AUXILIARY WIRING AND TERMINALS :

Inside the cubical, the wiring for control, protection and

instruments circuits shall be done with 1100 volt grade PVC
insulted control cables. The wiring shall be preferably
enclosed in plastic channels. 10% spare terminals shall be
provided on each terminal block. Conductors shall be
terminated with adequately sizes compression type lugs.
For connection to equipment terminal and strips, elmex
terminals shall be used. All spare contacts of auxiliary
relays, timers etc shall be wired upto the terminals.

Each core shall be identified at both the ends by PVC

ferrules and shorting links shall be provided for all the CT
terminals.

For CT circuit, 2.5 sqmm copper conductor shall be used.

Other control wiring shall be with 1.5sqmm copper
conductor.

13.07 CONTROL AND INDICATION:

Circuit breaker closing devices shall be fed from the

transformer at 110 volts AC supply and energy stored type
power pack shall be provided for tripping and closing
operation and panel lighting. The relays used shall be
current operated relays.
 Breaker position ON/OFF/Spring Charged/Test Position
/service position shall be medicated mechanically. For
electric indication following colour shall be used.

Breaker ON : Red Lamp

Breaker OFF : Green Lamp
Auto Trip : Yellow Lamp

Push buttons for ON and OFF positions shall be mounted on

the panel for location operation.

13.08 EARTHING CONNECTIONS:

All cubical shall be connected to an earth bus bar running

through out the length of the breaker. The earth bus size
shall be 50x12mm copper. All doors and movable parts
shall be connected to the earth bus with flexible copper
connection.

All non current carrying metallic parts shall be earthed.

13.09 NAME PLATE:

Name plate with the breaker designation and feeder details

shall be provided at front and rear of each panel. Name
plate shall be provided for each equipment as specified.

13.10 PAINTING:

All metal surface shall be thoroughly cleared and

degreased. The fabricated structure shall be pickled and
then cleansed to remove traces of acid. A coat of zinc
chromate primer shall then be applied. Thereafter synthetic
enamel paint shall be applied in two coats. The steel part
of panel shall be cadmium plated to prevent corrosion.

13.11 SPACE HEATERS:

The cubical shall be provided with anti-condensation space

heaters to prevent moisture condensation and maintain
cubical temperature 5 degree centigrade above ambient.
The space heaters shall be located at the bottom of the
board and shall be controlled through a thermostat with an
adjustable setting and a manually operated switch. The
thermostat shall be located in the metering relay chamber.
13.12 BASE FRAME:

The panel shall be installed on a base frame. The base

frame shall be fabricated from MS angle of suitable size
and installed on concrete foundation and fixed with bolts
and nuts. Installation of breaker shall be carried out in
accordance with manufacturers instructions and / or as
directed by the purchaser.

13.13 EQUIPMENT :
CIRCUIT BREAKER :

Fully draw out type vacuum breaker shall in door type and
rating shall be as under:
Rated Volt : 12 KV
Rated Frequency : 50 Hz
Rated Current : 400A
Rated Breaking Current : 350 MVA

VACUUM CIRCUIT BREAKER:

The breaker shall comprise on Vacuum interrupter unit per

pole. The moving contact in the interrupter shall be
connected to insulating operating rod linked with contacts
within the sealed interrupter unit and shall be enclosed by
metal bellows.

CONSTRUCTION OF VACUUM INTERRUPTER:

The interrupter shall consists of the following:

ENCLOSURE:

The enclosure shall be made of impermeable insulating

material like glass. The enclosure must not be porous and
should retain with vacuum.

END FLANGES:

End flanges shall be provided for accommodating seal.

CONTACTS:
 The contracts shall be made of large stem with large disc
shaped face. The material used for contacts tips shall be
copper chromium bismuth alloy. The travel shall be of the
order of 15mm.

VAPOR CONDENSING SHIELD:

The metal vapor released from the contact surface during

arcing shall be condensed on these shield.

METAL BELLOWS:

The bellows shall be able to permit sealed construction of

the interrupter and the movement of the contacts.

SEALS:

The seals shall be like metal glass or metal ceramic seals.

OPERATING MECHANISM:

The Circuit Breaker shall be power operated by a motor

charged spring operated mechanism. The operating
mechanism shall have anti-pumping features under every
method of closing. The main poles of the breaker shall
operate simultaneously. Also there shall not be any
objectionable rebound of the moving contact in the fixed
contacts.

The mechanism shall be such that any failure of auxiliary

spring shall not prevent tripping. When the breaker is in
closed position, failure of any auxiliary spring shall not
cause damage to the Circuit Breaker or danger operation.

A mechanical indicator shall be provided on the breaker

operating mechanism to indicate open and closed position
of the breaker. This shall be visible to a man standing in
front of the switch gear cubical with the door closed.

It shall be possible to operate the breaker mechanically.

This shall be possible only after opening the cubical door.

All working parts of the mechanism shall be of corrosion

resistance material.
 All split pins, nuts and other parts shall be property pinned
and locked to prevent loosening with repeated operation of
the breakers.

Auxiliary switch containing 6 nos.+ 6 nos. potential free

contacts rated for 10 Amp.240 V AC (inductive breaking)
shall also be provided.

SPRING OPERATED MECHANISM

Spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor,

opening spring, closing spring with limit switch for
automatic charging and all necessary accessories to make
the mechanism a complete operating unit.

The breaker operation shall be independent of the motor

which shall be used only for tensioning/compressing of the
spring. The closing operation shall automatically charge,
the tripping spring. The closing, opening shall get charged
immediately after a closing operation performed.

Motor used shall be preferable universal type operate on

AC supply. The motor shall operate satisfactory at all
values between 85% to 110% of rated voltage.

OPERATING MECHANISM CONTROL:

The operating mechanism shall normally be operated by

remote electrical control, when the breaker is in service
position. Electrical tripping shall be performed by shunt trip
coils. Provision shall be made for local electrical control
also when the breaker is in the test position by a control
switch on the switch gear cubical doors. Red and green
indicating lamps to indicate breaker close and open
respectively shall be provided on the cubical doors along
with breakers service and test position.

INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMER:

Current and voltage transformers shall be cost resin

insulated. Primary and secondary terminals shall be
marked indelibly. The secondary winding shall be provided
with a removable and accessible link or earthing.

CURRENT TRANSFORMER:
 The current transformer shall generally confirm to IS 2705-
1981. They shall be mounted on the stationary part of the
switch gear. The CT rating shall be as shown on the single
line diagram. The protective CT’s shall be used for
protection. CT’s for instruments shall have an accuracy of
class 120 and accuracy limit factor less than 5.

VOLTAGE TRANSFORMER:

The voltage transformer shall be draw out type and

provided with primary and secondary fuses. MCBs with
auxiliary contacts shall be used on secondary side. It shall
have accuracy of class 1for voltage ranging 10% to 120%
of normal voltage.

MEASURING INSTRUMENTS:

All measuring instruments shall be of a square pattern

flush mounted type. Instruments shall be provided as
indicted on a single line diagram.

AUXILIARY EQUIPMENTS:
RELAYS AND CONTACTORS:

Auxiliary relays and contactors shall generally be used for

interlocking and multiplying contacts.

The auxiliary contacts shall be capable of carrying the

maximum estimated current.

TRIPPING RELAYS:

The tripping relays shall be lockout type with hand reset

contacts and shall be suitable to operate off the specified
current. They shall be mounted in on draw out case.

PROTECTIVE RELAYS:

All protective relays shall be back out type suitable for

flush mounting and fitted with dust tight covers. All relays
shall preferably mounted on the front of the panel and
shall be as specified. All relays shall have built in flags to
indicate relays operation. It shall be to reset the flag with
out opening the relay case.
 FUSES:

All control fuses shall be of link type. Fuse shall generally

be mounted on upper half of the panel.

All fuse links shall have HRC cartridge fuses are not
acceptable.

PUSH BUTTONS:

Indicating colours of Push Buttons shall be as under:

STOP, OPEN, EMERGENCY RED START, CLOSE :

Red push button shall be on the left side and green push
button on the right.

CONTROL SWITCHES:

All control switches shall be rotary, back connected type,

having a cam operated contact mechanism. Phosphor
bronze contacts shall be used on the control switches.

Circuit breaker control switch shall have 3 position ON,

NEUTRAL and OFF Return to neutral from both ON and OFF
position shall be spring actuated. They shall have pistol
grip handles.

INDICATING LAMPS:

Switch board type low power consumption indicating lamps

shall be used. They shall be suitable for 6 volts. The lamps
shall be supplied with current limiting resistors, translucent
lamp cover to defuse light etc.

13.14 SCOPE OF SUPPLY:

The scope of supply covers Metal enclosed, fully draw out

type Vacuum circuit breaker, cable box. bus bars operating
mechanism, space heater, current transformer, voltage
transformer, measuring instruments, contractors, tripping
relays, protective e relays for transformer protection, push
buttons, control switches, indicating lamps. Local / remote
switch, power pole as per single line diagram.
13.15 DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF 11 KV
SWITCHGEAR DISTRIBUTION BOARD:

13.15.1 TAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF 11 KV

SWITCHGEAR DISTRIBUTION BOARD:
One (1)Three (3) panel 11 KV indoor sheet clad, dead front
switchgear distribution board with 3phase, fully insulated
copper bus bars having 400 Amp continuous current rating,
fully draw out type circuit breakers having short circuit
interrupting rating of 350 KVA symmetrical complete with
all components & accessories arranged as shown in
drawing and comprising as follows:

Unit No. Name Plate Designation of Feeders

1.0 Incoming PSEB Feeder
2.0 Transformer Feeder-1
3.0 Transformer Feeder-11

The individual Units shall be as given in the following

pages.
13.15.2 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF 11 KV PANEL:
13.15.2.1 INCOMING PSEB FEEDERS :

No. of Required - 1 Nos (ONE)

Feeder Nos. - 1.0
Current Rating - 400A
Short circuit Rating - 350 MVA
Design - Indoor type, metal clad, dead
front, drawing type, motor
operated spring,
closed,3pole, 11KV vacuum
circuit breaker.
Current Transformer - Three (3) nos. for metering
15 VA burden, Ratio 50 / 5-
5A. Double core. Accuracy
class 0.5 / 5 P 10.
Potential Transformer - Three (3) ON, OFF & Trip
Indication lamps, ON & Trip
Push Buttons.

Relaying & Protection - Protection relays as identified

in the single line diagram.
Over current and earth fault.
Accessories - Door interlock, Safety
shutters, Locking of VCB in
isolated position. Trolley lever
 handle, Breaker Trip, Push
Button.
Termination - Incoming suitable for
terminating 1X3C (A1)XLPE
11 KV cable.

13.15.2.2 OUTGOING TRANSFORMER FEEDER 1 & 11 :

Required - or as required as site

Feeder Nos. - 2.2 & 3.0
Rating - 400A
Short circuit Rating - 350 MVA
Design - Indoor type, metal clad, dead
front, drawing type, motor
operated spring,
closed,3pole, 11KV vacuum
circuit breaker.
Current Transformer - Three (3) nos. for metering
15 VA burden, Ratio 25 / 5-
5A. Double core. Accuracy
class 1.0 / 5 P 10.
Potential Transformer - Three (3) ON, OFF & Trip
Indication lamps, ON & Trip
Push Buttons.

Relaying & Protection - Protection relays as identified

in the single line diagram.
Over current and earth fault.
Accessories - Door interlock, Safety
shutters, Locking of VCB in
isolated position. Trolley lever
handle, Breaker Trip, Push
Button.
Termination - Suitable for terminating 1 X
3C (A1) XLPE 11 KV cable

Note: The above 3 panel board receives power supply through

PSEB meter, the supply shall be received at panel no.
1out of three panels. The remaining two panels shall be
transformers. However at places where only one
transformer is read to be installed, only one 11KV panel
shall be installed instead of three board.

13.16 DATA SHEET ON HIGH VOLTAGE VACUUM CIRCUIT

BREAKER OPENING CONDITION:
 Location : SUB STATION
Type & Nos. : 3 Nos. or as required
Power Supply : __
Normal Voltage : 11KV
Rated Voltage : 12KV
Frequency : 50HZ
Phase : 3 phase
Rated Current : 400A
Fault level at supply point : 350 MVA
Neutral earthing of Transformer : Solidly earthed
Coil voltage/ supply : 24 V. DC or as specified.
Transformer

ENCLOSURE:

Material Cold rolled sheet steel

Type Compartmentalised & free
floor standing
Protection Class IP 42
Doors & Opening Neoprene gasketed
Power Connections Powder coating with stoving
Shade As per approval Engineer-in-
charge
BUS BAR:
Material Electrolytic copper
Size Adequate to carry. A current
continuously as shown in the
drawings at 11 KV supply at
50 Hz and 3 phase system.
Resin moulded adequately
sized and braced to withstand
short circuit level.
Joints Taped / shrouded
Earth Bus Bar Required
Auxiliary Wiring Required
Control & Medication Required
Space Heater Required
Base Frame Required

14.0 11 KV / 0.433 KV TRANSFORMER:

10.01 GENERAL:

Power transformer shall be indoor type having capacities

indicated in the schedule. The supply is 11 KV /433 volts,
50 Hz and 3 phase. The transformer shall be OFF load, OFF
ckt. Type.
 The design manufacture and performance of transformer
shall comply with all performance of equipment status,
regulations and safety codes in the location where the
transformers will be installed. Transformers shall conform
to the latest applicable standards.

10.02 STEEL TANK:

The transformer tank shall be made from high grade steel

plate suitably reinforced with steel sections. All plates,
flanges, lifting hooks or lugs, brackets and other parts
attached to tank shall be welded. Adequately sized
manholes shall be provided for easy inspection and
maintenance. All joints shall be made easily leak proof in
resembling.
The transformer tank shall be suitable for oil fitting under
full vacuum.

10.03 CORE:

The transformer core shall be constructed from high grade

non-aging cold rolled grain oriented silicon steel
laminations coated with insulation varnish. Maximum flux
density in the core with the core excited to 110 rated
voltage shall not exceed 1.8 / Sq.m.

10.04 WINDING:

Winding shall be of suitably insulated copper wire or copper

strips. Winding shall be insulated from the core. High
voltage and low voltage windings shall also be insulated
from each other. Windings and insulation shall be so
arranged that free circulation of oil is possible between
coils, between windings and between winding and core.
The winding shall be fully shrunk under vacuum before
assembly.

High voltage windings shall be suitably braced to withstand

short circuit stresses set up by surges.

The core and coil assembly shall be dried out and

impregnated under vacuum.

The transformer core and winding assembly shall be

located in the means of suitable guides so as to prevent
 movement of the core and assembly within the tank during
transportation installation on service.

All steel bolts in oil tank shall be cadmium plated.

Transformer shall be provided with off load tap charger

incorporating the following features:
1) Positive acting tap position indicator showing the rating
used.
2) Facility for padlocking in any desired tap position.

10.05 CABLE TERMINATION:

The low voltage side of the transformer shall be suitable to

receive bus duct connections from the tap and the
transformer terminals to be brought out accordingly.

All H.T. sides of the transformers shall have cable and end
boxes to receive desired size of HKV cables.

All cables and boxes shall have bore holes to match the
opening for each cable specified and shown in the single
line diagram.

10.06 EARTHING:

Two main earthing terminals shall be connected to the

terminals provided for transformer.

10.07 INSULATING OIL:

Insulating oil for transformers and switch gear shall be with

the requirements of IS 335 transformer shall be supplied
complete with insulating oil required for first filling plus
10% excess oil in separate contains

10.08 FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES:

Inspection manhole shall be provided in the cover.

Lifting lugs for both the transformer and core shall be

provided.

Name plate, resetting plate and winding diagram plate

shall be provided as per standard.
 Cooling fins of suitable size for the natural cooling of the
Transformer.

Conservator with filling plug, drain valve and a shut of

valve on the pipe connection between transformer tank
and conservator shall be provided with an arrangement to
permit removal of the conservator.

Weather proof dehydrating breather with activated silica

get as the dehydrating agent shall be provided.

Magnetic type oil level gauge with low oil level alarm
contact mounted on the conservator shall be provided.

Gas detector relays with separate alarm and trip contacts

complete with shut of valves shall be provided for the
transformer.

Separate drain valve, top filter valve and oil sampling

device shall be provided on the tank.

Explosion vent with draphragm for relieving pressure with

the transformer on each draphragm shall be provided.

Adequate number of air vents for relieving trapped air

during oil filling and during maintenance, shall be provided.

Thermometer pocket and sensing elements shall be

mounted on the transformer tank cover for measuring top
oil temperature.

Water proof and dust proof terminals boxes for magnetic

oil level gauge shall be provided.

Separately mounted weather proof and vermin proof

marshalling box for housing the winding, oil temperature
indicator and marshaling facilities for electric devices shall
be mounted on the transformer.

Four jacking pads for leveling the transformer shall be

provided.

Unidirectional wheels for movement of the transformer

shall be provided.

14.09 INSTALLATION OF TRANSFORMER:

 Installation of transformer shall be carried out in
accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and / or as
ducted by purchaser. Transformer oil checking, topping
and if required filtering shall be done by contractor.

The contractor shall obtain a certificate from manufacturer

for correctness of oil filling, filtering, checking, working
condition etc.

The contractor shall arrange for oil samples testing and get
the approved reputed laboratories before commissioning.

After installing at site the transformer shall be subjected to

the following field tests.

Measurements of insulation resistance.

Ratio Test
Polarity test
Tap change operation test

All power/ control connections and mechanical joints shall

be completed checked and adjusted to ensure safety and
satisfactory operation of the transformer.

Transformer shall not be placed on bare ground during

unloading but it shall be placed on wooden sleepers. After
placing on foundation, alignment, leveling etc. shall be
carried out in best workman like manner.

For the power/control cabled projecting above the ground,

the termination to cable box shall be run in GI conduits of
suitable cross section and the same shall be supported
properly and pipe ends shall be sealed with bitumemines
compound.

The cable box of detachable type of the transformer shall

be supported properly so as to facilitate taking out of the
transformer for repair without disturbing the cables.

14.10 TEST CERTIFICATES:

Test certificate shall be furnished in required number of

copies for approval.

The routine, special and type test certificate of the

transformer shall be furnished for approval before the
delivery of the equipment from the factory.
 The routine and type test certificates of miscellaneous
components shall be furnished for approval.

14.11 ROUTINE TESTES:

During manufacture and on completion the transformer

shall be subjected but not limited to the following Routine
Tests as laid down in the latest revision of the IS:

a) Applied voltage test,

b) Induced voltage test,
c) No-load loss and excitation current tests.
d) Impedance voltage and load loss tests.
e) Resistance measurement.
f) Ratio Tests.
g) Polarity and phase relation tests.
h) Leakage tests.
i) Insulation resistance tests.
j) Insulation power factor tests.

14.12 TYPE TESTS:

The type test certificates for the following type tests

carried out on similar capacity rating shall be submitted
along with the routine test certificates.

a) Heat run test.

b) Vacuum test in tank.
c) Impulse test.
d) Short circuit impedance test.

14.13 FIELD TEST:

After installation a site, the transformer shall be subjected

to the following field tests:

a) Construction inspection.
b) Insulation oil test.
c) Measurement of insulation resistance.
d) Ratio tests.
e) Polarity test.
f) Tap change operation test.

14.14 DATA SHEET FOR TRANSFORMER:

Nos. required (TWO) as required
Capacity as required
Type of cooling Oil Immersed, Natural cooled
Rated Primary Voltage 11000 volts
Rated Secondary Voltage 433 V between phases & 250
between neutral
Rated Supply Frequency 50 Hz or cycles per second
No. of phases (Three)3
No. of windings (Two)2
Winding connection Primary Delta, Secondary-
Star with fully insulated
neutral brought out to
Secondary terminals.
Material of winding Capper
Vector Group Dyn 11 to IS : 2026
Voltage taps Off load taps on primary for-
2.5 % to + 7.5 or seven nos.
in steps.
Protection Double float Buchhoiz relay
for gas protection
Pressure Oil temperature
indicatorforoil temperature
Primary side connections Suitable for XLPE cable
Secondary side connections Suitable for 2 nos. 3 core
cables
Under Carriage Suitable under carriage with
rollers with edges designed
so as to permit sliding the
damaging the floor.
Marshaling Box To facilities connections of all
protection. Devices like oil
temperature indicator etc.
Fitting and Accessories As per IS specification and as
specified.
No. of windings Two (2)
Winding connection Primary Delta, Secondary
Star with fully insulated
natural brought out to
secondary terminals
Material of winding Copper
Vector Group Dyn 11 to IS : 2026
Voltage taps Off load taps on primary for
+ 2.5% to + 7.5% seven
nos. in steps
Protection Pressure Double float Buchholx relay
for gas protection.

Primary side connections
Secondary side connections
Under carriage
Marshaling Box
Fitting & Accessories
Oil temperature indicator for
oil temperature
Suitable for X LPE cable.
Suitable for 2 Nos.3 core
cable
Suitable under carriage with
edges designed so as to
permit sliding the
transformer when required
without damaging he floor.
To facilities connections of all
protection devices like
temperature indictor, etc.
As per IS specification and as
specified.

15.0 MEDIUM VOLTAGE SWITCH BOARD PANEL:

15.01 SCOPE:

Under this section the bidder’s scope covers design,

fabrication, transportation site, assembly, interconnections,
erection testing and commissioning of the switch boards
panels at site. The medium voltage power control centers
shall be located in substation. All panels shall conform to
the requirements of IS: 8623-1993 and shall need all other
relevant statutory regulations that of the local inspector.

15.02 CONSTRUCTION:

Switch board panels or power control of free standing type

shall have a busbar chamber at the top and the cable
compartment at the top depending upon the specific
requirements of job. The space between the bus chamber
and cable compartment shall be suitably
compartmentalized to accommodate either air circuit
breakers or switch fuse feeders of various ratings. The
cable terminations shall be carried out at the rear side of
the panels for which adequate, space and clamping
arrangements shall be provided. Where panels have to be
installed with very little access space at the rear, the cable
terminations shall be provided. Where panels have to be
installed with very little access space at the rear, the cable
terminations shall be carried out in suitable cable alleys
provided on the front of the panel. All the live parts shall
be properly shrouded with Bakelite barriers. All the
 equipment shall be accessible from the front. However
protection relays. KWH meters etc. may be mounted on
the front side. Arrangements and marking of busbars, main
connections and wiring shall be in accordance with IS :
5578-1985 and IS : 1353-1985.

15.03 DIMENSIONS:

Power control centers shall have dimensions of not more

than that given on the layout drawings. Panels arranged
sided by side shall have the same height and depth. The
standard width of single panel with ACBs shall preferably
be 800mm and that incorporating switch / NCCB shall be
400mm.

15.04 BUS BARS:

The busbars shall be suitable for 4 wire. 415 volts, 50 Hz,

system. The busbars shall be made of high conductivity.
Aluminium strips shall have uniform cross section
throughout. The busbars shall be capable of carrying the
rated current at 415 volts continuously. The busbars shall
be supported on suitable insulating materials at sufficiently
close intervals to prevent bus bar sag. Bus bars including
their supports shall be able to withstand thermal and
dynamic stresses due to the system short circuits up to
fault level of 50 KA. All the busbars shall be insulated with
PVC sleeving suitably colour coded.

15.05 EARTHING:

The panels shall be provided with an aluminium earth bus

running through of the switch board. Suitable earthing
bolts shall be provided on the main earthing bus to connect
the same to the earth grid at the site. Sufficient number of
star washers shall able provided at the joints to achieve
earth continuity between the panels and the sheet metal
parts.
15.06 MOUNTINGS:

Panels incorporating switch fuse units shall have suitable

compartments of standard width. Each compartment shall
incorporate a heavy duty load break switch fuse and HRC
fuses. Suitable cable termination arrangement shall be
provided for switch fuse and feeders. Equipment shall be
provided with proper fastening arrangements to ensure
 vibration free operation. Proper designation as given on the
respective drawings shall be provided for every equipment.

15.07 DRAW OUT TYPE AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

Circuit breaker shall be air circuit breaker conforming to

IS: 2516 and shall be of horizontal withdrawal type. It shall
comprise three identical poles operated through a common
shaft. It shall be suitable for switching duty of transformer
and motors and other devices.

It shall be possible to push in and withdraw the breaker

easily and without much effort. Insulating plugs and
sockets for power as well as for control circuit shall be of
robust design and fully self aligning. Plugs and sockets for
power circuits shall be silver faced insulated with PVC or
other insulating material. The breaker shall have three
distance positions namely services, test and fully
withdrawn positions. In test positions. In test position, it
shall be possible to operate the circuit breaker without
energizing the power circuits. Separate limit switches each
having minimum of 4 No. contact shall be provided for both
serviced and test position of the circuit breaker. These
contractors shall be rated for 10 Amp 240 volts AC.

15.08 OPERATING MECHANISM:

The Circuit Breaker shall be power operated either

pneumatically or by a motor charged spring operated
mechanism.

The operating mechanism shall have anti-pumping features

under every method of closing.

The main poles of the breaker shall operate

simultaneously. Also there shall not be any objectionable
rebound of the moving contact in the fixed contacts.

The mechanism shall be such that any failure of auxiliary

spring shall not prevent tripping. When the breaker is in
closed position. Failure of any auxiliary spring shall not
cause damage to the circuit breaker or danger the
operation.

A mechanical indicator shall be provided on the breaker

operating mechanism to indicate open and closed position
 of the breaker. Thus shall be visible to a man stand in front
of the cubical with the door closed.

It shall be possible to operate the breaker mechanically.

All working parts of the mechanism shall be of corrosion

resistance material. All split, bolts. nuts and other parts
shall be properly pinned and locked to prevent loosening
with repeated operation of the breakers.

Auxiliary switch containing 6 No. + 6 NC potential free

contacts rated for 10 Amp. 240 V AC indicative breaking).

ACB shall be fitted with suitable thermo magnetic or solid

state releases to provide following protection.

1. Short circuit
2. Over load
3. Earth fault

15.09 SPRING OPERATED MECHANISM:

Spring operated mechanism shall be complete with motor,

opening spring, closing with limit switch for automatic
charging and all necessary accessories to make the
mechanism a complete operating unit.

The breaker operation shall be independent of the motor

which shall be used only for tensioning/ compressing of the
spring. The closing operation shall automatically charge the
tripping spring. The closing, opening shall get charged
immediately after a closing operation performed. Motor
used shall be preferably universal type operated on AC
supply. The Motor shall operate satisfactory at all values
between 85% to 110% of rated voltage.
15.10 OPERATING MECHANISM CONTROL:

The operating mechanism shall normally be operated by

remote control when the breaker is in service position.
Electrical tripping shall be performed by shunt trip oils.
Provision shall be made for local electrical control also
when the breaker is in the test position by a control switch
on the cubical doors. Red and green indicating lamps to
indicate breaker close and open respectively shall be
provided on the cubical doors alongwith breakers service
and test position.

15.11 FUSE SWITCH UNITS

The fuse switch units shall be 3 pole double break type

suitable for load break duty (AC 23) quick make and break
action. Separate neutral link shall be provided with hinged
doors duly interlocked with operating mechanism so as to
prevent opening of the door when the switch is in ‘ON’
position and also prevent closing of the switch when the
door is not properly secured. All contacts incoming and
outgoing terminals of the switch shall be adequately sized
to receive proper size of cables. High repturning capacity
(HRC) fuse links shall be provided with switch fuse units
and shall be in accordance with IS:9224-1991 and having
repturning capacity of not less than 31 MVA at 415 volts.
HRC fuse links shall be provided with visible indicators to
so that they have operated. The switch fuse units shall be
manufactured in accordance with IS 4064-1992.

15.12 FUSE

Fuse shall be of the high repturning capacity (HRC) fuses

links and shall be in accordance with IS:9224-1991 and
having repturning capacity of not less than 31 MVA and
415 volts. The backup fuse rating for each motor/
equipment shall be chosen as the fuse does not operate on
starting of motor/ equipments.

15.13 RELAYS

All relays shall conform to IS:3231-1986 or equivalent.

They shall be suitable for semi flash mounting with only
flanges projecting on the front with connections from the
rear. Relays shall be rectangular in shape and have dust
tight, transparent covers removable from the front.
 All protective relays shall be in draw out cases with built in
test facilities. Test block and switches shall be located just
below each relay for testing unless otherwise specified. All
auxiliary relays and timers shall be supplied in non drawout
cases.

All relays shall be suitable for operation at 50 Hz A.C

voltage operated relays and current operated relays shall
be suitable for operation as specified. Voltage operated
relays shall have adequate terminal capacity for continuous
operation.

All protective relays shall be provided with at least two pair

of potential free output contacts. For auxiliary relays and
timers it shall be as specified. Relays shall have adequate
number of terminals for making potential free connections,
to the relay coils and spare contacts. Paralleling of contacts
if any shall be done at the terminals on the terminals on
the casing of the relays.

All protective relays shall be provided with externally hand

reset positive action operation indicators. The relays shall
have self resetting features.

Timers shall be electric magnetic type only. Short time

delays in milli-second may be obtained by shading the
copper lugs on auxiliary relays. This shall not effect the
continuous rating of the relays.

Each relay shall have provision for easy isolation of trip

circuit for the purpose of testing and maintenance.

All relay shall with stand a test voltage of 20.5 KV, 50 Hz

RMS voltage for one minute.

15.14 INDICATING INSTRUMENTS AND METERS.

Electrical indicating instruments shall be of minimum

96mm square size, 90 scale deflection with a class of
accuracy of 1.5 suitable for flush mounting.

Indicating instruments shall have provision for zero

adjustment outside the cover.
 Instruments dials shall be parallax free with back numerals
on while dial.

Ammeters provided on motor circuits shall be provided

with a suppressed extended scale to indicate motor
starting current.

Watt hour meters shall be of the direct reading

electrodynamometer type complete with cyclometer type
dials and reverse running stops.

15.15 INDICATION LAMPS:-

Indicating lamps shall be:-

i) Of the lament type and of low watt consumption.
ii) Provided with series resistors type.
iii) Provided with translucent lamp covers of colors ‘Red’
‘Green’ and ‘Amber’ as required. Bulbs and lenses shall be
easily replaceable from the front.

15.16 POWER FACTORY IMPROVEMENT SYSTEM:-

15.16.1 GENERAL :-

The power factory improvement system shall comprise of

capacitors and associated switchgear and control gear as
per the requirements,

15.16.2 CAPACITORS :-

Power factor correction capacitors shall conform in all

respects to IS: 2834-1964 or BS:1650-1996. The
capacitors shall be suitable for 3 phase, 415 V, at 50 Hz,
frequency shall be available in three phases units of 25
KVAR, 12.5 KVAR size. The capacitors shall be suitable for
indoor use upto ambient temperature of 50 degree C, the
permissible overloads shall be as given below:-

a) Voltage overload shall be 10% for continuous operation

and 15% for 6 hours in 24 hours cycle.

b) Current overload shall be 15% for continuous operation

and 50% for 6 hours in 24 hours cycle.

c) Overload of 30% continuously and 45% for 6 hours in 24

hours cycle.
 Capacitors shall be hermetically sealed in sturdy corrosion
proof, sheet steel containers and impregnated with non
inflammable synthetic liquid. Every element of each
capacitor unit shall be provided with its own built in
silvered fuse. The capacitors shall be suitable discharge
device to reduce the residual voltage from crest value of
the rated voltage to 50% V, or less within one minute after
capacitor is disconnected from the source of supply. The
loss factory of capacitor shall not exceed 0.005 for
capacitors with synthetic impregnates.

The capacitors shall withstand voltage of 2500 V, AC

(Power frequency test voltage) for one minute. The
insulation resistance between capacitors, terminals and
containers when test voltage of 500 V , DC is applied shall
not be less than 50 megohms.

15.16.3 CAPACITORS CONTROL PANEL:-

The capacitor control panel shall generally comprise of the

following:-

- Power factory correction relay.

- Step controller with reserving position
- Time delay and no volt relays.
- Protection fuses.
- Contractor & switch fuses for individual capacitor banks.
- Changeover switch for either manual on automatic
operation.
- Current transformers.
- Power factor meter with protection fuses.
- Indicator lamp for each bank

The capacitor control panel shall from a part of the main

L.T. panel in the substation as shown in the single line
diagram.

15.16.4. CONTROL AND SELECTION SWITCHES.

Control and selector switches shall be:-

- Of the rotary type with enclosed contacts.

- Adequately rated for the purpose intended( minimum
acceptable rating is 10 A continuous at 240 V AC and IA
(Indicating break) 220 VDC.
- Provided with escutcheon plated clearly marked to show
the position. Control switches shall be:-
 - Of the spring return to normal type.
- provided with pistol grip type handles
- Control switches for circuit breaker control shall be
provided with:-
- Contact development as specified.
- Sequencing device.

Wherever specified in data sheets, control switches with

built in flashing Type discrepancy lamps shall be provided
to control circuit breakers in lieu of the normal control
switches, red, green and amber indicating lamps. The
discrepancy lamp shall be replaceable from the front of the
module door.

Selector switches shall be:-

- Of the maintained contact stay put type, Switches I
ammeter circuits shall have make be for break type
contact.
- Provided with oval handles.

PUSH BUTTONS.

Push buttons shall be:-

- Of the momentary contact, push to actuate type rated to

carry 10 A at 240 V AC and IA (inductive breaking) at 220
V DC.
- Fitted with self reset 2 No and 2 NC contacts.
- Provided with integral escutcheon plates marked with its
function.
- Start, open, close push buttons shall be green in colour.
- Stop push buttons shall be red in colour.
- All other push buttons shall be black in colour.
- Emergency stop push buttons shall be of the lockable in
the pushed position type and shall be shrouded to prevent
accidental operation. Key shall not be required for the
operation of the push buttons.

15.17 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF 415 VOLT MAIN UT

SWITCHGEAR PANEL FOR SUB STATIONS:-

15.17.1 LOCATION:-SUB STATION: MAIN LT SWITCH GEAR

PANEL.

One (1) feeder 415 volts, indoor metal clad, dead front
fully draw out switchgear distribution board with three
phase and neutral fully insulated, copper busbars, having
 1000 amps continuous current rating for the three phases
and 600 amps for neutral and considering of incoming air
circuit breaker of short circuit interrupting rating of 31 MVA
symmetrical at 415 volts corresponding to 43.12 KA RMS.
Bus couplers, bus duct termination. Outgoing and
interlocking scheme complete with all components and
accessories as required and detailed in drawing and
comprising of the following or as per requirement:-

Unit Name plate Designation of the feeder.

1.0 Incoming from transformer 1

1.1 25 KVAR Cap. Bank
1.2 25 KVAR Cap. Bank
1.3 12.5 KVAR Cap Bank
1.4 12.5 KVAR Cap Bank
1.5 Block 1 MDB-N
1.6 Block 2 MDB-N
1.7 Fire fighting pumps.
1.8 Spare
1.9 Spare
1.10 Spare

2.0 Incoming from transformer II

2.1 Block-3
2.2 Outdoor lighting
2.3 A.M.F. panel
2.4 25 KVAR Cap Bank
2.5 25 KVAR Cap Bank
2.6 12.5 KVAR Cap Bank
2.7 12.5 KVAR Cap Bank
2.8 Spare
2.9 Spare
2.10 Spare

3.0 Bus Coupler

INCOMING FEEDERS:-
No. required Two (2) Nos or as per requirement
Feeder No. 1.0 and 2.0
Current rating 800amp or nearest equipment rating of the
manufacture
Short circuit rating 31 MVA symmetrical at 415 volts,
corresponding to 43.12 KA RMS or 1 sec.
Design Indoor fully drawout type, metal clad, dead
front motor operated, spring closed air circuit
breakers.
 Current Transformer Three (3) Nos. 800/5A for metering and
protection 15 VA burden Class-I
Instruments & Meters Three (3) ON,OFF and Trip indicating lamps,
ON &
Trip push buttons.
Protection Thermal over load release
Short circuits
Terminal Connections Suitable for receiving PVC
A1 armoured cable from the transformer.

NOTES:-

1. The Two bus section circuit breaker units complete with their
C.Ts.
Metering etc. shall be so arranged that the one incoming 415
volts connection from the left transformer of the two
transformers and the second transformer right section in
between the two incomers the bus connected through a bus
coupler. The arrangement is so desired that the two transformer
can feed the common bus of the panel simultaneously by
opening the bus coupler or any one transformer can feed the
centre bus by closing the bus coupler.

2. The two incoming and bus coupler shall be so interlock that the
bus coupler will remain open when both transformers are ON. If
any one of incomer is off then bus coupler shall be close i.e to
prevent paralleling of both incomers supply.

BUS COUPLER.

Nos required One (1) Nos or as per requirement

Feeder Nos. 3.0
Current rating 800 amps or nearest equipment rating of the
Manufacture.
Short circuit rating 31 MVA symmetrical at 415 volts,
corresponding to 43.12 KA RMS for 1 sec.
Design Indoor, fully drawout type, metal clad dead
front
Motor operated, spring closed air circuit
breakers.
Instruments & Meters Three (3 ) ON, OFF, TRIP indicating lamps,
ON &
TRIP push buttons.
Protection Thermal over load release.
Short circuit.

15.17.2 LOCATION SUB STATION:- EMERGENCY SWITCHGEAR

PANEL.

One (1) feeder 415 volts, indoor metal clad, dead front
fully draw out switchgear distribution board with three
 phase and neutral fully insulated. Aluminium busbars,
having 600 amps continuous current rating for the three
phases and 400 amps for neutral and considering of
switch fuse unit with HRC fuses incoming indoor of short
circuit interrupting rating of 31 MVA symmetrical at 415
volts corresponding to 43.12 KA RMS cable termination.
Outgoing and scheme complete with all components and
accessories as required and detailed in drawing and
comprising of the following or as per requirement:-

Unit Name plate Designation of the Feeder.

4.0 Incoming from AMF panel

4.1 Block-I
4.2 Block -2
4.3 Block -3
4.4 Lift
4.5 Lift
4.6 Sub station light DB
4.7 Spare
4.8 Spare
4.9 Spare
4.10 Spare

16.0 11 KV CABLES.

16.01 GENERAL:-

The high tension cable shall be aluminium conductor XLPE

insulated armoured construction. The conductors shall be
made from electrical purity aluminium wire. The conductor
shall be sector shaped standed conductor. The cables shall
conform ot IS:7098 Part II, 1985

16.02 RATING

The cable shall be rated for a voltage of 11000 volts

16.03 CORE IDENTIFICATION:-

Core shall be identified by numbers, 1,2 & 3 printed on the

insulation.

16.4 CURRENT RATING:-

The current rating shall be based on the following

conditions:-
 - Max. conductor temperature 65 C
- Ambient air temperature 40 C
- Ground temperature 30 C
- Depth of laying 90 C

16.5 SHORT CIRCUIT RATING:-

Short circuit rating for the cables shall be as per IS: 692
(latest edition) however the rating shall be based on the
followings:-

a) Max, conductor temperature under full load conditions 65 C

b) Max. S.C conductor Temperature. 140 C

16.06 SELECTION OF CABLES:-

The cables have been selected considering the followings:-

a) Max. connected load.
b) Ambient temperature.
c) Grouping of cables.
d) Short circuit level.
16.07 STORING, LAYING AND JOINTING

H.T. Cables shall be laid in trenches or ducts unless

otherwise specified. Generally laying, jointing and
commissioning shall be as per the regulations of local
authorities:-

a) STORING:-
On receipt of H.T cable at site, cable shall be inspected to
detect any damage. The ends of cables shall be in sealed
condition. After inspection, cables shall be stored in a
proper place with battens of cable drums being replaced.
The cable drums shall not be stored on the flat with flanges
horizontal.

b) LAYING CABLE LAYING IN TRENCHES:-

HT cables can be laid in outdoor trenches, if specifically
called for although provision exists for pulling cable in
existing ducts. Wherever cables are laid in outdoor
trenches, the depth of the trenches shall not be less than
750mm plus radius of cable from upper surface of the
ground. Where more than one multi core cable is laid in
the same trench, a horizontal internal spacing of 0.25
meter shall be left in order to reduce mutual heating and
also to ensure that fault occurring on one cable will not
damage the adjacent cable. Cable shall be laid in asbestos
 cement pipes encased in concrete or hume pipes at all road
crossings, cable shall be laid in trenches over rollers placed
inside the trenches. After the cable has been properly laid
and straightened, it shall be covered with 80mm thick layer
of sand. Cable shall then be lifted and placed over this
sand cushion. Again the cable shall be covered with a sand
layer of 80mm thick. Over this sand layer a course of cable
protection tiles of overlap of 50mm on either side of cable
markers made of aluminium of cast iron indicating the
voltage grade and direction of run of the cable shall be
installed at regular intervals.

16.08 CABLE JOINTING:-

Cable jointing shall be made as per the instructions of the

cable manufacturer. Cable jointing shall be carried out only
by qualified and competent cable jointers. A copy of
manufacturer recommendations shall be submitted to the
Engineer-in charge for the approval. Cable shall be jointed
using standard cable joining boxes with a lead sleeves and
MS/CI rectangular box. Cable shall be jointed using
standard cable joining boxes with a lead sleeves and CI
protection box. The box shall be of split type with
compound filling hole and plug. The lead sleeve shall be
provided with holes and lead seals. Cable shall be jointed
as per colour coding or numbering of the cores. The cable
seal shall not be removed until all preparations for jointing
are completed. Joining the glands and armour clamps shall
establish good electrical contact between cable armour
lead sheath and body of the switchgear. The cable box and
gland shall be bonded to the main earth bus with suitable
size copper tapes.

16.09 TESTING

a) Insulation resistance of both sections of the cables to be

jointed should be checked by 1000 v megger.

b) H.T cables shall be pressure tested to withstand a voltage

after the jointing is completed However the test voltage
and duration of test shall be in conformity with local
standards. Before carrying out the DC high voltage test the
cable shall be laid in its final position with all the end
terminations kept unfinished so that sub station
equipments are not subjected to the test pressure.

17.0 MEDIUM VOLTAGE BUS – TRUNKING.

17.01 The enclosure of medium voltage bus duct shall be of 14
SWG steel with removable inspection covers and shall be
totally enclosed. Dust and vermin proof for indoor
installation, adequately sized bus bars shall be of
aluminium sections with necessary expansion joints,
mounted in box frame construction. The busbars shall be
supported on case insulators at regular intervals to
withstand the 50 KA short circuit current. G.I. earth bus of
32x6mm shall be run along the bus duct having necessary
provision for connection to the earthing network. The
temperature rise in bus duct shall be less than 40 deg. C
The bus duct shall be painted with epoxy paint. Before
painting the bus duct shall be cleaned, degreased and
made free from rust. A coat of primer shall be followed by
the finished coats of same colour shade as for Main L.T
panel. All unpainted metallic parts shall be cademium
plated or suitably treated to prevent corrosion.

17.02 DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR BUS-

TRUNKING

No. of bus ducts require Two(2) as per requirement.

Length of bus duct As indicated in drawing
Enclosure Sheet steel fabricate with
sections Vermin proof with
ventilation arrangement.
Bus bars Triple pole with neutral of
aluminium conductor of
adequate cross section with
copper flexible connection at
both ends.
Current rating 300 Amps 31 KVA at 415 V 3
phase 50 Hz.
Support Angle iron frame, brackets as
required
Note: The bus trunking shall be fixed in the electrical
on the Horizontal wall

18.0 COMMISSIONING CHECK LIST OF ELECTRICAL

WORKS

18.01 SCOPE

Before commissioning of electrical installations the

contractor shall check all the items mentioned and arrange
 for testing of each equipments in presence of Engineer-in-
charge.

18.02 Functional Checking

a) Check all closing, tripping, supervision & interlock of

control devices.
b) Check operation of all alarm circuits.

18.3 a) All 11 KV cables to be high voltage tested.

b) All 415 and 230 V power cables to be meggered.

18.04 EARTHING:

a) Measure resistance of each earth well / rod by isolating the

same from station grid as well as from other earth well /
rods and when measure resistance of two earths at a time
by DC drop method.
b) Check continuity of grid conductors and wires.
c) Soil resistivity tests.

In addition to the above any other specified by

manufacturers shall be carried out as per manufacturer’s
instructions.

Measure voltage across bearing pedestal insulation and

between rotor shaft and bearing.

Test the fire detection system if provided.

Check operation of protection relays by putting short circuit

bat at different location.

Check open circuit and short circuit characteristics of

generators.

Check load characteristics of excitors.

18.05 METERS

a) Check name plate details according to specification.

b) Physical check for any damage.
c) Check calibration by comparing it with a substandard
meter.
d) Megger all insulated portions.
e) Check CT and VT connections with particular reference to
their polarities for power type meter.
18.06 RELAYS

a) Check name plate details according to specifications.

b) Check for any physical damage.
c) Check internal wiring
d) Megger all terminals to body
Megger AC to DC terminals
e) Check operating characterstics by secondary injections.
f) Check minimum pick up voltage of DC coils.
g) Check operation of electrical / mechanical targets.
h) Relay settings
i) Check CT and VT connection with particular reference to
their polarities for directional, distance type relays.

18.07 CURRENT TRANSFORMER

18.07.1 PRELIMINARY CHECKS:

• Check name plate details according to specification.

• Check for physical damage.
• Check tightness of all bolts, clamps, connecting terminals.
• Check for oil level and leakages.
• Check connections.
• Check cleanliness of insulators and bushing.

18.07.2 COMMISSIONING CHECKS

• Megger between winding & winding terminals to body.

• Polarity test.
a) Ratio identification checking of all ration on all cores by
primary injection of current.
b) Magnetisation characteristics, secondary winding
resistance.
c) Capacitance and tan-delts test.
• Dielectric test of oil (wherever applicable)
• Spare CT cores, if any to be shorted and earthed.

18.8 CONTROL PANELS

18.8.1 PRELIMINARY CHECKS

• Check name plate details of every associated equipment

according to specifications.
• Check for physical damage.
 • Check tightness of all nuts, clamps, connecting terminals.
• Check cleanliness.
• Check earthing

18.8.2 COMMISSIONING CHECKS:

• Switch developments
• Each wire shall traced by continuity tests & it should be
made sure that the wiring is as per relevant drawings. All
interconnections between panel/ equipment shall be
similarly checked.
• All the wires should be meggered to earth.
• Checks on relays.
• Checks of motors.
• Settings of relays, other alarm, tripping devices interlocks
as per schemes.
• Phase angle checks measurements of magnitude and
phase angle of current transformer secondary currents and
potentials transformer secondary voltage
• Functional checking of all control circuit e.g. closing
tripping. Control interlock supervision and alarm circuit
including proper functioning of the component equipments.

18.9 DIESEL GENERATOR SET:

FACTORY TESTS
The factory test shall incorporate the following:
• Routine test
• High voltage tests.
• Short circuit tests.
• Instantaneous short ckt. Withstanding test.
• Insulation resistance test. Contractor shall furnish type
tests certificate for Engine and alternator. These tests shall
be conducted as per the requirement of BS: 2613 or IS:
4722 and the original test certificate shall be furnished.

18.10 Site Tests

After erection is completed following test shall be

conducted
Insulation resistance of the generator.
Speed no load voltage and full load voltage regulation.
Frequency on no load half load and full load.
Full load test for 6 hrs at rated voltage, speed & frequency.
 The readings shall be observed with calibrated meter. Only
meter shall be used for the test. The reading shall be
properly tabulated submitted in triplicate to Engineer-in-
charge.

18.11 TESTING OF CONTROL

All the safety control and protection devices of the DG set

shall be tested for correct calibration and operation. The
result of the test shall be tabulated and submitted in
triplicate to Engineer-in-charge.

18.12 TRIALS:
18.12.1 PRELIMINARY TRIALS

After completion of erection of DG set and before carrying

out main trials. Preliminary trials shall be conducted in the
presence of the Engineer-in-charge such trials include the
checking and adjustment of all instrument relays timers
interlocks and meters. Crank shaft alignment shall be
checked when the engine is cold insulation of stator, rotor
& excitor windings reading recorded.

18.12.2 MAIN TRIALS

Main trial shall be of 12 hrs continuous run at full load and

including one hour at 110% of full load.

18.13 AMF PANEL AND ENGINE TRIAL

AMF panel and engine control panel shall be tested for

automatic operation by injecting proper current one
voltage by a separate source. The satisfactory working of
automatic operation shall be tested & necessary
adjustment shall be done for relays in the presence of the
engineer-in-charge and the result shall be recorded in the
test sheet at 30 minutes interval. Alternator efficiency as
determined in works test shall be used as the basis of
calculation for fuel consumption rate. Test providing the
satisfactory performance of all safety and operating
controls shall be carried out. Starting time of sets shall be
tested at least five times and the sufficient time interval to
allow for cold start. A set of tools and tackles has to be
supplied along with each set and shall be included in the
cost of DG set.

19.0 TRANSFORMERS
19.0.1 PRELIMINARY CHECKS:

a) Compare name plate details with the specifications.

b) Check for any physical damage, in particular of bushings.
c) Check tightness of all bolts, clamps, connecting terminals.
d) Check cleanliness of bushing.
e) Check for oil leakage and oil level.
f) Breather condition, check whether breathing line is free
silica jet is reactivated, oil is available at the bottom.
g) Check for clearances, particularly in case of bus ducts.
h) Water tightness of terminal boxes and bus ducts.
i) Ensure that all cooler and cooler header valves are opened.
j) Releasing of air from bushings (very important) Buchholz
relay.
k) Check the bushing horn gaps.
l) Check that the transformer is correctly installed with
reference to its phasing.

19.0.2 COMMISSIONING TESTS:

a) Test the transformer oil for dielectric strength, tan-delta,

activity resistivity and dissolved gases.
b) Test bushing oil for dielectric strength.
c) Insulation test of winding (including tertiary winding if
available)
d) Capacitance and tan-delta test of condenser type bushings,
before assembly.

TEST THE TRANSFORMER FOR THE FOLLOWING:

a) Voltage / turns ratio at all the taps.

b) Winding resistance at all the taps.
c) Short circuit impedance at full winding.
d) Magnetic balance at full winding.
e) Core loss at service tap at low voltage.
f) Capacitance and tan – dalta
g) IR and PI
h) Vector group test.
i) Phase sequence test
j) Current transformer.
a) Continuity test.
b) Polarity test
c) Insulation resistance tests.
d) Magnetization characteristics.
e) Rough ratio test.
f) Secondary winding resistance.
k) Line connection as per phasing diagram
 l) Winding resistance.
m) Insulation resistance of control wiring.
n) Coro load test.
o) Buchholz relay operation for alarm and trip.
p) OLTC control indicting and alarm circuits.
q) Operation test of all protective devices and interlocks.
r) Calibration of temperature indicator (oil & winding
temperature relays)
s) Cooling system:
a) Fan motor rating and fan mounting (wherever
applicable)
b) Oil pumping equipment (wherever applicable)
c) Operation of valves.
d) Operation of flow switches.
e) Operational test of cooling equipment.
f) Check fan motors for insulation, continuity, vibration
and temperature rise and direction of rotation.
g) Check the lighting arrester installation.

19.03 CONTROL PANELS:

19.03.1 PRELIMINARY CHECKS:

a) Check name plate details of every associated equipment

according to specification.
b) Check for physical damage.
c) Check tightness of all nuts, clamps and connecting
terminals.
d) Check cleanliness
e) Check earthing.

19.03.2 COMMISSIONING CHECKS:

a) Switch developments
b) Each wire shall be traced by continuity tests and it should
be made sure that the wiring is as per relevant
drawings. All interconnections between panels /
equipments shall be similarly checked.
c) All the wires should be meggred to earth.
d) Checks on relays.
e) Checks of motors.
f) Setting of relays other alarm, tripping devices interlocks as
per schemes.
g) Phase angle checks measurements of magnitude and
phase angle of current transformer secondary currents and
potentials transformer secondary voltages.
 h) Functional checking of all control circuit e.g. closing
tripping, control, interlock, supervision and alarm circuit
including proper functioning of the component equipment.

19.04 CIRCUIT BREAKERS:

19.04.1 PRELIMINARY CHECKS:

a) Check name plate details according to specification.

b) Check for physical damage.
c) Check tightness of all bolts, clamps, connecting terminals.
d) Check oil level, air pressure and leakage (wherever
applicable)
e) Check earth connections.
f) Check cleanliness of insulators and bushings.
g) Check all moving parts are properly lubricated.
h) Check heaters provided.

19.4.02 COMMISSIONING CHECKS:

a) Check alignment of breaker trunks for free movement.

b) Slow closing / opening operation.
c) Check control wiring for correctness of connections,
continuity and IR values.
d) Manual operation of breakers (only after filling oil in tank)
e) Power closing / opening operation manually & electrically.
f) Breaker closing and tripping time.
g) Trip free and anti-pumping operation.
h) I.R. values, resistance & minimum pick up voltage of coils.
i) Contact resistances.
j) Simultaneous closing of all three phase.
k) Pole discrepancy test.
l) Single and three phase auto recluse operation.
m) Simultaneous closing of all three phases.
n) Single & three phase auto recluse phase.
o) Check electrical & mechanical interlocks provided.
p) Checks on spring charging motor correct operation of limit
switches and time of charging.
q) Checks on CTs
r) All functional checks.

Note:- All tests mentioned above are indicated only, the Executive
Engineer (E) reserves the right to give waiver or to specify
conducting of all or any of the above tests as may be
deemed necessary by him.

20.0 SAFETY EQUIPMENTS:

20.0.1 DANGER NOTICES:
Danger notices shall be affixed permanently in a conscious
position in Hindi or English and the local language of the
district with sign of skull and bones at every overhead line,
transformer electrical equipments motors etc.

20.0.2 FIRST AID BOX

Standard first aid box with all standard contents shall be
supplied.

20.0.3 FIRE BUCKETS:

The fire bucket unit shall consist of our galvanized iron
baskets which shall be with round bottom and of 13 liters
capacity. They shall be filled with dry sand. Arrangement
shall be made of hang them on GI pipe stand comprising of
at least 2 vertical and one horizontal members of 500 mm
GI pipe. Te stands shall have books and locking chain
arrangement. The buckets and stand shall be painted with
epoxy red paint.

20.0.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHER:

Fire extinguishers of 4.5 kg capacity shall be of approved
make. It shall be filled with Carbon tetrachloride. It shall
have horns. Extinguishers shall be fixed on wall / columns
with necessary clamps made out of 50 mm x 6 mm MS flat
and coated bolts and nuts grouted in wall / columns.

20.0.5 RUBBER MAT:

20 mm corrugated rubber insulating matting shall be
provided in front of HT breakers, power and motor control
centers, push button station and distribution in control
room. The width of matting shall be one meter, it shall be
as ISI mark.

20.0.6 INSTRUCTION CHART:

Printed instruction chart born in English and Hindi and duly
framed with front glass, prescribing treatment to be
persons having electric shock shall be supplied.

21.0 DRAWING / PROCUREMENT & INSPECTION OF

EQUIPMENT:
21.01 Based on the tender drawings and the equipment / scheme
finally selected, the contractor shall supply layouts, cable
line diagrams etc. required for the satisfactory and
complete installation of the total electrical power supply
and distribution system as envisaged in the tender. Some
of the important drawings / details to be submitted for
approval are given below:

a) General arrangement drawings of DG equipment LT

switchgear, panels, transformers ducts etc.

b) Single line and three line diagrams of DG set and

sub-station

c) Wiring diagram, schematic diagrams and control

diagrams for equipments, switchgear, PCC and the
whole system. Schedule and termination details shall
also be provided.

d) Building plan, elevation / section and details

including the layout of plant, equipment switchgear,
bus ducts and related services like chimneys, cooling
systems, fuel handling system etc. with dimensions
based on the equipment finally selected.

e) Details of all foundations, cable ducts, cable

protections pipes and other civic works.

f) Complete schedule for LT cables, instrument / control

cables.

g) Layout plan showing the coordinates / routing for

power cables. Control / instrument cables and other
cables as required, coordinated with other services
like water supply line, drainage / sewerage lines, fire
lines, mechanical services pipes line etc. the
sectional details, road crossing details etc. shall also
be given at different location.

h) Technical catalogue for all equipment, switchgear,

cables and materials including a complete wire up /
details of operation, interlocks and controls etc.

i) Operation and maintenance manuals alongwith list of

spare parts for all equipments, switchgear, cables
and materials etc.
 j) A detailed explanatory note given the details of
operational sequence, item period and safety aspects
etc. on changeover from PSEB supply source to
standby DG power

21.02 PROCUREMENT & INSPECTION OF EQUIPMENT

Approval list of makers and vendors are given at para No.

22. The Executive Engineer (E) reserves the right to
supplies makers of equipment materials. Material supplied
shall be strictly as mentioned therein. For items not
specially mentioned, prior approval shall be taken before
procurement of the same all equipment / material supplied
shall be brand new and shall be procured directly from the
manufactures, dealers or authorized agents. Executive
Engineer (E) shall have access to the manufactures
premises for stage inspection / final inspection of any item
during its design, manufacturing assembly and testing.
After carrying out the necessary factory tests and routine
tests as per IS standards, a copy of the routine test
certificate shall be forwarded alongwith the call for carrying
out the inspection at the manufacturer’s works.

Based on the inspection certificate, Executive Engineer (E)

reserves the right to carry out the inspection at a mutually
agreed data and / or give inspection waiver. A minimum of
two weeks will be needed after receipt of complete shop
inspection report and other details to depute our inspector
for inspection.

22.0 FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM SYSTEM

22.01 GENERAL
The contractor shall supply and install the Fire Detection &
Alarm System as per schedule of quantities and as herein
specified. The system shall include main fire alarm control
panel, local fire control panel charger, batteries, heat
detectors, smoke detector, manual fire alarm station, fire
alarm bells / hooters, response indictors, in-built PA
system, wiring and all necessary accessories required to
complete fire alarm system installation as per IS: 2188.
Equipment like control panel, smoke detector, heat
detectors shall be EN54 / UL approved.

22.02 FEATURES:
The system shall be general alarm electrically supervised
type activation of manual fire alarm station or any of the
 automatic alarm initiating devices shall sound the general
alarm bells on all floors and shall give indication on the
control panel. The signal shall be continuous until the
station from which it is originated is restored to normal and
a reset button on the control unit is operated. The system
shall be electrically supervised against open and ground on
both the stations and signal device wiring. Open and
ground in the system shall cause a trouble bell to ring at
the fire alarm control panel and a trouble lamp to light. It
shall be possible to silence the bell but the lamp shall
remain lit until the fault is rectified. In case of power failure
the system shall automatically changeover to the battery
standby.

22.03 CONDUCTING AND WIRING

Conducting and wiring for FDA system shall be carried out
in MS conduit with copper conductor PVC insulated wires.
Each zone shall be wired with two wire system looping
from outlet detector to detector. Ground floor has been
provided with Main Fire Detection & alarm panel located in
fire control room on ground floor of block 1 of Hospital
Block. Conducting & wiring shall be carried out as
described under subhead 4 of this specification.

22.04 CONTROL PANEL:

The main and local fire control panel shall be constructed
to sheet steel of red colour and provided with windows for
the alarm and trouble lights. All components shall be of the
plug in type for simple replacement and extension in the
future. Control panel shall be wall mounting type
conforming to IS:513-1986

The main and local fire control panel shall be provided with
all necessary relays, resistors, fuses, transformers,
rectifiers and all other components to assure full and
proper functioning of the system. All relays shall conform
to the relevant IS standards.

Control panel shall include power on lamps, system trouble

lamps, audible trouble signal, trouble silence switch with
ring back, alarm silence push bottom with repeat alarm
capability, low battery indicator with reset, ground
detection indicator, alarm reset, millimeter, supervised
alarm lamps zone “open” test push button, zone alarm test
push button, end of line resistors etc. main control panel
shall also have provision for sensing and immediate
tripping / shutoff of package unit air conditioning system in
 case of fire. Each zone shall be equipped with an auxiliary
contact for control of a remote enunciator. Main control
panel shall include a power, supply model to provide a
filtered and regulated source of power to provide additional
power, wherever supplementary power is required within
the system. It shall include an output fuse key rest switch,
provision for automatic transfer to standby power upon
primary power failure.

Main control panel shall in addition have audible signal and

lamp to indicate as failure of the charge of battery. Two
stage general alarm shall be provided in which a
continuous evacuation alarm is immediately given in zone
of fire and its adjoining zones. Is other zone intermittent
alarm signal shall be provided as per IS 2189-1988.
Repeater panel shall be of same specifications as main
control panel and shall have fire fault medication with
audio device. The mimie diagram with various zones clearly
marked and provided with LED.

22.05 CHARGER AND BATTERY:

Unit shall comprise a ventilated cabinet supplied complete
with charger, meters, high rate charger switch and lock
and key. Unit shall be designed for sealed maintenance fire
batteries and shall provide these batteries with means for
keeping the charge upto the proper level. Cabinet shall be
ruggedly constructed of a minimum of 1.63 mm sheet (16
SWG) primed and then finished in red. A steel divider shall
completely separate the cell from the charger controls.
Separator strips between cells shall hold them securely to
prevent movement or spillage. SMF batteries shall be
provided. The battery backup shall be for minimum 24 hrs.
Batteries shall be kept on wooden planks.

22.06 Electronic hooters

Hooter shall be electronic solid state speaker type having
tone for fire which shall be wailing. Hooter shall be loop
powered having an output of approximately 6 watt. The
audible range shall be around 100 m under normal
condition. Cable for this in our system shall be 2 core. The
switching shall be provided on the control panel. The outer
enclosure of the speaker is made of MS sheet and shall be
suitably oven baked and painted. The speaker shall be 4”
heavy magnet type. All hooters shall be on one or more
circuits. The hooter shall be compatible with PA system.

Specification:
 Ambient Temperature minus 25 deg. C to plug 80 deg. C
Relative Humidity Max 95% RH 30 days/year without
condensation.
Sound intensity at atleast 90 db
on m distance
Operating voltage loop powered

22.07 MANUAL ALARM CALL POINT FOR SURROUNDINGS:

The manual call point shall be electrically compatible with
the standard range of automatic detectors so that it can be
connected directly into a supervised two wire zone of the
manufacturer’s standard range of control units. The
manual call point shall be of pleasant, streamlined and flat
appearance permitting its use as flush and surface
mounted unit. The manual call point shall consist of the
base plate, insert and cover. The push button shall have
minimum on normally closed plus one normally open
contact. These buttons shall not be shrouded and the same
shall be projected out from the surface of MS Box. The
whole assembly of push button that shall be enclosed in
the 16 SWG MS box except the front side. The front side
shall be sealed with breakable glass cover using neoprene
or equivalent gasket. The glass cover shall be fixed in such
a way that the actuating push button is kept depressed
(with NC contact open) so long as the glass cover is in
contact. In case of fire, when the glass cover is broken to
give the fire warning the push buttons shall be released
due the spring action hence giving remote fire alarm
through the NC contact. The breaking of the glass must
release an alarm, all inscriptions, tests and marks must be
on the manual, call point front plate not on the glass so
that the glass can easily be replaced anywhere. The alarm
contacts shall be of self cleaning design to prevent failure
after a prolonged period of inactivity in unclean
environments. The manual call point shall be designed for
fail safe operation.

It shall be possible to test the call point without destroying

the seal or removing the cover. The manual call point shall
be equipped with a self holding device to maintain the
alarm condition until reset by an authorized person. The
complete unit and the push button shall be painted signal
red. The internal surface of the MS enclosure of the MS
enclosure of the box shall painted white colour. The
external painting shall be of synthetic enameled paint.
Aluminium hammer shall be suspended on a hook fixed to
 the external MS enclosure by means of a non corrodible
aluminium chain of sufficient length and play to facilitate
easy breaking of the glass cover.

Manual alarm call point located on the outer walls of the

building and / or exposed to weather conditions shall be
weather proof type and satisfying the requirement of IP 66

Specifications:

Operating voltage 16 to 50 VDC

Max contact load 0.1 A / IW
Terminal for wire 0.2 to 1.5 sq. mm (SWG 24 to 15)
Cross sectional area
Ambient temperature 25 degree C to +80 degree C.
(13 deg. F to + 176 deg. F)
Relative Humidity 95% RH 30 days / year, with cond.
Housing colour red.

22.08 IONIZATION TYPE SMOKE DETECTORS:

Ionization smoke detectors shall responded to invisible and
visible combustion gases. Ionization smoke detectors shall
have an inherently stable sensor with built in automatic
compensation for changes in ambient conditions. All
electronic circuits must be solid state devices and virtually
hermetically sealed to prevent their operation from being
impaired by dust, dirt or humidity. All circuitry must be
protected against usual electrical transient and
electromagnetic interference. Reverse polarity or faulty
zone wiring shall not be damage the detector. The detector
shall have no moving parts or components subject to wear.
All radioactive parts of the detector shall be safeguarded
against tampering. The radioactive source shall be fully
gold plated. The response sensitivity of each detector shall
be factory set. A built in barrier shall prevent entry of
insects into the sensor. A built in optional integration
circuit shall allow the suppression of brief deceptive
phenomena. The detector shall be designed for fast and
simple laboratory cleaning. The detector shall be inserted
into or removed from the base by a simple push twist
mechanism to facilitate exchange for cleaning and
maintenance. The manufacturer shall produce and provide
test equipment allowing to test and exchange ionization
type smoke detectors upto 7 m (23 ft) above floor level.
The detector shall connect to the control unit via a fully
supervised tow wire circuit.
 Specification:

Ambient Temperature 25 deg. C to + 80 deg. C

(13 deg. F to +176 deg F)
Relative Humidity Max 95% RH 30 days/year without
condensation.
Ambient air velocity Max 10 m /sec (33 ft/sec)
horizontal
Operating voltage 24 VDC nominal (16 to 26 V)
Operation category IP 43
(IEC 529)
Quiescent current draw 600 A Max.
Maximum Activity 0.9 micro curies
Sensitivity Threshold value (y) 0.9 typical

22.09 HEAT DETECTOR

Heat detector shall be combined rate of rise and fixed
temperature type. Heat detectors shall consist of two
independent thermistors, designed to automatically
compensate changes in ambient conditions. All electronic
circuits must be solid state devices and virtually
hermetically sealed to prevent their operation from being
impaired by dust dirt of humidity. All circuitry must be
protected against usual electrical transients and protected
against usual electrical transients and electromagnetic
interference. Reversed prolarity or faulty electromagnetic
interference. Reversed polarity or faulty zone wiring shall
not damage the detector. The detectors shall be installed
into the base by a simple push twist mechanism to
facilitate exchange for cleaning and maintenance. The
detector shall connect to the control unit via a fully
supervised two wire circuit. The manufacturer shall
produce and provide test equipment allowing to test and
exchange rate of rise / fixed temperature heat detectors up
to 7m (23 ft) above floor level.

Specification:

Ambient Temperature 25 deg. C to + 70 deg. C

(13 deg. F to +158 deg F)
Relative Humidity Max 95% RH 30 days/year.
Operation category IEC IP 43
Operating voltage 24 VDC nominal (16 to 26 V)
Quiescent current draw 150 A Max.
Current in alarm stage 100 m A max
Sensitivity
Operating fixed tem. Operating
 Rate of rise 57 degree C+1.5 deg. C, 2
deg.c/m
22.10 PLUG IN BASES
The smoke and heat detectors shall fit into a common type
of standard base. Once a bases has been installed, it shall
be possible to insert, remove and exchange different types
of detectors by a simple push twist movement. The
standard base shall be equipped with screw less wiring
terminals capable of securing wire sizes upto formation and
weakening of contact pressure. The standard base shall be
supplied with a sealing plate, preventing dirt, dust,
condensation or water from the conduit reaching the wire
terminals or the detector contact point. All standard bases
shall be supplied with a removable dust cover to protect
the contract area during installation and construction phase
of the building. It must allow the check out and verification
of the zone wiring before insertion of any detectors. The
standard base shall be feature a built in mechanism which
allows mechanical locking of as installed detector head,
thus preventing unauthorized removal or tempering while
maintaining.

The detector contact points shall be designed to retain the

detector safely and to ensure uninterrupted contact also when
exposed to continuous sever vibration. All electronic
components of base and modules must be solid state and
virtually hermetically sealed to prevent their operation from
being impaired by dust dirt or humidity. All circuitry must be
protected against usual electrical transients and
electromagnetic interference. Reversed polarity or faulty zone
wiring shall not damage the detector. The standard base shall
be allow snap on insertion of an (optinal) electronic module, it
shall be possible to turn a standard base part in to an
individually addressable detector base with its own unique
identification address at the control unit. The standard base
shall have a built in alarm indicator which is repeatable by
connecting a simple 2 core wire to the base. No changes in
the zone wiring shall be required to operate the additional
alarm indicator. Removal and insertion of dust covers or
detector shall be feasible by a simple push twist movement,
even if the locking device has been activates. Special base
assembles shall be available for use in air ducts and
aspiration air sampling system wherever required.

22.11 RESPONSE INDICATOR:

Wherever smoke / heat detectors are installed in rooms which
are normally closed it is a practice to install a response
indicator outside the room the enable the person concerned
to determine the spot of fire. The response indicators consist
of two LEDs which will lights up when an automatic heat /
smoke detector operates. There shall be a top red facie on
the top of the two LEDs. The enclosure of the response
indicator shall be of aluminium.
9.00 LIFT INSTALLATION

9.01 The scope of work shall cover design, supply delivery, installation, testing and
commissioning of passenger lifts/bed lifts. The scope of work shall also include
the following item of civil works.

a) Necessary scaffolding temporary barricade in the hoist way required during the
erection of the elevators.

b) Minor building work comprising of cutting holes and making good the car and
counterweight rail brackets, hall buttons and indicators including laying of sills in
position.

c) Steel items such as machine beams, bearing plates buffer support channels, sill
angles and fascia plates etc.

d) Suitable trap doors with steel chequered plate covers.

e) Providing and install a suitable vertical iron ladder for access to the pit.

f) Any other item required for successful completion and commissioning of lifts.
(including the hoisting beam in the machine room)

9.02The work shall be done in accordance with regulations of any local code and
following ISI codes which govern the requirements of installations.

IS: 1860-1980 code of practice for installation, operation and maintenance of

Electric Passenger and Goods Lifts.

IS: 3534-1976 Outline dimensions of Electric Lifts.

IS: 4666-1980 Specifications for Electric passenger and Goods Elevators.

Indian Electricity Act 1910.

Indian Electricity Rules, 1956.

Delhi Lifts Rules, 1942.

9.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND APPROVAL OF ELECTRICAL

INSTALLATIONS:

The selected tenderer shall prepare a furnish shop drawings for approval by The
Client, such shop drawings shall be based on the Architectural drawings and
requirements laid down in specifications, local laws and regulations etc.
 The detailed drawings shall be submitted within one month of placement of order.
The successful tenderer shall obtain the approval of electrical Inspector and other
local authorities as per requirements before submitting the drawings to Client/
Engineer. The contractor shall not proceed with in installation work till the
drawings are approved by the Engineer-in-Charge. Expenses incurred such as
license fee etc. towards obtaining the approval of Electrical Inspector, local
authority shall be reimbursed to the contractor as per actual on production of
documentary proof.
Approval of contractor's drawings shall not absolve the contractor of any of his
obligations to meet the requirements of specification under this contract
Five sets of completion drawings operation manual, maintenance manual, spare
parts details shall be submitted to the Client/ Engineer after completion of work.

9.04 GUARANTEE

The tenderer shall guarantee the equipment against all defects of materials and
workmanship for a period of one year from the date of commissioning of the
equipment as certified by the owner. Any defects arising during the guarantee
period shall be rectified and replaced by the tenderer, at his own expense, to the
satisfaction of the owner.

9.05 PERMITS, INSPECTION & LICENSE FEE

The contractor shall arrange all necessary local, provincial or national government
permit and shall make arrangements for inspection and tests required thereby.
Expenses to be borne by purchaser.

9.06 MAINTENANCE

After the completion of the installation and before handling over of each elevator
by the elevator contractor, maintenance service for the equipment furnished shall
be provided for a period of twelve (12) months. This service shall include regular
examination of the installation by trained employees, and shall include all
necessary adjustments, greasing oiling, cleaning supplies and genuine standard
parts to keep the equipment in proper operation, except any parts made necessary
by misuse, accident or neglect caused by other. Contractor shall provide 24 hours
Emergency local call back service facility and shall furnish full details of such
facilities available.

9.07 POWER SUPPLY

The apparatus shall be designed to operate on 415 + 5% Volts, 3 Phase, 4 wires,

50 Hz A.C. Supply for illumination signal equipment shall be 240 Volts + 5%
single phase 50Hz A.C.

9.08 ELECTRICAL WIRING

 The necessary A.C. supply of 3 Phase, 415 Volts 50 HZ shall be made available in
the main control switch unit to be provided by the contractor in the machine room.
All the electrical works beyond the main supply switch shall be carried out by the
contractor i.e. supply and installations of panels for drive motors, switches and
control complete with wiring as per system requirement and approval of the
Engineer.

The wiring shall be carried out strictly in accordance with Indian Electricity Rules
and Indian code of Practice for Electrical Wiring Installation IS-732-1963 System
Voltage not exceeding 650 V). For works not covered under any of the above
wiring rules, the 13th edition of Electrical Engineers (Condense) shall apply. The
cable and conduits to be used shall be of suitable size and grade conforming to
relevant IS specification. Wiring for LT switchboard to the motor terminal shall
be with heavy duty 1.1 KV grade PVC insulated PVC sheathed, FRLS aluminium
cable. All the trailing cables used for control and safety device shall conform to
IS: 4289-1967, Specifications for lifts cables. The trailing cable circuits for
controls, safety devices, lighting and signaling shall be separate and distinct.

Power wiring between controller and main board to various landings shall be
drawn in suitable size heavy gauge conduit stove enameled/painted conforming to
I.S specifications.

The Voltage and frequency of the supply shall be subjected to variations

permissible under Indian Electricity Acts and Rules.

9.09 PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS

9.09.1 TYPE : Bed Lifts/Passenger Lifts.

9.09.2 NO. OF ELEVATORS : As Per Bill of Quantities.

9.09.3 CAPACITY : As Per Bill of Quantities.

9.09.4 SPEED : As Per Bill of Quantities.

9.09.5 FLOORS SERVED/RISE : As Per Bill of Quantities.

9.09.6 STOP : As Per Bill of Quantities.

9.09.7 OPENINGS : (All Openings on same side).

As Per Bill of Quantities.
9.09.8 OPERATION : Duplex/Simplex Collective as per
BOQ.
9.09.9 CAR FRAME :

The car frame, which supports the car platform and enclosures, shall be made of
structural steel and equipped with suitable guides and a car safety device mounted
underneath the car platform. The hoist ropes shall include adjustable self/ aligning
hinges. Walls of lift enclosure shall have a fire rating of two hours.

The car shall be so mounted on the frame that vibration and noise transmitted to the
passenger is minimized.

9.09.10 CAR SAFETY AND GOVERNER :

Suitable car safety to stop the car whenever excessive descending speed is attained
shall be operated by a centrifugal speed governor connected to the governor through a
continuous steel rope.

The governor shall be provided with self tensioning device to keep governor rope in
proper tension even after rope stretch. Suitable means shall be supplied to cut off
power from the motor and apply the brake on application of the safety.

9.09.11 COUNTER BALANCE :

A Suitable guided structural steel frame with appropriate filler weights of cast iron
shall be furnished to promote smooth and economic operation.

9.09.12 TERMINAL AND FINAL LIMITS :

Terminal limit switches shall be provided to slow down and stop the car automatically
at the terminal landings within permissible over travel and final limit switches shall be
provided to automatically cut off the power and apply the brake, should the car travel
beyond the permissible over travel. They shall act independently of the operating
devices and buffers.

9.09.13 TERMINAL BUFFERS :

Heavy duty spring buffers shall be installed as a means of stopping the car and
counterweight at the extreme limits of travel. Buffers in the pit shall be mounted on
steel channels which shall extend between both the car and counterweight rails.
9.09.14 CONTROLLER :

A Controller shall be provided to control starting stopping and speed of the elevator
motor and also be automatically able to apply the brake if any of the safety devices
operate or if power fails from any cause. In case of power failure and again restore of
power the lift shall land to next floor and shall not go to basement/lowest level.
Suitable software/hardware or rescue device shall be provided.
9.09.15 REVERSE PHASE RELAY :
 A reverse phase relay shall be provided on the controller which is designed to protect
the lift equipment against phase reversal and phase failure.
9.09.16 GUIDES :

Machined steel tee guides shall be furnished for the car and counterweight. The guide
rails should be of steel solid and shall have tongued and grooved joints. Sliding clips
shall be used for fastening the guides to allow building settlement without distorting
the guide rails. To keep down the noise level and to reduce wear and tear of the
sections, only Nylon Ribs shall be used in the guide shoes, after smoothening of the
rails. The flanges shall be machined for the fish plate mounting such that rail
alignment at joints almost remains constant.
9.09.17 FOUNDATIONS :

The machine shall be placed directly above the hoist way upon the machine room slab
provided by the Owner.
9.09.18 ROPES :

The elevator shall be provided with traction steel ropes. Steel wire rope having a
tensile strength of not less that 12.5 Ton/cm2 of good flexibility shall be used for lift.
The lift rope shall conform to IS: 2365-1963.
9.09.19 MACHINE :

The machine shall be of the single wrap traction type and shall include a motor,
electromechanical brake, steel worm, bronze gear, steel sheave shaft and Farrow-
Molybdenum sheave all compactly mounted on a single base or bed plate. The worm
shaft shall be provided with ball bearings to take the end trust and roller bearings shall
be furnished for the sheave shaft to ensure alignment and ling bearing life. The
driving sheave shall be grooves to ensure sufficient traction and minimize rope wear.
Shall be provided for all bearings and the worm gear.
9.09.20 BRAKE :

The direct current brake shall be spring applied and electrically released and designed
to provide smooth stop under variable loads. The brake should be capable of
operation automatically by various safety devices, current failure, and by normal
stopping of car. It should be possible to release the brake manually, such releases
break manually, such releases requiring the permanent application of manual force so
as to move the lift car in short sties. For this purpose one set of brake release
equipment shall be supplied.
9.09.21 MOTOR :

The motor shall be suited to the service proposed and arranged for adequate
lubrication. The motor shall be class F insulation and one (1) hour rated squirrel cage
induction type having high starting torque. It shall also be provided with Thermisters
embedded in the stator windings for the highest degree of thermal motor protection.
9.09.22 CONTROL
 The control shall be variable voltage variable frequency A.C. variable voltage, closed
loop control system using solid state devices and electronic speed pattern generator to
command the motor from a velocity transducer and load compensation circuits for a
comfortable ride.

In Normal operation, the electromagnetic brake shall only be applied when the lift has
come to a complete standstill. The brake shall only be meant for holding the lift in
position at every landing, providing stopping without any jerking effect.

Each controller cabinet containing memory equipment shall be properly shielded from
the pollution.

MICROPROCESSOR

The control shall employ a microprocessor working on a program such that precision
leveling and highly efficient handling of passengers for least possible waiting and
reduced travel time is ensured. The microprocessor system should be designed to
accept programming with minimum downtime. It should be able to monitor the state
of input calls (such as car calls from COP and hall calls from hall fixtures) and output
commands such as starting, decelerating and stopping the elevator. It should be able
to generate floor location data, thereby, providing a reference position to establish the
safety zones for door opening and closing, and also to initiate leveling slowdown.
9.09.23 DUPLEX COLLECTIVE OPERATION
The operation shall be duplex collective with/without attendant for each elevator and
shall consist of the following:-
IN THE CAR

There shall be furnished a flush type attractively finished stainless steel panel which
contains a series of luminous Braille buttons numbered to correspond to the landings
served, an emergency stop switch and an emergency call button connected to a
bell which serves as an emergency signal.

AT HOISTWAY LANDINGS

There shall be provided an UP luminous Braille push button and a DOWN luminous
Braille push button at each intermediate landing and a single button at the terminal
landings.

The car shall not start unless the door is in the closed position and all hoist way doors
are closed in the locked position.

If the car is idle and one or more car or landing buttons above the landing at which the
car is standing are pressed, the car shall start in the UP direction and proceed to the
highest landing for which any button is pressed and stops at intermediate landing for
which a car button or up landing button is pressed sufficiently in advance of the car's
arrival at such landings to permit these stops to be made. After each stop, the car
 shall proceed in the UP direction until it reaches the highest landing for which a call is
registered. The car shall not stop on the UP trip at any landing in response to a
DOWN call.

Similarly, if the car is idle and one or more car or landing buttons below the landing at
which the car is standing are pressed, the car shall start in the DOWN direction,
proceed to the lowest landing for which any button is pressed and stop at each
intermediate landing for which a car button is pressed.

When the car is idle and a button for a landing above the car and a landing below the
car are pressed, the car shall start towards the landing corresponding to the button
pressed first. The call registered for the landing in the opposite direction from the car
shall be answered after the car has responded to the farthest call in the direction
established by the button pressed first.
A time relay shall hold the car for an adjustable interval of few seconds at the
landings at which stops are made to enable passengers to enter or leave the car.

OPERATION WITH AN ATTENDANT

The regular car operating panel shall include buttons, switches, etc. for the collective-
automatic control and shall also include.

A two-position key-operated switch marked to indicate ATT (attendant operation)

A buzzer: UP and DOWN direction light jewels and A non-stop button.

A car operating panel shall also include an UP and DOWN button.

When the key-switch is in the position of WITH ATTENDANT, the direction light
and buzzer shall become operative and the UP and DOWN direction button in the
regular car operating panel shall be made effective for the attendant operation.
When an attendant operation, the car and hoist way doors shall open automatically at
each stop but the closing of the doors shall be subject to the UP or DOWN
direction buttons. As a visual signal to the attendant, the UP and DOWN direction
jewel shall illuminate upon registration of either car or landing calls to indicate the
direction of the travel of the car. The attendant shall operate the elevator normally in
the direction indicated by the direction jewel but, if desired, opposite direction travel
may be realized by pressure of a car button for a landing in that direction from the car.
The pressure of a direction button shall cause the doors to close and the car to start in
the direction desired, provided a call is registered for that direction. If pressure of the
direction button is released before the car starts, the doors will re-open and car shall
not travel. It shall so arrange the pressure on direction button can be released, once
the car has started.
Continuous pressure of the nonstop button shall cause the car to by-pass all landing
calls and respond only to registered car calls.
9. 09. 24 CAR ENCLOSURES :
 The car enclosures shall be of sheet steel and shall be of an elegant design comprising
of the following:
a) Suspended ceiling with light diffuser Perspex ceiling and fluorescent light.

b) Concealed pressure fan with grille in suspended ceiling. The lift shall have
sensor so that the fan is operation only when if there is at least one person
inside the lift.
c) Ceiling steel painted white.
d) Complete stainless steel car enclosure in plain finish for passenger and
Bed Lifts

e) PVC flooring (with 3mm thick tiles of approved shade) for Bed Lifts

f) Mirror on one face (front face when we enter the car)

9.09.25 CAR DOOR

The car entrance shall be provided with stainless steel sliding doors in plain finish
giving a clear opening of 1200mm wide by 2000mm high for bed lift with car
door lock. The lift car door shall have a fire resistance rating of one hour.

9.09.26 HOISTWAY DOORS :

At each landing, a center opening, stainless steel sliding door in plain finish giving
a clear opening 1200mm wide by 2000mm high for bed lift, shall be provided.
The doors should have a fire resistance of not less than one hour.

9.09.27 SIGNAL AND OPERATIVE FIXTURES:

The following signal and operative fixtures shall be provided for each lift in
stainless steel face plates except in fireman's switch which shall have a glass face
plate.

a) CAR OPERATING PANEL

There shall be one (1) No. panel in car, with hinged stainless steel face plate and
shall comprise illuminated floor buttons, door open and emergency stop controls
emergency call buttons, door open and emergency stop controls emergency call
button, two position key operated switch, a Buzzer, UP and DOWN direction light
panels, a non stop button, and an integral interphone. The jewels and accentuator
shall be of modular construction, face plate mounted, rewired using snap on lugs.

b) HALL BUTTONS AND HALL POSITION INDICATOR

There shall be provided combined signal fixture (one riser) of compact design and
of attractive hairline stainless steel face plate at the elevator entrance on each floor
which for terminal landings shall have a single luminous push button and for
intermediate landings shall have an UP luminous push button and a DOWN
 luminous push button. The jewels shall be of modular construction mounted on a
stainless steel face plate. Whenever a button is pressed, the jewel shall light up to
indicate registration of the call and shall remain enlighted till the car arrives.

c) CAR POSITION INDICATOR IN CAR

This shall be of compact design and of attractive hairline finish stainless steel face
plate with easy to read digital display of the floors, indicating through which floor
the elevator is passing or on which floor the elevator is stopped. This shall also
incorporate illuminated arrows showing the direction of travel.

d) BATTERY OPERATED ALARM BELL AND EMERGENCY LIGHT

A solid state siren type alarm unit operated by 2 Nos. 9 volt rechargeable Nickel
Cadmium batteries shall be provided which shall give a waxing and waning siren
when alarm bell in the car is pressed momentarily.
An emergency light unit using a 9 volt dry battery power pack and incandescent
lamp with stainless steel face plate shall be provided inside the car which shall
operate automatically in the case of power failure.
e) OVERLOAD WARNING

Overload warning radars with audio-visual indication (visual indication shall

show OVERLOADED) with stainless steel face plate shall be installed in the
elevator car, so that when there is overload in the car the sign shall light up a flash
indicating OVERLOADED and a buzzer shall operate during this period and the
doors shall remain open unit the overload is removed.
f) FIREMAN'S SWITCH (Two phase)

A toggle switch covered by a glass cover shall be provided on the ground floor for
each elevator which shall permit a fireman to call the elevator to the ground floor
by canceling all car and landing calls. The elevator shall then stop at the ground
floor with the door open to permit the fireman to have exclusive use of the
elevator without any interference from the landing calls.
g) INTERPHONE

Interphone shall have one master unit in each machine room, one master unit on
the ground floor for each 1 (outside hoist way) and one slave unit in each elevator
car.

9.09.28 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATOR FOR CAR DOOR AND HOISTWAY

DOOR

An electric door operator for opening and closing the car door shall b e provided.
The opening of a car and hoist way doors shall be such that the doors shall start
opening meant for so that by the time the elevator stops completely, the elevator
and hoist way doors shall be fully open.
 The equipment shall consist of a machine on the elevator car operating the car
door when the car is stopping at a landing.

The car door and hoist way door shall be mechanically connected and shall move
s imultaneously in opening and closing.
The car and hoist way doors shall be power opened and closed and shall be
checked in opening and closing with an oil cushioning mechanism built into the
gear unit.

Each hoist way door shall be provided with an interlock which will prevent
movement of the car away from the landing unit.
The doors are closed in the closed position as defined in the ISI codes.
An electric contact for the car door shall be provided which shall prevent car
movement from the landing unless the door is in the closed position as defined in
the ISI codes. The locking arrangement shall be so designed that the electrical
circuit cannot be completed unless the doors are in the closed position and
mechanical latching is effected.
Necessary switches shall be provided in the elevator machine room to control the
operation of the doors.
The car and hoist way, doors shall open automatically as the car is stopping at a
landing. The closing of the car and hoist way door must occur before the car can
be started. Doors can be stopped and reversed during their closing motion.
9. 09.29 DOOR HANGER AND TRACKS :

For the car and each landing door, sheave type two point suspension hangers
complete with tracks shall be provided. Means shall be provided to prevent the
door from jumping off the track and for vertical and literal adjustment of doors.

Sheaves and rollers shall be of steel and shall include shielded ball bearing to
retain grease lubrication. Adjustable ball bearings rollers shall be provided to take
the upward thrust of the doors. Tracks shall be of suitable steel section with
smooth surface. The locking of the two leaf parting type doors should be positive.
9. 09.30 SAFETY SHOE :

A safety shoe (one on each door panel) shall extent to the full height of and
project beyond the front edge of the car door.
Should this shoe touch a person or an object while the car door is closing, the car
and hoist way doors shall return to the open position. The doors shall remain open
until the expiration of a pre-determined interval and then close automatically.
9.09.31 LANDING ENTRANCE MATERIAL'S :

These shall consist of headers, extruded aluminium sills and strut angles.

9.09.32 WIRING :
 Complete wiring in the equipment.

9.09.33 AUTOMATIC RESCUE DEVICE:

Automatic Rescue Device to be provided for all the lifts with battery backup so
that it can land to the nearest level in case of power failure. Automatic Rescue
Device shall have suitable battery backup so that it can operate minimum 20 times
in 8 hours duration.
SPECIFICATIONS
HVAC WORK
SYSTEM DESIGN DATA

1.0 GENERAL

The system design, basis of design, estimated requirements and other

relevant data are outlined in this section.

2.0 LOCATION

The proposed 100 beded Hospital at Punjab.

3.0 SCOPE OF WORK

3.1 The work proposed under this tender includes supply,

installation, testing & commissioning of independent central air-
conditioning systems for the proposed hospital as detailed in the
technical specifications and schedule of prices.

4.0 BASIS OF DESIGN

4.1 Assumptions

Following assumptions have been made for calculation of air-

conditioning cooling load :

a) Fresh air : As per attached Table

b) Window glazing : Single pane glass

c) Lighting load : 2W/ Sq. ft

d) Occupancy : As per attached table

e) Equipment load : As per attached Table

f) Roof Insulation The exposed roof of air-conditioned areas

shall be insulated with 50 mm thick expanded polystyrene or
equivalent insulation by other agencies.

All NON AC areas in corridors and lobbies

where ducts are crossing/return being taken to have 50 mm thick
insulated boxing.

g) Electrical power supply : 415v/3ph/50Hz, AC power supply

i) Humidity control : 1) Considered in OTs only.

4.2 OUTSIDE AMBIENT CONDITIONS

____________________________________________________
____________
Outside Ambient Conditions:
____________________________________________________
__
Season Dry Bulb temp Wet Bulb
temp.

____________________________________________________
__

SUMMER: 110 deg F DB 75 deg F WB

MONSOON: 95 deg F DB 80 deg F WB

WINTER: 45 deg F DB 41 deg F WB

____________________________________________________
__
4.3 INSIDE CONDITIONS

INSIDE DESIGN CONSITIONS

Min total Minimum

Area/ Design Relative air fresh air
S.No
Room temp Humidity change changes
per hour per hour
Surgery &
critical
care
Operating
1 22+1 55+5% 25 5
rooms
Sterile
2 22+1 55+5% 6 2
corridor

Balance 2
24+2 55+5% 6
areas

5.0 ESTIMATED LOAD

On the basis of data given above, the estimated load for the air
conditioning system comes out 82 TR.

Tenderers shall work out the heat loads on their own and satisfy
themselves that the plant specified in this tender shall be able to
maintain the inside conditions as per specification)To cater to the
above load, the air conditioning system proposed is as follows:

6.0 System Design

The total peak load comes out to 82 TR. After applying a diversity of
0.9 (since external and internal loads do not peak at the same time),
the load works out to be 73.8 TR. For this requirement 3 Nos. 40 TR
scroll chillers are proposed .Out of these two chillers shall be working
and third shall be standby.

System Design Description

It is proposed to provide a central air conditioning system to maintain

the specified inside design conditions during summer & monsoon for
the proposed building.
Water chilling machines shall work in conjunction with 3 Nos. chilled
water pumps (2 W plus 1S), 3 Nos condenser water pumps ( 2 W+1S)
. The plant shall be located in Ground Floor and shall be water cooled.
Chilled water produced shall be pumped to various air handling units/
Fan coil units. Chilled water shall be pumped through insulated chilled
water pipes installed in ceiling spaces and in vertical risers installed in
pipe shafts. At each air handling units balancing valves are provided
for balancing.
Electric type hot water generators shall be provided for provision for
monsoon reheat / winter heating if required( 2 Nos. 50 kw).
6.5 The main electrical panel , distribution board & chilled water/
condenser water pumps will be located in the plant room.

6.7 All the AHU’s on respective floors shall be connected with chilled
water pipes coming from the water chilling machines.

6.8 For fire safety motorised fire dampers with electrical actuators
interlocked with the air blowers shall be provided in supply and return
air paths. All materials used for insulation shall be fire proof type. The
air handling units motors shall also be interlocked with the central fire
alarm system such that in case of detection of smoke or fire by the fire
alarm system, the air handling units shall automatically shut off.
6.9 A central control console shall be provided with indication lamps
and push buttons for remote start/stop of the equipment.

6.10 The The main areas of the hospital complex are as under :
A OTs
B ICUs, Post operative etc.
C ADMINISTRATION AREAS
The system adopted for the air-conditioning of OTs shall be:

operation theatres
All operation theatres shall have independent air handling unit to
prevent cross contamination.
All OTs shall be designed for recirculatory system with 5 air changes
fresh air .
The laminar flow air distribution system shall be followed. Air shall be
supplied from ceiling level to flow unidirectionally upto the operation
table. The return air shall be collected from four corners of the room
to prevent the contamination from recirculation in space.
Both supply and return air shall be ducted.
Three level filteration shall be adopted with prefilters, fine filters and
hepa filters of following filteration efficiency :
Hepa Filters 99.97% down to o.3 µ
Fine Filters 99% down to 5 µ
Pre Filters 90% down to 10 µ
All these filters shall be with aluminium frame to prevent formation of
bacterial colonies. Epoxy resin shall be used to seal filter media with
the framework .
OTs shall be maintained at positive pressure by supplying about 15%
more air than return air to prevent any contamination from entering
OT space.
AHUs with hepa filters shall be designed for high static pressure to
over come high pressure drops

7. GENERAL DESIGN GUIDELINES

Design parameters for selection of air handling units and its

components shall be: -

Maximum face velocity across prefilters 150M/MIN

Maximum face velocity across Microvee 100M/MIN

Maximum face velocity across cooling coil 150 M/MIN

Maximum face velocity across Heating coil 200 M/MIN

Maximum fan outlet velocity 600 M/MIN

Maximum fan motor speed 1450 RPM

CHW piping shall be sized for following design parameters

Maximum flow velocity 2.5 M/SEC

Design parameters for duct design shall be

Maximum flow velocity 450M/MIN

Maximum friction 1CM WG/100M

Maximum velocity at supply air outlet 150 M/MIN

8.0 Items to be provided by other Agencies to AC contractor:

8.1 Civil works such as trenches for piping, cables and making
foundations of equipments.

8.2 Construction of AC plant rooms, AHU rooms etc.

8.3 Main 3 ph, 415 v, 50 hz, A.C. supply power supply upto main
Electrical Distribution Panel in A/C plant room.
8.4 Soft filtered water supply upto each cooling tower and expansion
tank etc.

8.5 Make up water tanks for soft water.

8.6 Drain trap in plant room and AHU rooms.

8.7 Any kind of false ceiling, boxing etc and insulation of boxing in
NON Ac areas.

8.8 Making frames for fixing grilles & diffusers in false ceiling, boxing
or in walls.

9.0 Drawings:

The drawings forming part of these specifications provide a feasible

scheme for locating the equipment. The contractor may re-arrange the
equipment for improving the layout and meeting the site conditions. All
such changes shall however be subject to the architect’s approval.
These drawings are not meant to be working drawings which shall be
prepared by the contractor or as required.
10.0 Test Data :

The complete HVAC system shall be tested as per the specifications

given elsewhere and complete test data shall be furnished on
prescribed data sheets:

11.0 Technical Data :

The contractor shall furnish complete technical data, on the

equipment offered as required under the heading `Technical data'. In
this specification every effort has been taken to put forth only general
specifications of various equipments/ material. If inadvertently, any of
the specification drawn happens to match with the specifications of any
one particular firm’s product only, in respect of critical parameters,
than it will not automatically mean that this particular firm’s offer is
only technically suitable. In general, the specifications offered by other
firms will be assessed in their own entirety to ascertain whether or not
the broad functions in general expected of the requirements are
available with reasonable tolerance on the desired requirements of the
client and accordingly the offers would be considered based on prudent
assessment and sole discretion of the Engineer.

12.0 Performance Guarantee :

12.1 The contractor shall guarantee that the air-conditioning plant and
system shall maintain the desired inside temperature within +/- 2 %
tolerance.

12.2 The contractor shall guarantee that the capacity of various

components as well as the whole system shall not be less than
specified.

12.3 The contractor shall ensure that the system shall be free of
vibrations and disturbing sounds.

13.0 Foreign Exchange

The contractor shall make his own arrangements to procure the

necessary, specified equipments, controls for which no foreign
exchange shall be made available.
 WATERCOOLED PACKAGED LIQUID SCROLL CHILLERS

1. SCOPE

Scope of this sub-section comprises the supply, erection, testing

and commissioning of water- cooled hermetic scroll compressor driven
chilling machines confirming to these specifications and in accordance
with the technical ‘schedule of equipment’ and ‘bill of quantities’.

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The scroll chillers shall have and actual operating capacity as

required in the specifications. The tenderer shall clearly indicate the
MAKE/MODEL/ACTUAL capacity of the units under actual working
conditions and also enclose the manufacturer’s literature and clearly
mark the models of the units and complete selection data.

3. CONDENSER

The condenser coil shall be water-cooled type with high efficiency

inner grooved copper tubes. The copper tubes shall not be less than
3/8” O.D.

4. COMPERESSOR

The unit will be provided with multiple hermetic scroll

compressors suitable for 415 + 10% volts, 3 phase, 50 HZ.

5. REFRIGERANT PIPING

The unit shall consist of multiple independent refrigerant circuits.

Necessary accessories shall be incorporated in the circuit. The cooler
and suction lines shall be insulated with polyethylene foam insulation.

6. CONTROL CENTRE

The control centre shall high and low pressure cutout & mini
circuit breaker for each compressor. The fan motors shall also be
protected by overload protectors and mini circuit breakers. The panel
shall also contain cycling thermostats for chilled water temperature
control, antifreeze thermostats, interconnecting control wiring pressure
gages and indicator lights.

7. INSTALLATION
 The proposed location of the chilling machines are as shown in
the tender drawings are tentative. Actual location will be decided in
consultation with the architect. The installation shall be carried out in
accordance with the best engineering practices to the complete
satisfaction of the consultant to ensure installation free vibration and
noise considered objectionable.

8. TESTING

The actual refrigeration capacity of the unit as tested at site shall

not be below the capacity under the specific conditions as contained in
the manufacturers’ literature forming a part of the contract – but in no
case less than the capacity specified in the tender.

9. PAINTING

The AC contractor shall be responsible to restore the equipment

to original condition in case of any scratches or damages to the
equipment up to the of the handing over the same to the owner.

10. TECHNICAL DATA TO ACCOMPANY BIDS

Tendered shall submit with tender complete technical data for

selection of various components supported by the relevant literature
 AIR COOLED SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER

1 SCOPE

Scope of this sub-section comprises the supply, erection, testing and

commissioning of Aircooled split airconditioners confirming to these
specifications and in accordance with the technical 'schedule of
equipment' and 'bill of quantities'.

2. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The split type airconditioners shall have an actual operating

capacity as required in the specifications. The tenderer shall clearly
indicate the MAKE/MODEL/ACTUAL capacity of the units under actual
working conditions and also enclose the manufacturer' literature and
clearly mark the models of the units and complete selection data.

3. CONDENSING UNITS

The condensing unit will be provided with single or two serviceable

hermetically sealed compressors suitable for 415 ± 10% volts, 3 phase,
50 HZ. The unit will be capable of providing the specified design
minimum refrigeration capacity at design ambient conditions, without
the help of any addition of water. The unit should be suitable for
location in the open exposed roof outside weather without any
damage/rust in the casing and other parts.

The compressor shall be hermetic, with enclosed gas cooled motor.

The compressor's shall be suitable for R-22.

The condenser coil shall be air cooled type with aluminium fins and
copper tubes and necessary refrigerant connections. The copper tubes
shall not be less than 1/2" O.D.

The condenser air fan(s) shall be propeller type direct driven, each
complete with motor. The air quantity and area of the condenser shall
be adequate for working in the specified outdoor conditions.

The casing shall be fabricated from galvanised steel, zinc phosphated

and finished with baked enamel paint. The casing shall make the
whole unit fully weather proof, suitable for outdoor installation.

The necessary change of refrigerant gas and lubricated oil shall be

provided to run the system.

4. EVAPORATIVE UNIT
 The evaporative unit shall be as specified in Technical
Schedule of
Equipment complete with cooling coil of adequate size, synthetic fibre
cleanable filters minimum 25 mm thick with face velocity not
exceeding 106 mpm, centrifugal blower. the casing shall be heavy
gauge sheet smoothly finished and fully protected against rusting.

5. REFRIGERANT PIPING

The condensing unit and evaporator unit shall be interconnected by

type '1' seamless copper refrigerant liquid and suction lines using
flared or brazed fittings. Necessary accessories shall be incorporated
in the circuit.
The suction line shall be insulated with 6 mm rubber foam insulation.

6. MISCELLANEOUS

The unit shall have control panel, housing the starting switches,
contactor, relays etc.
Isolation pads shall be provided under the units.

Drain line shall be provided from a coil upto drain trap.

Suitable M.S. angle iron supporting frame shall be provided for the
condensing unit and supporting arrangement for the indoor units.

Interconnecting power and control cabling shall be provided between

condensing unit and evaporator unit

7. INSTALLATION

The proposed location of the condensing units and the evaporative

units as shown in the tender drawings are tentative. Actual location
will be decided in consultation with the architect and the refrigerant
piping of lengths as required will be provided by AC contractor within
the quoted price. The installation shall be carried out in accordance
with the best engineering practices to the complete satisfaction of the
consultant to ensure proper return, and installation free from vibration
and noise considered objectionable. Apart from other operational and
safety controls provision will be made for manual reset with HP/LP cut
out and for non-recycling control relay.

8 TESTING

The actual refrigeration capacity of the evaporative unit as tested at

site shall not be below the capacity under the specific conditions as
contained in the manufacturers literature forming a part of the contract
- but in no case less than the capacity specified in the tender.

9. PAINTING

The AC contractor shall be responsible to restore the equipment to

original condition in case of any scratches or damages to the
equipment upto the time of the handing over the same to the owner.

10. TECHNICAL DATA TO ACCOMPANY BIDS

Tenderer shall submit with tender complete technical data for selection
of various components supported by the relevant literature.
AIR HANDLING UNITS

1. General :
The air handling system shall be complete in all respects
and shall generally comply
with the specifications as given in the following
paragraphs.

2. Air Handling Units : (Double skin type)

The air handling units shall be double skin fully enclosed

construction draw-thru type and shall include fan section, coil section.
Filter section with filters, coil section etc.

2.1 Fan Section

Fan shall be centrifugal with backward inclined blades. Fan

casing shall be made of galvanised steel sheet. Fan wheels shall be
made of galvanised steel. Fan shaft shall be ground C40 carbon steel
and supported in pre-greased ball bearings operating less than 75%
of first critical speed. Fan wheels and pulleys shall be individually
tested and precision balanced dynamically. The fan shall be selected
for a fan speed not exceeding 1000 rpm for fan dia of more than 350
mm and fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 1800 fpm. The fan
outlet shall be connected with casing with the help of fire retardent
canvas.

2.2 Coil Section

The cooling coil shall be of seamless copper tubes, not less than
0.44 mm thick and 12 mm dia with aluminium fins firmly bonded to
copper tubes assembled in zinc coated steel frame. Face and surface
areas shall be such as to ensure rated capacity from each unit and
such that the air velocity across the coil shall not exceed 150 MPM. The
coil shall be pitched in the unit casing for proper drainage. The fins
shall be spaced by collars forming integral part of the fins. The tubes
shall be staggered in the direction of air flow. The fins shall be
uniformly bonded to the tubes by hydraulic mechanical expansion of
the tubes. Fin spacing shall not exceed 5fins per cm. The coiling coil
assembly shall be on aluminium rails and nylon rollers for easy
withdrawl from either side.

The coils shall be tested against leaks at 21 kg/sq.cm air

pressure under water.. This pressure shall be maintained for a period
of at least 2 hours. No drop should be observed indicating any leaks.

The water headers shall be of heavy class pipes, to connect all

the tubes. The headers shall be complete with water in/out
connections, vent plug on top and drain at the bottom, and designed
to provide water velocity between 0.6 to 1.8 m/s (2 to 6 fps).

2.3 Filter

Each unit shall be provided with a factory assembled filter

sections containing washable synthetic type air filters. Filter framework
shall be duly sealed and constructed from aluminium alloy. The media
shall be supported with hdp mesh on one side and aluminium frame
mesh on other side. Filters face velocity shall not exceed 500 fpm.
Filters shall fit so as to prevent by pass. Holding frames shall be
provided for installing a number of filters cells in bank. These cells shall
be held within the frames by sliding the cells between guiding
channels.

2.4 Housing/ Casing

The housing /casing of the air handling unit shall be of

double skin panels, sandwitched type with polyurethane foam
insulation of 25 mm thickness ( over all ). The housing shall be so
made that it can be delivered at site in the total/ semi knock down
conditions depending upon the location. The frame work shall be of
extruded aluminium hollow section duly powder coat painted/
anodized. All the frame shall be assembled using mechanical joints to
make a sturdy & strong frame work for various sections.

The outer sheet of panel shall be of made of galvanised

pre-plasticised sheet/powder coated CRC sheet of 0.80 mm thickness,
and inner sheet of 0.63 mm thick GSS. These panels shall be bolted
from inside on the frame with soft rubber gasket in between to make
the joints air tight.
 Frame work for each section shall be bolted together with
soft rubber gasket in between to make the joints air tight, suitable
doors with chrome plated hinges and latches shall be provided for
access to various panels for maintenance. The entire housing shall be
mounted on steel channel frame work.

Units shall have hinged, quick operating access door in the

fan section etc. The access doors shall also be double skin type similar
to the casing.

Drain pan shall be constructed of 18 gauge aluminium

sheet with necessary slope to facilitate fast removal of condensate. It
shall be isolated from the bottom floor panels through 12 mm thick
kinny foam insulation or equivalent.

2.5 Fan Motor and Starter

The totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage fan motor

shall have a minimum rating as given under "Schedule of Equipments
and the starter rating shall match the motor rating and both control
panel shall conform to the specifications under "Motors and
Switchgears". Drive to fan shall be provided through belt-drive
arrangement. Belts shall be of oil resistant type.

2.6 Controls

Each air handling unit shall be provided with a modulating

valve motor and modulating thermostat, conforming to specifications
under "Controls".

2.7 Fresh Air Controls

An adjustable manual damper of aluminium sheet along

with bird screen air inlet louvers shall be provided for fresh
air entry.

2.8 Accessories

Each air handling unit shall be complete with: -

Stem type thermometer at coil inlet and outlet. (Included

in AHU’s)

Pressure gauges with cocks at inlet and outlet of the coil. (

Included in AHU’s)
 Balancing valve at coil outlet and butterfly valves at coil
inlet & outlet. (priced seperately)

Drain line from unit to drain trap. (priced seperately)

Flexible connection between fan outlet and duct.

Vibration isolators of high efficiency.

2.9 Testing

Air handling units shall be tested to measure air quantity

and coil performance by measuring temperature difference and then
calculating capacity by using the above measurements.

2.10 Limitations

The air velocity across the cooling coil shall not exceed 500
fpm.

The fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 1800 fpm

The air velocity across the filters shall not exceed 500 fpm.

3. Air Handling Units : (Ductable/Unitary Type)

The unitary type air handling unit shall be compact, Double

Skin,self contained and shall consist of blower assembly, cooling coil,
air filter, drive and motor all enclosed in an attractive sheet steel
housing.

The blower assembly shall consist of forward curved,

double inlet, double width impeller, blower housing of mild steel with
smooth air inlet volutes, self aligning bearing block and supports for
mounting the bearing on the blower housing.

The cooling or heating coil shall be of seamless copper

tubes not less than 12 mm o.d. and 0.44 mm thickness. The coil shall
have continuous aluminium plate fins. The fins shall be spaced by
collars forming a integral part of the fins. The tube shall be staggered
in the direction of air flow. The coil circuit should be sized for adequate
water velocity but not exceeding 1.8 m/s (6 F.P.S.). The fins shall be
uniformly bonded to the tubes by hydraulic expansion of the tubes.
The water headers shall be of copper pipers to connect all the tubes.
The header shall be complete with water in/out connection vent plug
on top and drain at the bottom.

The air filter shall be of metallic viscous type with a

minimum depth of 50 mm. The air filter shall consist of 24 gauge wire
mesh in at least five layers with outer casing of 20 G m.s. sheet
formed into channels. Both side of filter shall have expanded metal
screens.

The fan motor shall be squirrel cage totally enclosed fan

cooled type with suitable starter conforming to specification under
"Motor and Switchgears".

The fan drive shall consist of grooved motor pulley, blower

pulley and v belt, along with adjustable mounting for the motor.

All the above components shall be housed in a G.I. sheet

steel housing made of 1.2 mm (20 G) sheets, suitably reinforced to
provide rigidity. Access panel to coil and fan areas shall be hinged for
ease of maintenance.
3.1 Controls

Each unitary unit shall be provided with a heating/cooling

snap acting thermostat and a 3 way water solenoid valve, conforming
to specifications (wherever given in schedule of prices).

3.2 Fresh Air Control

An adjustable manual damper of aluminium sheet along

with a bird screen on the outside wall shall be fixed in the opening
provided for this purpose in the air handling unit room.

3.3 Accessories

Each air handling unit shall be complete with

One stem type thermometer for coil inlet and outlets, with
tubing and gauge cocks. ( Included in AHU’s)

One pressure gauge with cock for inlets and outlets of the
coil, with tubling and gauge cocks. (Included in AHU’s )

Balancing valve at coil outlet and butterfly valves at coil

inlet & outlet (priced separately)

Drain line from unit to drain trap (priced separately)

 Flexible connection between fan outlet and duct.

Vibration isolators of at least high efficiency.

3.4 Testing:

The air handling unit shall be tested to measure air

quantity and coil performance by measuring temperature difference,
water pressure drop across coil and then calculating the capacity by
using the above measurements.

3.5. Limitations:

The air velocity across the cooling coil shall not exceed 500
FPM.
The fan outlet velocity shall not exceed 1800 FPM.
The air velocity across the filters shall not exceed 500 fpm.
 FILTERS

1.0 General

This section covers the general requirements for special

type of filters to be installed in air moving equipment or air ducts.

2.0 Prefilters (fabric type)

Synthetic fibre Pre-filters shall be in light weight aluminium

framed with non woven synthetic fibre replaceable media. The filter
shall have an efficiency of 90 percent down to 10 microns particles size
when tested as per B.S.2831 standards. The filter frame shall be of
aluminium and shall be suitable for mounting in Air handling units or
ducts as required at site. The velocity across the face of the filter shall
not exceed 500 FPM and the pressure drop across the filter shall not
exceed 4mm. The filters shall be suitable for operation under 100
percent relative humidity and 120 deg. C temperature conditions.

3.0 Microvee filters (fine filters)

Microvee filters shall be of dry type. Filters media shall be

made from washable nonwoven synthetic fibre replaceable media
reinforced with HDPE cloth & Aluminum mesh, specially treated with
antifungal and bactericidal agents to prevent growth of micro
organisms. The filter media shall be treated to permit washing with
water several times before discharged. The media shall be properly
supported and spaced so that air flow through the filter is uniform. The
filter shall be housed in aluminium frame work. Filters shall be
designed to remove particle down to 5 micron size and with efficiently
of 98.0 percent tested as per BS 2831 using Test Dust II. The filters
shall be installed in the air handling units after the chilled water coils.
They shall be capable of being replaced or removed for servicing
without the use of special tools.
 HEATING SYSTEM

1. General:

The electric heating system and hot water heating system

shall comply with the specifications as laid down.

Hot Water Generator

1.1 Hot water generator shall be the electric water heater

consisting of a vertical tubular shell, closed to both the ends with
bolted end covers. The shell shall be fabricated from M.S. sheet and
joints shall be welded. It shall be mounted on a rigid chain iron tripod
stand. A drain shall be provided at the lower and outlet and inlet
connections with flanges shall be on upper end lower side. Connections
for safety wall and controls shall be provided on the top. A required no.
of sockets for heater elements shall be provided. The construction shall
conform to the indian standards/international standards. It shall be
designed for a working pressure of 21 Kg/cm2 and tested accordingly.

1.2 Sheathed tabular electric resistance type heater elements

shall be used and connected for equal loading.

1.3 The heater shall be connected in a manner to provide

capacity control as under:
Upto 100 KW - 2 Steps
101 KW to 300 KW - 3 Steps
301 KW to 600 KW - 4 Steps

Upto 2 sets, a remote bulb 2 step thermostat shall be used

in conjunction with contactors of same size and fire 3 or more steps. A
modulating type thermostat, modulation motor and step controller
shall be used.

1.4 The electric water heater shall be equipped with a safety

thermostat to cut off the power in case the temperature of water
exceeds the normal limits. A safety valve shall be provided on the top
of the heater and the outlet of the same be piped out of the plant
room. The drain shall be connected to the nearest drain point. Stem
type thermometer & pressure gauge at inlet & outlet of the boiler shall
be provided.

1.5 The electric heater shall be insulated with 50 mm thick

resin bonded fibre glass or equivalent material. The thermal
conductivity of the insulating material shall not exceed 0.03 Kcal. per
m/hr. at 10 deg. C mean temperature and density shall not be less
than 24 Kg/Cum for fibre glass and 48 Kg/Cum for mineral wool. The
insulation shall be cladded with 1 mm thick aluminium sheet.

1.6 The electric hot water heater shall be installed as per the
manufacturer’s instruction and as shown on drawings.
 WATER CIRCULATION EQUIPMENTS

1. GENERAL:

The various items of the water circulating system shall be

complete in all respects and comply with the specification given below.

2. COOLING TOWER : (FRP Construction)

The cooling towers shall be of frp, vertical induced
draft, cross / counter flow type complete with frp basins, frp body, fan
and motor assembly geared speed reducer,fill media, distribution
pipes, etc.

2.1 General Construction

2.1.1 The body structural columns shall be made of frp (fibre

glass reinforced polyester). The surface on both inside and outside
shall be smooth, for minimum air resistance. The fan cylinder shall
form an integral part of the body. The structural strength of
the body shall be sufficient to withstand wind velocities upto 60
m/sec. vibrations and earthquakes.

2.1.2 The water basin, shall also be of f.r.p. the basin shall be
complete with connections for drain, overflow, makeup water, quickfill
and float valve, plus hot dipped galvanized suction strainer.

2.1.3 Mechanical equipment supports, all steel components and

tower assembly hardware shall be capable of with standing corrosion.

2.1.4 The support structure for the tower shall be of mild steel
duly hot dipped galvanized.

2.1.5 The water diffusion deck shall be of rigid pvc fill in

honeycomb design, arranged in a suitable pattern for ease of
replacement, complete with louvres and drift eliminators.

2.2 The colour of the cooling tower body shall be of the

Engineer in charge choice.

2.3 Fan Assembly

2.3.1 The fan shall be propeller type with cast aluminium

multiple blades of aerofoil design and adjustable pitch. The fan
assembly shall be statically balanced. the fan outlet velocity shall not
be less than 10 m/s and the tip speed shall be below 4500 m/minutes.
 2.3.2 The fan shall be directly mounted on the motor or
through speed reduction gears. In the latter case, the housing
shall be of heavy cast iron, construction with large oil reservoir.

2.3.3 The fan motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled

squirrel cage type conforming to i.p. 55 protection for out door
operation.

2.3.4 The fan guard shall be hot dipped galvanized with wire
mesh screen to prevent bird nesting during idling period.

2.4 Ladder

All towers, whose height exceeds 2.5 m shall be

provided with a ladder, made out of hot dipped galvanized M.S.
tubes.

2.5 Installation and Tests:

2.5.1 The cooling towers shall be mounted on beams/steel

structural members, with all nuts/bolts etc for mounting.

2.5.2 On installation the capacity of the cooling tower shall be

checked by measuring water flow rate, water in and out temperature
and the ambient w.b. temperature and then computing the capacity
and efficiency.

2.5.3 The pump sets shall be mounted on r.c.c foundation. with

grouting nuts, bolts, channels etc.

2.5.4 On installation the capacity of the pumps shall be checked

by measuring water flow, motor current and pressure difference at
inlet and outlet. The readings shall be recorded to compare actual
performance with the specified data.

2.5.5 Magnetic level switches shall be provided for low level

alarm, in each cooling tower.

3.0 SPLIT CASING PUMPS

The centrifugal pumps shall be used for chilled water re-

circulation in the air conditioning system. The pump shall be back pull
out top discharge split casing type as per the requirements given in the
schedule of equipments and bill of quantities. The capacity of the
driving motor shall be at least 25% in excess of the BHP requirement
of the pump.
 3.1 Construction.

The split casing pumps shall conform to ISI 1520 and the
construction of the pumps shall be as follows.
------------------------------------------------------------------
-----------------------------------------------------
S.NO. DESCRIPTION OF MATERIAL / TYPE OF

COMPONENT CONSTRUCTION
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
----------------------------------------
1. Pump Casing Close grained cast iron of
heavy section, end suction back pull out type and
machined to close tolerance.

2. Impellar Bronze/Gunmetal machined to

close tolerance.

3. Pump Shaft High quality alloysteel EN8

grade.

4. Pump Bearings Heavy duty/ball/roller/ journal

bearings.

5. Shaft sleeves Gun metal.

6. Base frame Cast iron/fabricated out of

MS channel in all welded construction.

7. Flanges As per ISI standards.

8. Stuffing box Mechanical seal.

9. Pump coupling Flexible steel pin and rubber

bushing type protected by guard.

3.2 CONSTRUCTION DETAILS.

The pump casing shall be end suction vertical back pull out
type and the pump shall be installed such that the internal parts of the
pump like impeller, mechanical seal and bearing etc can be serviced
without disconnecting the pipes or disturbing the motor and pump
alignment. The joining faces of the pump casing shall be machined and
ground to smooth finish and sealed with leak proof gasket. The suction
passages of the pump shall be volute in form thereby allowing smooth
entry of water to the impeller. The impeller shall be double suction,
enclosed type, statically and dynamically balanced. The impeller water
passages shall be smoothly finished to ensure minimum friction loss
and maximum efficiency. The pump shall be supported by two
precision bearings grease or oil lubricated. The pump casing and the
internal components shall be designed to withstand the discharge
pressure plus the static water head + additional 50% of the total
pressure.

3.3 PUMP ACCESSORIES.

The following accessories and fixture will be provided with

each pump along with other standard accessories.

a. Air vent valves.

b. Drain Plug.

c. Seal Connections.

d. Lubrication fixture & mechanical seal.

e. Suction & delivery shut off valves.

f. Non return valve.

g. Water pressure gauges on inlet and outlet pipes.

(Included in pumps)

h. Y-type strainer on suction pipe.

3.4 PUMP MOTOR & STARTER

The driving motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled type

with class `B' insulation. The motor shall be designed for quite
operation and its speed shall not exceed 1450 RPM. The motor starter
shall be star-delta type. The starter shall have thermal overload on all
the 3 phases and single phase preventor. The starter shall have spare
NO/NC contacts for interlocking and indication lamps.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF PUMPS.

The installation of pumps shall be carried out by the

contractor as per the manufacturer's - recommendations.

The pumps shall be installed on concrete foundations with

at least 25mm thick vibration isolation pads or any other vibrating
isolation fittings. The pump and the motor shall be installed on a
common steel frame and properly aligned. The alignment of the pump
and the motor and the base plate level shall be checked at site and the
result submitted to the Engineer in charge. As far as possible the
pumps sets shall be factory aligned and if site alignment is necessary it
shall be done by experienced and trained personnel. The pumps shall
be installed in a manner that the maintenance can be done
conveniently. The chilled water circulation pumps shall be insulated in
a manner specified under section `Insulation'. The insulation shall be
done in such a manner that maintenance can be done on the pumps
without causing damage to the insulation.

3.6 TESTING

The contractor shall submit the manufacturer's

performance curves for the pumps
conducted on each pump set after
check and confirm the delivery load,
test results shall correspond to the
performance shall be computed from
supplied by him. Tests shall be
completion of the installation to
water flow rate and the BHP. The
performance curves. The pumps
the manufacturer's pump curves.

All equipment instruments and labour required for testing

shall be furnished by the contractor at no extra cost.

3.7 PAINTING

The pumps along with the base, motor and accessories

shall be painted with two coats of synthetic enamel paint of approved
colour after testing and commissioning.

4.0 EXPANSION TANK

Unless mentioned otherwise, an expansion tank of PVC double

layered (Sintex, Uniplas.) , contain twice the maximum expansion
likely to place in the system, shall be provided. The bottom of the
tank shall be at least 600mm above the highest point of the system.
Tank shall be insulated, if required and be complete with float valve,
gauge glass, drain, overflow and make up connections, with gate
valves and vent piping as required.
 CONTROLS

SCOPE

This chapter covers the requirements of equipment safety

controls, refrigerant flow controls and system controls.

2.0 EQUIPMENT SAFETY CONTROLS

Compressor:

Compressor shall be provided with the following safety controls:

-

i) High discharge pressure (HP) safety (cut out) to stop the

compressor automatically, in case discharge pressure exceeds a pre-
set safe value. This safety shall operate when discharge head pressure
exceeds the set point. Only manual resetting shall be provided for this
safety.

ii) Low suction pressure (LP) safety (cut-out) to stop the

compressor automatically, in case suction pressure fails below a pre-
set value. This safety shall operate when the suction pressure falls
below the set point. Automatic resetting shall be provided for this
safety, with adjustable cut-in and cut-out pressures. This safety shall
be used for pumping down the system for shutting off the refrigeration
plant.

iii) Oil pressure (O.P) safety (cut-outs) to stop the compressor, in

case lubricating oil pressure falls below a safe set value. A time delay
mechanism shall also be provided, so as to permit running of the
compressor upto a maximum period of 90 seconds, with the oil
pressure differential below the set value and allow it to continue
normal operation if the pressure differential builds up to the set value
within that time, or otherwise shut-down the compressor. Only manual
resetting shall be provided for this safety.

iv) High bearing temperature cut-out (for centrifugal compressor

only). This shall be provided with a manual reset only.

v) High lubricating oil temperature cut-out (for centrifugal

compressor only). This shall be provided with a manual reset only.

vi) Time delay mechanism on the starting gear to limit short cycling
regardless of mal-functioning of controls.
The cut-outs (i) to (v) mentioned above shall operate when the
respective controlled variable crosses the set point to trip the
compressor. Audio visual alarm shall be provided to indicate such
operations. A manual reset shall be provided for them. Safeties
mentioned above shall operate when the respective controlled variable
crosses the set point to trip the compressor. Audio visual alarm shall
also be provided to indicate such operations.

Condenser

The safety control for a condenser shall comprise a safety pressure

relief valve on the shell. This shall operate to relieve the pressure at
the set point without prior leakage. For small condensers, a fusible
plug may be provided to melt at a predetermined temperature.

Chiller

I) An antifreeze shall be provided with water chiller, set at a few

degrees above the freezing point. This shall operate, when the
temperature of water in the chiller falls below the set point to trip the
compressor motor. The reset provided for the safety shall be manual.

II) Flooded type of chiller in addition, shall be provided with safety

pressure relief valve.

Refrigeration Plant

i) In addition to the safety controls as above for the individual

components of a refrigeration plant, the following safety controls shall
also be provided for the plant.

a) Compressor motor over current cut-out.

b) Condenser water flow switch.
c) Chilled water flow switch.
d) Condenser air flow switch in the condenser fan discharge (in case
of air-cooled condensers).
e) Air flow switch in the evaporator fan discharge in case of direct
expansion coils

ii) The above controls, on operation, shall trip the compressor

motor, and these shall be provided with manual reset
arrangement.

iii) The compressor motor shall also be interlocked electrically with,

a) condenser water pump in case of water cooled condenser, and

condenser fan with air cooled condensers,
(b) Chilled water pumps in case of chilled water system and
evaporator fan in case of direct expansion system, and
c) antifreeze thermostat in case of chillers.

iv) Indicating lamps shall also be provided on the control panel for
indicating operation of the safeties and interlocks.

3.0 REFRIGERANT FLOW CONTROLS

A refrigeration plant shall be provided with controls, necessary for

starting, stopping and modulating the flow of refrigerant in the plant so
as to satisfy the load requirements. These comprise solenoid valve,
thermostatic expansion valve, float valve, compressor capacity controls
etc. and other special controls if specified in a particular work.

Solenoid Valve

a) For reciprocating, scroll and screw type compressors liquid line

solenoid valve shall be provided in the liquid line of the system, ahead
of the expansion valve, to allow or to stop the flow of liquid refrigerant
to an evaporator, or a section of sectionalized evaporator. This shall
be operated by snap-acting thermostat and it shall also be provided
with a test switch to enable manual energizing.

b) Discharge gas valves shall be provided in the following

applications as required: -

i) Hot gas defrosting: normally this solenoid valve shall remain

closed, but it shall open up to feed the evaporator with hot gas for
defrosting when required, especially in cold storage applications.

ii) Compressor capacity control for reciprocating compressor and for

cylinder unloading during starting.

c) Solenoid valves shall be direct acting in smaller sizes and pilot

operated for larger sizes, as required. The size of the valves shall be
determined by the desired flow rate of refrigerant through them and
the pressure drop across the same (and not by the size of the
refrigerant line).

Thermostatic Expansion Valve

Thermostatic expansion valve shall be provided in DX type

refrigeration plant to modulate the flow rate of liquid refrigerant
entering the evaporator in response to the extent of superheat of
refrigerant gas leaving the evaporator, so that only a metered flow is
ensured matching the load.
The number of expansion valve shall be such that the specified
accuracy of temperature control of the system can be achieved and
that no valve is expected to operate below 35% of its rated capacity.
The sizes shall be selected suitably so as to avoid hunting. Adjustable
super heat control and external equaliser port shall be provided for
each valve. Each expansion valve shall be easily removable for
cleaning and adjusting.

Float Valve

Float valve shall be provided in refrigeration plant with flooded type

chiller for maintaining the liquid level in chiller under all conditions of
load at a rate commensurate with the rate of vaporisation. This can be
provided either on low pressure side or on high pressure side. When
provided as low side float valve, this shall be located as a part of the
chiller or accumulator.

4.0 SYSTEM CONTROLS

i) The requirements for maintaining the inside design conditions as

specified in the tender specifications for the work shall be met by
appropriate system controls and control elements. The system shall
satisfy the requirements of both full load and partial load conditions.
Details of complete control elements shall be indicated by the tenderer
in the tender.

ii) For cooling applications in plants other than package type AC

(PTAC) units, control shall be effected by 3 way diverting valve in
chilled water coil. For heating using hot water coils, flow control
through them shall also be achieved by using 3 way valves.

In the case of PTAC type AC units, the control of the units is affected
through snap acting room thermostat.

iii) The size of 3 way diverting valves shall be selected so as to

match the coil wherein the flow is to be regulated. The make and size
shall be indicated in the Technical particulars with the tender.

iv) Operation of the modulating motor of 3 way diverting valve shall

be controlled by proportional type thermostat.

v) One snap acting humidistat shall be provided for each humidifier.

vi) Where strip heaters are specified, maximum size of each heater
bank shall not exceed 9 KW, distributed in three phases of 3 KW per
phase.
vii) Every bank of strip heaters shall be controlled by a snap acting
thermostat in case of temperature control requirement and by a snap
acting humidistat for reheat control to maintain the specified RH
condition.

Where more than one bank of heaters is required to be provided for

one AHU, thermostat shall be provided in each bank shall suitable for
operation in stages.

ix) A safety thermostat (safety stat) shall be provided as high limit

safety for each bank of heaters.

x) The heater banks intended for reheating during monsoon shall

form part of heaters required for winter heating (where winter heating
is specified). Necessary change-over switch shall be provided as part
of the system wiring to change their control by thermostats or
humidistats as required.

5.0 OPERATIONAL CONTROLS AND INTERLOCKS

i) The operation of refrigeration plant shall be either manual or

automatic, as specified. The plant shall be started by an ON/OFF
switch.

ii) The automatic operation shall be effected through the monitoring

of return chilled water temperature, or the room conditions, as the
case may be. In multi unit installations, one unit shall be arranged to
be loaded fully before the next unit is switched on automatically. A
similar operation system shall be followed in shutting off of the unit.
Change over from one operating unit to another shall be possible
through the status switch of the plant to be shut down by change to
manual position and thus overriding its anti-cycle timer. It should be
possible to introduce the changed unit by running it to speed and
changing over the status switch to "auto" position.

iii) Pump down shut down shall be provided through low pressure
(LP) safety irrespective of the status switch position, auto/manual.

iv) It should be possible to start the compressor motor only after the
cooling tower fan motor (where provided), chilled water (where
provided) and condenser water pumps are operated.

v) The compressor motor shall be able to be started or run, only

after all the safeties as per para 12.2 are satisfied.
vi) The blower motor shall be interlocked with strip heaters (where
provided) such that power supply to strip heaters will become ON, only
after the blower has been started and run to full (designed) speed.

vii) Where only the blower motor and not heaters is connected to
standby generating set in any particular application, a timer shall be
provided, such that the heaters may get energised, only after a period
of time, after the blower is run.

viii) In the event of signal from high limit safety of heaters the power
supply to the blower motor and the heater bank shall automatically
and instantly be switched off.

ix) The power supply to AHU shall be cut off on receipt of a signal
from the Fire Alarm System.

6.0 REQUIREMENTS OF CONTROL ELEMENTS

The system control elements comprise controlling elements such as

thermostats, humidistats, three way valves, heaters, humidifiers,
dehumidifier etc as required for individual applications.

6.1 Thermostats

Thermostats shall be electric fixed differential type as indicated below,

with sensing element located in the return air stream. All thermostats
shall be supplied with the standard mounting boxes as recommended
by the manufacturer. The profile, mounting arrangement and exact
location of the thermostat shall be such as to suit the site.

I) Proportional control thermostats shall be provided for actuating

the three way modulating valve at each air handling unit. Thermostat
shall provide manual switching (heat-off-cool-in heating-cooling
system).

II) Snap-acting fixed differential type thermostat for actuating the

three-way diverting valve at each fan coil unit.

Thermostat shall have temperature adjustments WARM-NORMAL-COOL

settings and fan switch. Switching off must break fan circuit.

III) Snap-acting fixed differential heating thermostat for electric

winter heating and reheat applications for putting on/off power supply
to electric heating or reheat coils in air handling units.
IV) Safety thermostat shall be provided for electric winter heating
and reheat application for cutting off power supply to strip heaters in
case air flow across strip heater is not established.

V) Air-stat shall be provided within air handling unit containing

electric heating or reheat coils to prevent heaters from energizing
unless the air flow is established.

6.2 Humidistats

Humidistat shall be provided with air handling unit for areas, which
require humidity control. One humidistat shall activate the reheat
coils in case the space humidity rises beyond the preset limit. Another
humidistat shall energize the humidifier when the humidity falls below
the preset limit. These humidistats shall also de-energize these
devices when the desired humidity is reached.

Humidistats shall be snap-acting type having humidifier/dehumidifier

control from 20-80 percent relative humidity, with differential of 5
percent. Humidistat shall have nylon element with three bobbins, and
removable knob to prevent tempering of set point.

6.3 Three-way modulating valves (for AHUs)

Required size of these shall be provided in chilled/hot water lines as

diverting valves at each air-handling unit and shall be actuated by a
space thermostat. Space conditions shall be maintained by continuous
proportional modulation of the chilled/hot water through the coil. The
valve shall revert to fully bypass position when fan is shut off.
Maximum pressure drop across valve shall not exceed 0.85 kg/ sq.cm.
Where VSD (to control chilled water flow) is provided, the AHUs shall
be provided with 2 way diverting valve.

6.4 Three-way diverting valves for FCUs

Required size this shall be provided as 2 position diverting valves in

chilled/hot water lines at each fan coil unit and shall be actuated by a
space thermostat. Space conditions shall be maintained by allowing all
of chilled/hot water to either pass through the coil or bypass the coil
and mix with the chilled/hot water return. The valves shall revert to
fully bypass position when fan is shut off. Pressure drop across the
valve shall not exceed 0.14 kg/ sq.cm. Valve shall have the facility to
replace motor actuator without removing the valve body.

6.5 Pan humidifiers where provided shall be complete with necessary

heater elements rated for 230 V supply. The pan shall be made of 1.6
mm thick GI sheet, with arrangements for make-up water, inlet and
drain.

6.6 Strip heaters shall be of finned type construction with a surface

temperature not exceeding 45 deg. C. The same shall be suitable for
230 V, AC supply. The heaters shall be adequately insulated
electrically from their mountings unit/ casing.
 VENTILATION FANS

1. General:

The ventilation fans shall be complete in all respects and shall

generally comply with the following specifications given below :

2. Exhaust Fans:

2.1 The exhaust fans shall be propeller type with steel

hub and blades, mounted directly on the shaft of a totally
enclosed motor.

2.2 The fan blades shall be of pressed steel of aerofoil

design for high efficiency and static pressure.

2.3 The mounting frame shall be of cast/sheet steel with

steel brackets to connect the frame, with the fan/motor
assembly. Rubber mounts shall be provided between the
mounting frame and the mounting brackets.

2.4 The fan motor shall be to totally enclosed squirrel

cage type.

3. Centrifugal Blowers:

3.1 The centrifugal blowers shall be double/single inlet,

double/single width, non-overloading type, of suitable construction.
The blower performance must be rated in accordance with approved
test codes and procedures.

3.2 The blower housing comprising of scroll & side plates shall
be accurately cut, heavy gauge all welded sectional construction and
reinforced with angle bracings. Outlets shall be flanged to assure
proper duct connections. Inlet cones shall be spun venturi type or
curved vane type to ensure smooth air entry. The base frame shall be
of angle iron in bolted/welded construction.

3.3 Impeller shall be fabricated from sheet steel with backward

curved, properly designed. blades, heavy c.i. hub and shall be both
dynamically and statically balanced, to a close tolerance for quiet and
vibration free performance.

3.4 Shaft shall be of hot rolled steel or forged steel, sized

adequately, but in no case less than 40 mm dia-meter and shall be
accurately ground and polished to a close tolerance.
3.5 Bearings shall be self aligning, heavy duty ball or
tapered roller type with integral dust and grease seals.

3.6 After assembly, the complete fan shall be painted

with rust proof primer and two coats of synthetic enamel
paint.

3.7 Fan having wheel diameter of 1220 mm or more,

shall be supplied with split, bolted housing for convenience
of handling and installation.

4. Blower Drive Assembly :

4.1 Drive assembly for each blower shall consist of blower

pulley, motor pulley, a set of `V' belts, belt guards, and belt tension
adjusting device.

4.2 Pulleys shall be selected to provide the required speed.

They shall be multi-grove type, with section and grooves selected to
transmit 33% more load than the required power and shall be statically
balanced.

4.3 The belt guards shall be of m.s. sheet with angle iron
reinforcement and expanded metal screen.

Exhaust Blowers (Fan Section of AHU)

5.1 The exhaust fans (fan section of AHU) shall be as described

in under AHU.

6. Motors and Starters :

6.1 The motor for each blower, shall be squirrel cage induction
type and conform to specifications as given under section on control
panel, motors and switchgear. The motor h.p. shall be at lease 20%
more than the limit load of fan and of minimum rating as given under
`Schedule of Equipments'.

7. Limitation :

The air velocity limits are as follows :

7.1 Velocity at blower outlet shall not exceed 12.5 mps.

8.0 AXIAL FLOW FANS

i) Casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet steel. Casing shall
be provided with hinged door enabling easy replacement of wheel, shaft
and bearings. A small inspection door with handle and neoprene gasket
shall also be provided. Casing shall have flanged connection on both ends
for ducted applications. Support brackets for ceiling suspension shall be
welded to the casing for connection to hanger bolts. Straightening vanes
shall be aerodynamically designed for maximum efficiency by converting
velocity pressure to static pressure potential and minimizing turbulence.
Casing shall be de-rusted, cleaned, primed and finish coated with enamel
paint.

ii) Rotor hub and blades shall be of cast aluminium, or cast steel
construction. Blades shall be die-formed aerofoil shaped for maximum
efficiency and shall vary in twist and width from hub to tip to effect equal
air distribution along the blade length. Fan blade mounting on the hub
shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Extended grease leads for
external lubrication shall be provided. The fan pitch control maybe
manually readjustable at site, upon installation, for obtaining actual
airflow values, as specified.

iii) Motor shall be of 3 phase squirrel-cage totally enclosed, fan cooled

type. Motor and starter shall be in accordance with para 6.6. (V) and
13.9. The speed of fan shall not exceed 1000 RPM for fans with impeller
diameter above 450 mm, and 1450 RPM for fans with impeller diameter of
450 mm and less.

iv) Drive to fan shall be provided through belt drive with adjustable
motor sheaves and belt guard or direct driven. Belt shall be oil resistant
type.

MOTOR STARTERS CONTROL PANELS

1. General :

The motors and switchgears required for various items shall generally be
as per specifications given below. All electric motors shall be suitable for 3
phase, 50 cycles 415 volts a.c. supply.

2. Control Panel :

2.1 These panels should be floor/wall mounted, sheet steel clad,

modular construction, cubicle design, compartmentalised .These panels
shall comprise of incoming & outgoing feeders (circuit breakers, fuse
switch units/switch fuse units, contactor starters with overload relays,
single phasing preventor etc. as indicated in the drawings.

2.2 The panels shall be provided wherever necessary with necessary

interlocks designed to prevent incorrect operation and to ensure safety of
operating personnel and equipment.

2.3 All feeders are to be operated from the front and they shall be
interlocked suitably. Padlocking arrangement and interlock defeating
device shall also be provided. Each module shall have separate door and
partition plate. The feeder incomer switches shall be interlocking with the
door so that the door can only by opened when switch is in `off' position.
The doors and covers shall be provided with thick gaskets to make it dust
tight. All the door covers shall be provided with synthetic rubber gaskets
to make it dust tight. Feeder name tags shall be provided.

2.4 Air Circuit Breaker and Fuse Switch Units

The circuit breaker shall be air break fully draw out type equipped with
arc chutes and their face barriers of proper design. The continuous
current rating of the circuit breakers shall be as given in the detailed
technical specifications. The circuit breakers shall have a breaking
capacity of 31 mva at 415 volts, 50 hz ac & they shall be able to
withstand full fault current for one second.

2.5 The circuit breaker shall be provided with manually operated spring
closing mechanism. The operating mechanism shall be trip-free
throughout the breaker travel. The breaker shall be equipped with inside
`on' & `off' position indicator mechanism and so located that the position
of the circuit breaker i.e. whether closed or open, is indicated on the front
door of the compartment. The `on' & `off' trip indicating lights shall also
be provided for each breaker feeder.

2.6 The moving portion of the circuit breaker shall be so interlocked

that it is not possible to isolate it and draw out from the service position
or to plug it in from the isolated position when the circuit breaker is
closed. The interlock being provided shall be such as to prevent operation
of a circuit breaker unless it is fully plugged in or fully isolated and is
locked correctly in either of the two positions.

2.7 The circuit breaker compartment doors shall be so interlocked as to

prevent access to the breaker while in the plugged in position. However
special means shall be provided for undoing this interlocked in an
emergency.

2.8 The draw out feature shall clearly provided three distinct positions
of the circuit breaker viz., `service', `test' & isolated. Inadvertent
withdrawal of a circuit breaker removable unit too for beyond its supports
shall be prevented by a suitably interlock, the design shall provide for the
testing of breaker in the test positions i.e. when the breaker's moving unit
is in fully disconnected position and the secondary circuit remains
connected or energised. The secondary connections between the fixed
and removable units shall be provided with means of spring loaded sliding
type contacts to make the breaker fully draw out type.

2.9 The circuit breaker unit shall be provided with complete range of
releases including the overload releases and release for short circuit
protection.

2.10 The circuit breaker shall be provided with necessary auxiliary

contacts with 2 No. spare contacts. All contacts shall be wires up to the
terminal board.

2.11 The fuse switch unit shall be of load break heavy duty, industrial
design and of double break pattern with quick make and quick break
mechanism, however, the design shall be such that it shall ensure positive
opening even if quick break action is lost due to spring stretchening or
breaking.

2.12 The `on' and `off' position of the switch handle shall be distinctly
indicated and inter locks shall be provided to ensure that switch cover
can not be opened unless the switch is in the `off' position.

2.13 The fuse switch units shall be provided with non-deteriorating type
of hrc cartridge fuse link and having rupturing capacity not less than 31
mva at 415 volts.

2.14 All alive parts inside switch shall be properly shrouded and inter
phase barriers shall be provided. Design of the switch handles shall be
such that they do not protrude out of the panel in the manner so as to
prevent free passage of operating personnel. Design with normal
conventional position of switch handle up in `on' position & down in `off'
position shall be preferred.

2.15 415 Volts Bus Bars

 2.15.1 The 415 volts main bus-bar shall have continuous
current rating as indicated in the specification or equivalent standard
rating of at least 50 percent of these of the phase bus bars. The bar and
its connections shall be so arranged and supported as to withstand
without any damage or deformation, the specific short circuit current. The
bus bars shall be braced and supported on reinforced fibre glass support
and shall be of electrolytic grade type E 91e of is:5082. these bus bars
shall withstand 43.12 ka for one second during short circuit conditions.
The bus bars shall be colour coded with pvc tapes or insulating painting
for identification purposes. The bus bars shall be sleeved with special type
heat shrinkable pvc sleeving.

2.15.2 Bus supports shall be resistant low absorption type moulded

insulation of high impact strength and high creepage surface.

2.15.3 All bus work shall be braced to withstand without damage a

short circuit current of 43.12 ka symmetrical for one second.

2.16 Instruments and Meters

2.16.1 Current transformer shall comply with the requirements of

is:2705. They shall have ratio outputs and accuracies as specified or
required as shown in single line diagram.

2.16.2 All indicating instruments shall be of industrial pattern and

should be provided as shown in the single line diagram.

2.16.3 All instruments shall be switch board type flush mounted with
proper scale dimensions so as to be clearly visible to the operators
standing on the floor. The instruments shall be provided with front of
board zero adjuster shall be not preferably be mounted at heights lower
than one meter and higher than two meters above the floor level.

2.16.4 The operating handles, meters, instruments etc. shall be

mounted at the front of the switch board. Approved means shall be
provided for locking the control switch/operating handles in the open
position. For fuse switch gear section of the switch board, meters where
specifications shall be mounted in such a manner that it is possible to
readily identify the meters for individual units and the arrangements does
not create hindrances to maintenance of individual units without having to
shut down the bus.

2.16.5 All wires carried within the switch gear enclosure shall be pvc
insulated and shall be neatly arranged to be readily accessible and to
facilitate easy replacement. Only pvc copper cables shall be used for all
power and control inter connections. The cables of 660 volts shall be
used. Trained copper cables lugs shall be used. All small wires shall be
colour coded and provided with numbered ferrules for easy identification
of circuits. As for as possible, each essential circuit shall be connected
within the respective switch gear unit. Control wiring terminal shall
preferably be near the panel.

3. Cable Termination:

3.1 The cables entries and terminals shall be provided in the switch
board to suit the number, type and size of aluminium conductor cables as
given in the line diagram. Cable entries shall be so designed as to avoid
damage to cables and there shall be sufficient space to avoid short
bending of cables. The positions of the cable lugs and terminals shall be
such that the cable could be neatly drawn and connected through one
meter deep trench below the switch gear and the jointing carried out in a
convenient and satisfactory manner. The cable entry, design panel, cable
boxes and terminals and their locations will have to be approved by the
engineer/owner. However the access for cabling shall preferably be from
the back of the switch board. The panels shall be provided with control
transformers of suitable va rating along with control bus and hr fuses
from control supply to contractors.

3.2 The cables socket shall be of copper and of crimping type. Cables
risers shall be adequately supported to withstand the effects of rated
short circuit current without damage.

3.3 Cable glands of sizes as required shall be provided at all cable entry
paints in the bottom plate. The glands shall form part of switch board.

4. Indication:

Each incoming and outgoing feeder units shall be provided with `on' `off'
indicating lamps of standad conventional colour coding.

5. Subsidiary Panels:

Subsidiary panels shall be provided wherever required such as ahu room,

air washer room. The construction of these panels should be similar to the
main panel and shall have all related accessories.

6. Contactor Starters:

6.1 Star Delta Starter

The star delta starter shall be air break automatic contactor starter
provided with main contactor, star contactor, delta contactor, timer and
automatic change over from start to delta, bimetallic over load relay,
operating coil, start/stop push button, single phasing preventor, auxiliary
make and break contacts, indicating lamps etc. The contactor shall quick
make, quick break, double break consisting of robust silver contacts. The
coil voltage shall be 415 volts ac at 50 hz. The starter shall be provided
with trip indication light and overload reset push button for overload
relay.

6.2 DOL Contactor Starter

The contactor shall be air break type coil operate, dol contractor starter,
provides with cables entries, ambient temperature compensated
bimetallic over load relay, single phasing preventor, solenoid coil, start
and stop push buttons, 8 auxiliary make and break contacts, indicating
lamps etc. The contactors shall be quick make and quick break, double
break type consisting of robust silver contacts. The coil voltage shall be
440 volts at 50 c/s. The starter shall be provide with trip indication light
and over load reset bush button for overload relay.

7. Squirrel Cage Induction Motors:

7.1 The motor shall be of well tried out and design and of reputed
make. The motors provided on the equipment shall conform to is:325 in
general. The motors shall be squirrel cage indication motors rates for
operation at 415 volts, 3 phase, 50 hz a.c. supply. The motor for
various equipments shall have the following enclosure level.

(a) Cooling tower & exhaust blower - ip:55(tefc)

(b) Compressorand A.H.U. motor-ip:44(tefc).
(c) Pumps ip:34(spdp).

7.2 The horse power and speed of the motor shall match that of driven
equipment and the motor shall be suitable for star delta startings or direct
on line starting with class `3' insulation. The motors of 7.5 HP and above
7.5 HP shall be suitable for star delta starting and below 7.5 HP suitable
for dol starting. The compressor motor shall be provided with automatic
star delta starter

8.0 CENTRAL CONTROL CONSOLE

A floor mounting control and indication console shall be provided in the

main control room, as shown on the plans.

Equipment Push Bottons Lamps

on off green
red
Water chilling units

Machine status x
x
Water circulation pumps x x x
x
Air handling unit motors x x x
x
 Ventilation Fans, Centrifugal x x x
x
Blower, exhausters

Flow switch in water lines - - -

x

Hot water generator x x

x x

In line/ Tube axial fan x x x

x

Cooling towers, AHUs x x x

x

The console shall contain on/off push bottons and indication

lamps for all the items as per the BOQ. Indicating light for strip heaters, if
any shall be provided on the switch board, in the respective unit room.

The requirements given for the main panel are for one unit
only. The actual number of switches and lights shall correspond to the
number of units being installed. All controls and alarms shall be suitable
for 230 volts on the panel.
The alarms shall be with reset buttons.
All controls circuits shall be functionally tested.

The red indicating lamps should switch on only in case of

fault. Thus, the red light should come on in case of tripping of starter on
overload or single phasing.
A common alarm shall be connected to all red indicating
lamps through individual relays.
Lamp testing arrangements shall be provided in console.
All the airconditioning equipments shall be interlocked in sequence
for safe and trouble free operations of the plant. Following should be the
sequence of operation
8.1 Airhandling units
8.2 Chilled / condenser water pumps
8.3 Water chilling units.
During switch off operations the sequence shall be reverse.
8.4 For winter heating the following should be the sequence of
operations
8.5 Airhandling unit
8.6 Hot water pumps.
8.7 Hot Water Generator/Boiler
During switch of operations the sequence shall be reverse.
DUCT WORK AND OUTLETS

1. General :

1.1 The work under this part shall consist of furnishing labour materials,
equipment and appliances as specified necessary and required to install
all sheet metal and other allied work to make the air conditioning supply,
ventilating, exhaust system ready for operation as per drawings.

1.2 Except as otherwise specified all duct work and related items shall
be in accordance with these specifications.

1.3 Duct work shall mean all ducts, casings, dampers, access doors,
joints, stiffners and hangers.

2 Duct materials

2.1 The ducts shall be fabricated from galvanized steel sheets class VIII
GSS sheets conforming to IS:277-1962 (revised) or aluminium sheets
conforming to IS:737-1955(with latest amendments) (wherever
aluminium ducts are specified).

2.2 All duct work, sheet metal thickness and fabrication unless
otherwise directed, shall strictly meet requirements, as described in IS:
655-1963 with amendment-i (1971 edition)

The thickness of the sheet shall be as follows: -

size of duct sheet thickness type of bracing if

GI Aluminium joints any

2.2.1 Upto 750mm 0.63 mm 0.80 mm GI flange

2.2.2 751 mm to
1000 mm 0.80 mm 1.00 mm 25x25x3 mm 25x25x3
Angle iron mm at
Frame the rate of
With 8 mm 1
dia.nuts & bolts.

2.2.3 1001 mm to 0.80 mm 1.00 mm 40x40x5 mm 40x40x3mm

1500 mm angle iron at the rate
frame with of 1
8 mm dia.
Nuts & bolts.

2.2.4 1501 mm to 1.00 mm 1.50 mm 50x50x5 mm 40x40x3mm

2250 mm angle iron at the rate of
to be cross 1.2
braced
diagonally with
 10 mm dia nuts &
bolts at 125
mm centre.
2.2.5 2251 mm and
above 1.25 mm 1.80 mm 50x50x6 mm 40x40x3 mm
angle iron at the rate
frame with of 1.6
10 mm nuts &
bolts at
125 mm centre.

2.3 The gauges, joints and bracings for sheet metal duct work shall
further conform with the provisions as shown on the drawings.

2.4 Ducts larger than 450 mm shall be cross broken, duct sections upto
12 00 mm length may be used with bracing angles omitted.

2.5 Changes in section of duct work shall be affected by tapering the

ducts with as long a taper as possible. All branches shall be taken off at
not more than 45 deg. Angle from the axis of the main duct unless
otherwise approved by the engineer-in-charge.

2.6 All ducts shall be supported from the ceiling/slab by means of

m.s.rods of 9 mm (3/8") dia with m.s. angle at the bottom.

3. Installations

3.1 During the construction, the contractor shall temporarily close duct
openings with sheet metal covers to prevent debris entering ducts and to
maintain opening straight and square, as per direction of
engineer-in-charge.

3.2 Great care should be taken ensure that the duct work does not
extend outside and beyond height limits as noted on the drawings.

3.3 All duct work shall be of high quality approved galvanized sheet
steel guaranteed not to crack or peel on bending or fabrication of ducts.
all joints shall be tight and shall be made in the direction of air flow.

The ducts shall be re-inforced where necessary, and must be secured in

place so as to avoid vibration of the duct on its support.

3.4 All air turns of 45 degrees or more shall include curved metal blades
or vanes arranged so as to permit the air to make the abrupt turns
without an appreciable turbulence. Turning vanes shall be securely
fastened to prevent noise or vibration. All ducts shall be fabricated and
installed in accordance with modern design practice. The sheet metal
gauges and fabrication procedures as given in i.s.s specifications shall be
adhered to and shall be considered as an integral part of these
specifications.
3.5 The duct work shall be varied in shape and position to fit actual
conditions at building. All changes shall be in accordance with accepted
airconditioning duct design and subject to the approval of the
engineer-in-charge. The contractor shall verify all measurements at
building and shall notify the engineer-in-charge of any difficulty in
carrying out his work before fabrication.

3.6 Sponge rubber of approved equal gaskets shall be installed between

duct flanges as well as between all connections of sheet metal ducts to
walls, floor columns, heater casings and filter casings. Sheet metal
connections shall be made to walls and floors by means of galvanized
steel angles anchored to the building structure with anchor bolts and with
the sheet bolted to the angles. Sheet metal connections shall be as shown
in the drawings or as directed by engineer-in-charge.

3.7 The ducts shall be supported from the structure by means of

suitable supports grouted in the r.c.c. work. The type of support should
meet the approval of the engineer-in-charge and should involve minimum
damage or breakage. In no case the duct will be rested upon the false
ceiling/boxing or on supports grouted in the wall.

3.8 Flanges and supports are to be black, mild steel and are to be
primer coated on all surfaces before erection and painted with aluminium
thereafter. Accessories such as damper blades and access panels are to
be of materials of appropriate thickness and the finish similar to the
adjacent ducting as specified.

3.9 Joints, seams, sleeves, splitters, branches, takeoffs and supports

are to be as per duct details as specified, or as decided by
engineer-in-charge.

3.10 Joints requiring bolting or rivetting may be fixed by hexagon nuts

and bolts, stove bolts or buck bolts, rivets or closed centre top rivets or
spot welding. Self tapping screws must not be used. all fixing must have a
permanently non-corrosive finish such as cadmium plating or galvanizing
as appropriate. Spot welds and bronze welds are to be coated on all
surfaces with zinc rich paint, as approved by engineer-in-charge.

3.11 The flexible joints are to be fitted to the suction and delivery of all
fans. The material is to be normally double heavy canvass or as directed
by engineer-in- charge. On all circular spigots the flexible materials are to
be screwed or clipband with adjustable screws or toggle fitting. For
rectangular ducts the material is to be flanged and bolted with a backing
flat or bolted to mating flange with backing flat.

3.12 The flexible joints are to be not less than 75 mm and not more than
250 mm between faces.
3.13 The duct work should be carried out in a manner and at such time
as not to hinder or delay the work of the other agencies especially the
boxing or false ceiling contractors.
4. Dampers

4.1 At the junction of each branch duct with main duct and split of main
duct, volume dampers must be provided. Dampers shall be two gauges
heavier than gauge of the large duct, and shall be rigid in construction to
the passage of air.

4.2 The volume dampers shall be of an approved type, lever operated

and complete with locking devices which will permit the dampers to be
adjusted and locked in any positions.

4.3 The dampers shall be of splitter, butterfly or louver type. The

damper blade shall not be less than 1.25 mm (18) gauge, reinforced with
25 mm angles 3 mm thick along any unsupported side longer than 250
mm angles shall not interface with the operation of dampers, nor cause
any turbulence.

4.4 Automatic and manual volume opposed blade dampers shall be

complete with frames and bronze bearings as per drawings. Dampers and
frames shall be constructed of 1.5 mm steel and blades shall not be over
225 mm wide. The dampers for fresh air inlet shall additionally be
provided with fly mesh screen, on the outside, of 0.8 mm thickness with
fine mesh spacking.

4.5 Wherever required for system balancing, provide a volume

balancing opposed blade damper with quadrant and thumb screw lock
provide damper rod and damper block with upset screws.

4.6 After completion of the duct work, dampers are to be adjusted and
set to deliver the required amounts of air as specified on the drawings.

4.7 Motorised Combined Smoke & Fire dampers:

The fire dampers shall be provided at all supply and return air ducts
at AHU room crossings and at all floor crossings or wherever shown on
the drawings. The fire & smoke dampers shall be of atleast 90 minutes
fire rating certified by CBRI, Roorkee as per UL 555: 1973. Fire damper
blade & outer frame shall be formed of 1.6 mm galvanized sheet steel.
The damper blade shall be in pivoted on both ends using chrome plated
spindles in self lubricated bronze bushes. Stop seals will be provided on
top & bottom of the damper housing made of 16 G galvanized sheet steel.
For preventing smoke leakage side seals will be provided. In normal
position damper blade shall be held in open position with the help of a 24
V operated electric actuators thereby providing maximum air passage
without creating any noise or chatter. The damper shall be actuated
through electric actuator. The actuator shall be energised with the help of
a signal from smoke detector installed in AHU room. Smoke detector shall
be provided by the A/C contractor. The fire
damper shall also close due to temperature rise in SA ducts through
the electric temperature sensor factory set at 165 deg F micro switches
with bakelite base will be provided to stop fan motor and give open &
close signal at remote panel in case of motorised actuator.

Each fire dampers shall have its own panel which will incorporate
necessary circuit required to step down voltage available from power
supply to shown status of the damper ( open or close ), to allow remote
testing of damper & indication in event of damper closure due to signal
from smoke sensor/ temperature sensor & reset button. Additional
terminal will be provided to have signal (sound beep or visual) in Central
Control Room

Damper actuator shall be spring return Belimo make so as to close

the damper in the event of power failure automatically and open the same
in case of power being restored. Spring return action of the actuator shall
be an in built mechanism and not mount externally.

The fire damper shall be mounted in fire rated wall with a duct
sleeve 600 mm long. The sleeve shall be factory fitted on fire damper.
The joints at sleeve end shall be slip on type. Minimum thickness of GI
sheet shall be 18 G.

5. Access panel

5.1 A hinged and gasketed access panel shall be provided on duct work
before each reheat coil and at each control device that may be located
inside the duct work.

6. Miscellaneous

6.1 All ducts above 450 mm are to be cross broken to provide rigidity to
the ducts.

6.2 All duct work joints are to be true right angle or approaching with
all sharp edges removed.

6.3 Sponge rubber gaskets also to be provided behind the flange of all
grilles.

6.4 Each shoot from the duct, leading to a grille, shall be provided with
an air deflector to divert the air into the grille through the shoot.

6.5 Inspection doors measuring at least 450 mm x 450 mm are to be

provided in each system at an appropriate location, as directed by
engineer-in-charge.
6.6 Diverting vanes must be provided at the bends exceeding 600 mm
and at branches connected into the main duct without a neck.

6.7 Proper hangers and supports should be provided to hold the duct
rigidly, to keep them straight and to avoid vibrations additional supports
are to be provided where required for rigidity or as directed by
engineer-in-charge.

6.8 The ducts should be routed directly with a minimum of directional

change.

6.9 The duct work shall be provided with addtional supports/hangers,

wherever required or as directed by the engineer-in-charge, at no extra
cost.

6.10 All duct supports, flanges, hangers and damper boxes etc. shall be
given 2 coats of red oxide paint before installation and one coat of
aluminium paint after the erection, at no extra cost.

6.11 All angle iron flanges to be welded electrically and holes to be

drilled.

6.12 All the angle iron flanges to be connected to the gss ducts by rivets
at 100 mm centres.

6.13 All the flanged joints, to have a 4 mm thick felt packing stack to the
flanges with shellac varnish. the holes in the felt packing are to be burnt
through.

6.14 The g.s.s. ducts should be lapped 6 mm across the flanges.

6.15 The ducts should be supported by approved type supports at a

distance not exceeding 2.4 metres.

6.16 Sheet metal connection pieces, partitions and plenums required,

shall be constructed of 1.25 (18 gauge) sheet throughtly stiffened with 25
mm x 25 mm angle iron braces and fitted with access doors.

7. Grilles

7.1 The supply and return air grilles shall be fabricated from aluminium
extruded sections and the supply air grilles shall have single louvers and
the return air grille shall have single horizontal extruded section fixed
louvers the grilles may or may not be with an outer frame.

7.2 The grilles shall have opposed blade dampers of m.s. black sheets,
which shall be key operated from the grille face wherever required.
7.3 The damper blades shall be of 1.00 mm (18 gauge) m.s. black
sheets and shaped to form air tight joints the frame work for dampers
shall be fabricated from 1.00 mm (18 gauge) m.s. black sheet the grill
flange shall be fabricated out of 25 x 25 x1.5 mm aluminium angle grilles
longer than 450 mm shall have intermediate supports for the horizontal
louvers.

7.4 Linear Grille

The linear grille shall be of 1.25 mm (18 G) aluminium extruded section

with flush mounted with single louvers for air flow direction adjustment.

8. Diffusers

8.1 The ceiling type round or square diffusers shall be of 1.25 mm (18
gauge) aluminium extruded sections with flush or step down face, as
specified with fixed pattern and round neck.

8.2 The diffusers shall be die formed for proper air diffusion.

8.3 All supply diffusers shall be provided with m.s. sheet dampers, with
knurled knobs for adjustment from the bottom.

9. Painting

9.1 All grilles, and diffusers shall be anodised or powder coated, as

required, before installation.

9.2 All ducts immediately behind the grilles/diffusers etc. are to be

given two coats of black paint in matt finish.

9.3 All grilles, diffusers & registers shall be provided with rubber gasket
between flanges and the wall or ceiling.

10. Testing

10.1 After completion, all duct system shall be tested for air leakage.

10.2 The entire air distribution system shall be balanced to supply the air
quantity as required in various areas and the final balance of air quantity
through each outlet shall be submitted to the engineer-in-charge for
approval.
 PIPE WORK

1. General:

All piping work shall conform to quality standards and shall be carried out
as per specifications and details given hereunder: -

2. Pipes:

2.1 All pipes in sizes upto 50 mm dia shall be m.s. e.r.w tube (black
steel) heavy class as per i.s. 1239-79, part-i with amendment-i of january
`81.

2.2 All pipes in sizes 65 mm to 150 mm dia shall be m.s. e.r.w. tube
(black steel) heavy class, as per i.s. 1239/79 part-i with amendment i of
january 1981.

2.3 All pipes in sizes above 150 mm dia shall be m.s. e.r.w. tube (black
steel) of minimum 6 mm thickness as per i.s. 3589 with amendment
(latest).

3. Fittings :
3.1 The dimensions of the fittings shall conform to i.s. 1239/69 part-ii
unless otherwise indicated, in the specifications.

3.2 All bends in sizes upto and including 150 mm dia, shall be ready,
made of heavy duty, wrought steel of appropriate class.

3.3 All bends in sizes 200 mm and larger dia, shall be fabricated from
pipes of the same dia and thickness, with a minimum of 4 sections, and
having a minimum centre line radius of 1.5 diameter of pipes.

3.4 All fittings such as branches reducers etc. in all sizes shall be
fabricated from pipes of the same dia and thickness, and its length should
be at least twice the dia of the pipe.

3.5 The branches may be welded straight to the main line, without
making a separate fitting, where specified on drawings or required by
engineer-in-charge.

3.6 Blank ends are to be formed with flanged joints and 6 mm thick
blank between flange pair for 150 mm and over, in case where, a future
extension is to be made otherwise blank end discs of 6 mm thickness are
to be welded on, with additional cross stiffners from 50 mm x 50 mm m.s.
heavy angles, for sizes upto 350 mm. All ends larger than 400 mm dia
shall have dished ends.

3.7 Air valves (included in piping) shall be provided at all high points in
the piping system for venting with a size of 25mm for pipes up to 100
mm and 40mm for larger pipes
4. Flanges:

4.1 All flanges shall be of mild steel as per i.s. 6392/71 and shall be
steel slip-on-type, welded to the pipes, flange thickness shall be to suit
class-ii pressures.

4.2 Flanges may be tack welded into position, but all final welding shall
be done with joints dismounted 3 mm thick gaskets shall be used with all
flanged joints. The gaskets shall be fibre re-inforced rubber as approved
by the engineer-in-charge. special adhesive compound shall be used
between flanges of steam, air and gas lines.

4.3 Flanges shall be used as follows: -

4.3.1 Counter flanges for equipment having flanged connections.

4.3.2 Flanged pairs shall be used on all such equipment, which may
require to be isolated or removed for service e.g. pumps, refrigeration
machines, air handling units etc.
4.3.3 All threaded valves shall be provided with nipples and flanged pairs
on both sides to permit flange connections, for removal of valves from
main lines for repair/replacement.

5. Valves:

5.1 Butterfly Valves

5.1.1 The butterfly valve shall consist of cast iron body preferably in two
piece construction.

5.1.2 The disc shall consist of disc pivot and driving stem shall be in one
piece centrally located.

5.1.3 The valve seat shall be synthetic material suitable for water duty it
shall line the whole body.

5.1.4 The disc should move in slide bearings on both ends with `O' ring to
prevent leakage.

5.1.5 The handle should have arrangement for locking in any set position.

5.1.6 The valve should be suitable for 12 kg/sq.cm working pressure.

5.2 The check valves shall be wafer type. The body shall be of cast iron
and the plate of aluminium bronze. The valve shall have plain face and
shall have a synthetic seal. The valve shall be suitable for 12 kg /cm2
pressure.

5.3 All guage cocks shall be of gunmetal plug type, complete with
siphon (brass chrome plated).

5.4 All drain valves shall be of gunmetal with a hose union connection
of one hand.

5.5 All valves on the return line of fan coil units shall be as in 5.6 but
without integral water strainer.

6. Balancing Valves :

6.1 The balancing valves upto 80 mm dia shall be of gunmetal screwed

type confirming to b.s. 5154 or equivalent specifications.

6.2 The valve shall be cast gunmetal astm b-62 and complete with non
rising spindle. ptfe disc seal cast metal hand wheel.

6.3 The port opening shall permit precise regulation of flow rate, by
accurately measuring the pressure drop across the port.
6.4 The valve shall be complete with two ports for connections to a
mercury manometer to measure the pressure drop, as well as a drain
port.

6.5 The spindle shall have a shielded screw to set the flow at the
desired level.

6.6 This valve shall be used wherever specified.

7. Strainers:

7.1 The strainers shall either be pot type or `y' type with cast iron or
fabricated steel body tested upto pressure applicable for the valves as
shown on the drawings.

7.2 The strainers shall have a perforated bronze sheet screen with 3
mm perforation and with a permanent magnet to catch iron fillings.

7.3 Pot strainers shall be provided with flanged connections and `y'
strainers shall be provided with flanged ends.

7.4 The strainers shall be designed to facilitate easy removal of filter

screen for cleaning, without disconnection of pipe line.

8. Jointing:

8.1 All pipe lines shall be welded type.

8.2 Square cut plain ends will be welded for pipes upto and including
100 mm dia.

8.3 All pipes 125 mm dia or larger will be bevelled by 35 deg before
welding.

9. Miscellaneous:

9.1 Provide all pipe work as required to make the apparatus connected
complete and ready for regular and safe operation. Unless otherwise
noted connect all apparatus and equipment in accordance with
manufacturer's standard details, as approved by engineer-in-charge.

9.2 Unless otherwise specified, pitch the lines of piping as follows: -

All condensation drainage, including air handling unit and fan coil unit
shall be pitched in the direction of flow to ensure adequate drainage, with
an adequate trap seal to prevent leakage of air due to static pressure
developed by air conditioning units. Pitch, 20 mm per metre wherever
possible, but not less than 10 mm per metre.
 Drains from other equipment shall be pitched similarly without trap
seal.

9.3 Provide necessary valves (included in piping) and capped

connections for all low points in piping system, where necessary or
required for draining systems. Provide isolating valves & drain valves in
all risers to permit repairs without interfering with the rest of the system.
9.4 During construction, temporarily close, open ends of pipes with
sheet metal caps, where necessary, or required to prevent debris from
entering the piping system.

9.5 Support piping independently of all equipment so that the

equipment is not stressed by the piping weight or expansion.

9.6 To facilitate the maintenance, repair and replacement:

9.6.1 Provide shut-off valves where indicated and for individual

equipment, units at inlet and outlet, to permit unit removal for repairs,
without interfering with the remainder of the system. Additional shut-off
valves shall be provided as required to enable all systems to be fully
sectionalized. By-pass and stop valves shall be provided for all automatic
control valves as specified.

9.6.2 Arrange piping for maximum accessibility for maintenance and

repair, locate valves for easy access and operation. No valves shall be
installed with handles pointing down, unless unavoidable.

9.6.3 Cut the pipes accurately according to measurements, established at

building site & work into place without springing or forging.

9.6.4 Pipe supports shall be adjustable for height and primecoated with
rust preventive paint & finish coated with grey paint, both as approved by
engineer-in-charge. The spacing of pipe supports shall not be more than
that specified below: -

Nominal pipe size mm Spacing (metres)

15 ... ... 1.25

20 & 25 ... ... 2.00

32, 30, 50 & 65 ... ... 2.50

80,100 & 125 ... ... 2.50

150 & above ... ... 3.00

9.6.6.Extra supports shall be provided at the bends and at heavy fittings
like valves to avoid undue stresses on the pipes. Pipe hangers shall be
fixed on walls and ceiling by means of metallic approved dash fasteners.

9.6.7 Insulated piping shall be supported in such a manner as not to put

undue pressure on the insulation.

9.6.8 Where pipes are to be buried under ground, they should be coated
with one coat of bituminous paint. The top of the pipes shall not be less
that 75 cms. From the ground level. Where this is not practical permission
of engineer-in-charge shall be obtained for burying the pipes at lesser
depth. The pipes shall be surrounded on all sides by sand cushions of not
less than 15 cms. after the pipes have been laid and top sand cushions
provided, the trench shall be refilled with the excavated soil, excess soil
shall be removed from the site of work by the contractor.

10. Hangers & Supports:

10.1 Hangers and supports shall be provided and installed for all piping
and tubing wherever indicated, required or otherwise specified. Wherever
necessary, additional hangers and supports shall be provided to prevent
vibration or excessive deflection of piping and tubing.

10.2 All hangers and supports shall be made of steel or other durable
and non-combustible materials, galvanized or plated. Wood wire or
perforated strap iron shall not be used as permanent hangers or supports.

10.3 Hangers shall be supported from structural steel, concrete inserts &
pipe racks, as specifically approved.

10.4 No hangers shall be secured to underside of light weight roof

decking and light weight floor glass.

10.5 Mechanical equipment shall be suspended midway between steel

joists and panel points.

10.6 Drilling or punching of holes in steel joist members will not be

permitted.

11. Sleeves:

11.1 Where pipes pass through floors, walls, etc provide galvanized steel
pipe sleeves 50 mm larger than outside diameter of pipe. Where pipes are
insulated, sleeves shall be large enough to ample clearance for insulation.

11.2 Where pipes pass through outside walls or foundations, the space
between pipe and sleeve shall be caulked with lead wool and oakum.
11.3 The centre of pipes shall be in the centre of sleeves, and sleeves
shall be flush with the finished surface.

12. Expansion or Contraction:

12.1 The contractor shall provide for expansion and contraction of all
piping installed by the use of swing connections and expansion loops.

13. Arrangement and Alignment of Piping:

13.1 All piping shall be arranged and aligned in accordance with the
drawings as specified. Where special conditions are encountered in the
field, the arrangement and alignment of piping shall be as directed by the
engineer-in-charge.

13.2 The piping shall be installed in a uniform manner, parallel to or

perpendicular to walls or ceilings, and all changes in directions shall be
made with fittings.The horizontal piping shall be run at right angles and
shall not run diagonally across rooms or other piping. Wherever possible
all piping shall be arranged to provide maximum head room.
13.3 All piping shall be installed as directly as possible between
connecting points in so far as the work of other trades permits. Where
interference occurs with another trade whose work is more difficult to
route this contractor shall reroute his pipes as required to avoid
interference, at the discretion of the engineer-in-charge.

13.4 All piping shall be carefully installed to provide for proper

alignment, slope and expansion.

13.5 The stresses in pipe lines shall be guided and pipes shall be
supported in such a manner that pipe lines shall not creep, sag or buckle.

13.6 Anchors and supports shall be provided wherever necessary to

prevent any misalignment of piping.

13.7 Small tubing gauges, controls or other equipment installed on any

apparatus, shall not be coiled nor excessive in length, but shall be
installed neatly, carefully bent at all changes in direction, secured in place
and properly fastened to equipment at intervals to prevent sagging.

13.8 The piping shall be grouped where ever practical and shall be
installed uniformly in straight parallel lines in either vertical or horizontal
positions.

14. Testing:

14.1 In general, tests shall be applied to piping before connection of

equipment and appliances. In no case shall the piping, equipment or
appliances be subjected to pressures exceeding their test ratings.
14.2 The tests shall be completed and approved before any insulation is
applied. Testing of segments of pipe work will be permitted, provided all
open ends are first closed, by blank-offs or flanges.

14.3 After tests have been completed the system shall be drained and
flushed 3 to 4 times and cleaned of all dust and foreign matter. All
strainers, valves and fittings shall be cleaned of all dirt, fillings and debris.

14.4 All piping shall be tested to hydraulic test pressure of at least one
and half times the maximum operating pressure but not less than 10
kg/sq.cm for a period of not less than 12 hours. All leaks and defects in
the joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified to the satisfaction
of the engineer-in-charge, without any extra cost.

14.5 All the piping systems shall be tested in the presence of the
engineer-in-charge or their authorised representative. Advance notice of
test dates shall be given and all equipments, labour, materials required
for inspection, and repairs during the test shall be provided by the
contractor. A test shall be repeated till the entire systems are found to be
satisfactory to the above authority. The tests shall be carried out for a
part of work if required by engineer-in-charge in order to avoid
hinderance in the work of the insulation contractor.

14.6 All steam and condensate pipes shall be tested and proven tight
under hydrostatic pressure of 20 kg/sq.cm, unless otherwise stated, for a
minimum period of 4 hours without drop in pressure.
14.7 Miscellaneous piping, tests with air at 10.5 kg/sq.cm for a minimum
of 24 hours without drop in pressure.

14.8 The contractor shall make sure that proper noseless circulation is
achieved through all piping systems. If due to poor bond, proper
circulation is not achieved, the contractor shall bear all expenses for
carrying out the rectification work including finishing of floors, walls and
ceiling damaged in the process of rectifications.

14.9 The contractor shall provide all labours and materials to make
provision for removing water and throwing it at the proper place, during
the testing or/and after the testing to avoid damages to employer or
other contractors ' properties. Any damages caused by the contractor to
the employer or other contractors’ properties, shall be borne by the
contractor.

15.0 Copper Piping:

15.1 Heavy gauge soft copper tubing, type m shall be used to make
connections to equipment, wherever required or specified by
engineer-in-charge.
15.2 Flare fittings e.g. flare nuts, tees, elbows, reducers etc. shall all be
of brass.

16. Refrigerant Piping:

16.1 The refrigerant circuit piping shall be heavy class m.s the fittings
shall be heavy class. The pipes and fittings shall be connected by means
of welded joints. The connections to gauges, controls etc. shall be with
soft copper tubing and flare fittings.

16.2 The refrigerant valves, required in the circuit shall be as follows.

Valve Size Valve Material Type of Connections

16.2.1 upto 12 mm brass/packless type flare fittings

16.2.2 16mm & above brass/steel packed type brazed/welded

note :- all valves shall be tested against leaks upto 20 kg/sq.cm.

16.3 The strainers for the refrigerant liquid line shall be `y' type with
gun metal body and bronze filter screen of fine mesh. The filter screen
shall be easily removable type without dismantling the strainer from the
circuit.

16.4 The moisture indicator in the liquid line shall have leak proof glass
on opposite sides to permit easy inspection of the liquid refrigerant.

17. Drain Piping :

17.1 The drain piping shall be medium class galvanised steel as per is
1239/1979.

17.2 The fittings shall be of `R' brand or equal forged with screwed
connections.

17.3 The gate valves (included in piping ) shall be of gun metal as

described earlier.
17.4 Pipe crosses shall be provided at bends, to permit easy cleaning of
drain line.

17.5 The drain line shall be provided up to the nearest drain trap and
pitched towards the trap.

17.6 Drain lines shall be provided at all the lowest points in the system,
as well as at equipments, where leakage of water is likely to occur, or to
remove condensate and water from pump glands.

18. Painting :
18.1 All pipes supports, hangers, etc., shall be given two coats of red
oxide primer.

18.2 All pipes, which are not to be insulated, shall then be given one
coat of finish paint, of a type and colour, as approved by the
engineer-in-charge.
 INSULATION

1. General :

The insulation of water piping, air handling units, ducting, chillers etc.,
shall be carried out as per specifications given below :

2. Materials :

The materials to be used for insulation shall be as follows, unless some

other material is specifically mentioned elsewhere.

2.1 Pipe Insulation :

The insulation for chilled water and drain piping, chillers, pump etc. shall
be carried out from `TF' quality expanded polystyrene having a `K'
value of 0.014 kcal/hr/oc. at mean temperature of 10oc. and a density of
24 to 28 kgs/ cub. m.

2.2 Other Insulation

2.2.1 The material for acoustic treatment of ducts, rooms, roofs etc. shall
be resin bonded fibre glass, as described earlier, conforming to i.s. 8183
of 1976. the density of fibre glass shall be 32 kg/cub.m and the material
shall be in the form of slabs of uniform density. The `K' value at 10oc.
shall not be less than 0.028 kcal/mhr/oc. Facing shall be provided with
0.5 mm perforated aluminium sheet held with G.I. nuts bolts or nailed to
the batten work as required.

2.2.2 The materials for duct insulation shall be resin bonded glass wool,
as described earlier but conforming to i.s. 8183 of 1976. The density of
insulation shall not be less than 24 kg/cub/m. and material shall be in the
foam of blankets/rolls of uniform thickness. The `K' value at 10oc. shall
not be less than 0.03 kcal/mhr/oc.

3. Air Handling Units:

3.1 The casing of the sheet metal type air handling unit from the
beginning of the fan section till the end of the coil section, including the
drain pan, shall all be insulated.

3.2 The insulation shall be 12 mm polyethelene flexible sheets.

3.3 The insulation shall first be fixed to the casing by applying cold
sticking compound both to the surface and the insulation and all joints
shall be sealed completely.

4. Cold Equipment Insulation:

4.1 The complete shell of the chiller as well as its two heads, the chilled
water pumps ,and high pressure AHUSs shall all be insulated.

4.2 The insulation shall be `TF' quality expanded polystyrene as below :

i) Chillers - 100 mm

ii) High pressure AHUs - 50 mm

iii) Chilled water pumps - 50 mm

4.3 All insulation excepting chiller heads shall be covered with 0.63
mm12 mm wire netting and finished with 12 mm thick sand cement
plaster.

4.4 The insulation on the two end heads of the chiller shall be covered
with 0.80 mm g.i. casing to permit easy removal.

4.5 Insulation (Chiller)

4.5.1 The cooler surface shall first be cleaned with wire brush.

4.5.2 Then one layers of cold setting compound shall be applied.

4.5.3 The insulation shall then be fixed in two layers, staggering the joints
and sealing them with cold setting adhessive.

4.5.4 The insulation shall then be covered with 0.63 mm 19 mm mesh

wire netting which shall be fixed to the insulation with brass `U' nails.

4.5.5 The final finish shall be12 mm sand cement plaster which shall be
applied in two layers of 6 mm each and trovelled to a smooth round
finish.

4.5.6 After the insulation is fixed on the head as above, it shall then be
covered with a properly shaped jacket of 0.80 mm G.I. sheet. Pump
casing shall be finished with aluminium cladding.

4.6 Insulation (Others)

The AHUs and the chilled water pumps shall be insulated as above in 4.5
and finished with plaster excepting that the insulation of 30 mm shall be
fixed in a single layer.

5. Chilled Water Piping/Drain Piping :

5.1 The chilled water and drain pipes shall be insulated with `TF'
quality expanded polystyrene. The thickness of the insulation for chilled
water pipes will be 50 mm and for drain pipes will be 25 mm.
5.2 Preformed pipe sections shall be used for pipes upto and including
350 mm dia.

5.3 Pipes above 350 mm dia. shall be insulated with insulation slabs cut
in mitred sections.

5.4 Installation

Chilled Water and Drain Piping

5.4.1 The pipe shall be throughly cleaned with a wire brush and rendered
free from all rust and grease.

5.4.2 The pipes shall be treated with a coat of cold setting compound.

5.4.3 The insulation preformed section shall be fixed tightly to the surface
taking care to seal all joints.

5.4.4 All joints along the circumference of the pipe sections shall be
sealed with adhesive.

5.4.5 The insulation than shall be covered with 0.63 mm x 19 mm mesh

wire netting than finally finished with 12 mm sand cement plaster in two
layers of 6 mm each and troulled to a smooth round finish.

5.4.6 Insulation on pipes in areas exposed to weather or underground

shall additionaly be covered with tar-felt sheets manufactured by shalimar
tar products (1935) ltd. and fixed with G.I. wires of 1.0 mm. The tar felt
sheet shall be stuck with bitumen r 85/25.

6. Refrigerant Piping :

6.1 The suction line of refrigerant piping shall be insulated with 50 mm

thick expanded polystyrene as specified for chilled water pipe lines.

7. Ducting :

7.1 The airhandling ducts shall be insulated with resin bonded glass
wool with density not below 24 kg/cub.m.

7.2 Duct insulation thickness shall be as follows:

Duct in conditioned space - 25 mm thick

Duct in unconditioned space - 50 mm thick

Duct with treated fresh air - 50 mm thick

7.3 Installation

7.3.1 Clean the surface with a wire brush and make it free from rust and
oil.

7.3.2 Apply one coat of cold setting compound .

7.3.3 Wrap the duct with insulation blankets of the thickness mentioned
in item 7.2 above and then with 250 g polythene sheet and covered with
0.1mm thick aluminium sheet using 50 mm wide aluminium adhesive
tape of johnson make.

7.3.4 Reinforce and tie with G.I. wire of 1.0 mm at intervals of 450 mm.

7.3.5 The ducts in areas exposed to the weather shall be additionally

covered with one layer of tar felt b.h. the tar felt shall be stuck with
bitumen r 85/40 or 80/25.

8. Acoustic Lining :

8.1 The acoustic lining shall consist of 25 mm resin bonded glass wool
of density 48 kg/cub.m (min) then it shall be covered by 0.5 mm
perforated aluminium sheets having 3 mm perforation at 6 mm centres.

8.2 Installation

8.2.1 The duct surface shall first be cleaned from inside.

8.2.2 The insulation boards shall be wrapped in glass cloth of 7 mil

thickness with the end stitched.

8.2.3 Then the boards shall be fixed inside the duct.

8.2.4 The insulation shall then be covered with 0.5 mm thick perforated
aluminium sheets.

8.2.5 The sheet and the insulation shall be secured to the duct by means
of cadmium plated bolts, nuts and washers. The ends should be
completely sealed off, so that no insulation material is exposed.

9. Walls and Ceiling Acoustic Treatments of Plant Rooms and A.H.U.

Room

9.1 Material

Resin bonded glass wool of density 32 kg/cub m of 50mm thickness.

10. Installation:
10.1 Fix 40 mm x 50 mm g.i. sheet channel at 0.5 mtr interval
longitudinally then fix cross battens at1.0 mtr centre using suitable
gutties, and brass screws. The battens & gutties shall be treated with fire
retardant chemical before fixing.

10.2 Fill each rectangle with 50 mm glass wool wrapped in glass cloth.

10.3 Tie with 24 gauge G.I. wires at 300 mm intervals.

10.4 Then cover with 26 gauge (0.50 mm) perforated g.i.sheet having
3mm perforations at 6 mm centres. Overlap all joints and provide
beading of 25 mm by 2 mm flats.
 ELECTRIC WIRING

1. General :

The electric wiring of motors for compressors, pumps, air handling units
etc. As well as controls, heaters etc. and earthing of all equipment shall
be carried out as per specifications given hereunder.

2. Power Cabling for Motors, Heaters etc:

2.1 Unless otherwise specified, the power cables shall be PVC insulated,
and PVC sheathed aluminium conductor, armoured cables to 1100 V
grade conforming to IS 1554. The power cables shall be of 2 core for
single phase, 4 core for sizes upto and including 25 sq.mm, 3-1/2 core for
sizes higher than 25 sq.mm for 3 phase. Where high voltage equipments
are to be fed, the cables shall be rated for continuous operation at the
voltages to suit the same.

2.2 Power cables shall be of sizes as indicated in the tender

specifications. In all other cases, the sizes shall be as approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge, after taking into consideration the load, the length of
cabling and the type of load.

2.3 Cables shall be laid in suitable metallic trays suspended from

ceiling, or mounted on walls, or laid directly in ground or clamped on
structures, as may be required. Cable ducts shall not be provided in plant
rooms. Cable trays shall be fabricated from slotted angle/solid angles to
make ladder type cable tray, designed with adequate dimensions for
proper heat dissipation and also access to the cables. Alternatively, cable
trays may be of steel sheet with adequate structural strength and rigidity,
with necessary ventilation holes therein. In both the cases, necessary
supports and suspenders shall be provided by the Air-conditioning
Contractor as required.

2.4 Cable laying work shall be carried out in accordance with IS

1255/1967, Indian standard code of practice. The scope of work for the
Air-conditioning Contractor shall include making trenches in ground and
refilling as required, but excludes any masonry trenches for the cable
work.

3.0 CONTROL WIRING

3.1 Control wiring in the plant rooms and AHU rooms shall be done
using control wire as per IS 1554 PVC insulated and PVC sheathed, 2.5
sq.mm copper conductor, 1100 V grade, cables drawn in ISI marked steel
or PVC conduits. The control cables interconnecting the plant room and
the AHU rooms shall be of multi-core armoured type only, and suitable for
laying direct in ground.
3.2 The number and size of the control cables shall be such as to suit
the control system design adopted by the Air-conditioning Contractor.

3.3 ISI marked steel conduit pipes, wherever used, shall be of gauge
not less than 1.6 mm thick for conduits upto 32 mm dia and not less than
2.0 mm thick for higher sizes. All conduit accessories shall be threaded
type with substantial wall thickness.

3.4 Control cables shall be of adequate cross section to restrict the

voltage drop.

3.5 Runs of control wires within the switchboard shall be neatly

bunched and suitably supported/clamped. Means shall be provided for
easy identification of the control wires.

3.6 Control wiring shall correspond to the circuitry/sequence of

operations and interlocks approved by Engineer-in-Charge.

3.7 In cold storage involving temperatures below zero deg. C, polythene

cables shall be used instead of PVC cables.

4.0 Laying

4.1 The cables shall be laid, as per drawings or along a short and
convenient route between switch board and the equipment, either in
trenches, on wall or on trays.
Hangers, supported from the slab. Cable routing shall be checked
on the site to
avoid interference with structure, equipment etc. Where more than
one cables are
running close to each other, proper spacing should be provided
between them

4.2 The radius of bends of the cable should not be less than 12 times
the radius of cable to prevent undue stress and damage at the bends, the
cables should be supported and fixed on M.S. supports, when running in
trenches, wall or ceiling suspended hangers when laid under ground the
cables should be covered with sand and protected with cement concrete
covering. suitable G.I. pipe shall be used wherever cable is laid across
road, crossing of other services and when passing through R.C.C.

4.3 Wooden bushes shall be provided at the ends of pipes through

which cables are taken.

5. Earthing :

5.1 Pipe Earth Electrode

G.I. pipe shall be of medium class 40 mm dia 4.5 m long in length.
galvanising of the pipe shall conform to relevant is. G.I. pipe electrode
shall be cut tappered at the bottom and provided with holes of 12 mm dia
drilled not less than 7.5 cm from each other upto 2m of length from
bottom. The electrode shall be buried in the ground vertically with its top
not less than 20 cms below ground level.

5.2 Plate Earth Electrode

For plate electrode minimum dimensions of the electrode shall be as

under :

i. G.I. plate electrode : 60cm x 60cm x 6mm thick.

ii. Copper plate electrode: 60cm x 60cm x 3mm thick.

The electrode shall be buried in ground with its faces vertical and top not
less than 3 m below ground level.

In case of plate earth electrode a watering pipe of 20 mm dia of medium

class gi pipe shall be provided and attached to the electrode. A funnel
with mesh shall be provided on top of this pipe for watering the earth. In
case of pipe electrode a 40mm x 20mm reducer shall be used for fixing
the funnel. The watering funnel attachment shall be housed in massonary
enclosure of not less than 30cm x 30cm x 30cm. A cast iron/ms frame
with cover having locking arrangement shall be suitable embedded in the
massonary enclosure.

5.3 Loop Earthing

Loop earthing shall be providing for all mountings of main board and
other metal clad switches and db's with G.I. strip of size specified but not
less than 14 swg copper or 12 swg gi or 4 sq mm aluminium wite. The
earthing lead from electrode owner's shall be suitably protected from
mechanical injury by a 15 mm dia gi pipe in case of wire and 40 mm dia
medium class G.I. pipe in case of strip. Metallic covers or supports of all
medium pressure or ht apparatus or conductor shall in all cases be
connected to not less than two separate and distinct earths.

5.3.1 All equipment connected with electric supply shall also be provided
with double earthing continuity conductors. The size of G.I. earthing
conductors shall be :-

Earthing should be carried out as per is-3043

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Size of phase wire sq.mm Size of G.I. conductor
aluminium tape/wire (swg)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------

185 25 mm x 4 mm (strip)
 150 25 mm x 4 mm (strip)
120 20 mm x 3 mm (strip)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
Size of phase wire sq.mm Size of G.I. conductor
aluminium tape/wire (swg)
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------
95 20 mm x 3 mm (strip)
70 4 swg
50 4 swg
35 6 swg
25-6 6 swg
4 8 swg

6. Miscellaneous :

6.1 The final connections to the equipment shall be through flexible

connections where the equipment is likely to be moved back and forth,
such as on slide rails.

6.2 An isolator switch shall be provided at any motor which is separated

from the main switch panel by a wall or partition or other barrier or is
more than 15 metres away from the main panel.

6.3 Two separate and distinct earthing conduits shall be connected from
the equipment up to the main switch board panel.

6.4 The entire installation shall be tested as per electricity rules and I.S.
732-1973/is-3043 with amendments 1,2&3 prior to the commissioning of
the plant and a suitable test report furnished by competent local
authorities. The test report will be obtained by contractor himself at his
own expenses.

6.6 All exposed hangers etc. shall be given 2 coats of suitable paint of
approved colour, when all work has been completed.
 TESTS AT SITE

1. General :

The contractor must perform all inspection and tests of the system as a
whole and of components individually as required, under the supervision
of the architect, in accordance with the provisions of the applicable
ASHRAE standards or approved equal and furnish necessary test
certificates from manufacturers.

2. Compressors/Condensers/Chillers/Evaporators/Pumps etc.

2.1 Identification of materials in accordance with test certificates.

2.2 Inspection of various laboratory test certificates for physical

properties and technical composition conducted on test samples of
materials to be used for fabrication, forgings etc. for all important
components of various equipment.

2.3 Hydraulic test for various components and assembled equipments

at 1.5 times design pressure or double the operating pressure
whichever is higher.

2.4 Pneumatic leak test after assemblies at design pressure

2.5 Static and dynamic balancing on electronic precision machine for

rotating parts, links, impellor/crank shaft assemblies etc.

2.6 Inspection of assemblies and dis-assemblies of various parts of

equipments and complete equipments themselves as desired by
inspection engineer.

2.7 Noise level test for various rotating/reciprocating equipments.

2.8 Pressure drop test for condenser, chiller and evaporator.

2.9 Inspection of manufacturer's test certificates shall be supplied for all

electrical motors.

2.10 Inspection of welding including welders qualifications as desired by

inspection engineers.

2.11 For compressor assembly, electronic leak, air running test,

pneumatic test with dry nitrogen and leak test in water.

3. Air Handling Units :

3.1 Blowers
3.1.1 Identification of material in accordance with test certificates.

3.1.2 Dynamic/static balancing of impeller.

3.1.3 Performance test as per applicable codes.

3.2 Coils

3.2.1 Identification of material in accordance with test certificates.

3.2.2 Pneumatic test.

3.3 Filters

3.3.1 Manufacturer's test certificates also to be produced for the

assembled A.H.U. final dimensional check will be done. Inspection
will be done during assembly of components for quality of
workmanship, painting etc.

Piping : materials check for specifications and size.

3.4 Valves

Hyd./Pneumatic test certificates.

3.5 Motors

Manufacturer's test certificate as per motor data sheet.

3.6 Instruments and Controls

Visual examination.

4. For Associates Works at Site :

4.1 All electrical items will be subjected to inspection at any stage

during manufacturing activity. Routine electrical test as per
relevant codes. Inspection of manufacturer's test certificates.

4.2 Inspection of raw materials to be used for fabrication and assembly

and inspection of manufacturer's certificates.

4.3 Inspection of welding including welders qualification as desired by

inspection engineers. Inspection of fabricated items.

4.4 Pressure testing of pipe fit used for the refrigerant and water
services.
4.5 Pressure testing, leak testing of complete piping network for chilled
water. Condenser water and refrigerant/services.

4.6 Vacummissing and gas/oil charging for refrigeration system.

4.7 Checking of electrical circuits (power & controls) and checking

functioning of controls of refrigerant systems and other circuits of
air conditioning plant.

4.8 Checking of calibration of controls and instrumentation

4.9 Checking of assemblies for electrical control panel, instruments

panels, local panels (dimensional and functional) annunciator panels
etc.

4.10 Inspection of complete electrical installation at site.

4.11 Installation of main equipments like compressor, condenser, chiller,

evaporator.

4.12 Performance testing of completes A/C plant as per specifications.

5. The above inspection procedure is given for general guidance and

information of vendors and inspection of purchaser/consultant is
strictly not limited to these and inspection engineer of
purchaser/consultant will have full right to have detailed inspection
at any stage right from placement of order to completion of project
as desired by inspection engineer, co-ordination of inspection
agency of purchaser/consultant with his factory/sub-vendor's
factory/erection site will be the sole responsibility of successful
vendor after placement of order for complete air conditioning plant
covered under these technical specifications.

6. Piping System :

6.1 In general pressure tests shall be applied to piping only before

connection of equipment and applicances. In no case shall piping,
equipment or appliances be subjected to pressure exceeding their
test ratings.

6.2 Tests shall be completed and approved before any insulation is

applied.

6.3 After tests have been completed, the system shall be drained and
cleaned of all dust and foreign matter. All strainers, valves and
fittings shall be cleaned of all dirt, fittings, and debris.

6.4 Water Piping

 All water piping shall be tested and proven tight under hydrostatic
pressure of 1 1/2 times the design pressure unless stated otherwise
in the specifications. Prescribed pressure shall be maintained for
four hours.

7. Duct Work:

7.1 All branches and outlets shall be tested for air quantity, and the
total of the air quantities shall be within plus five percent (5%) of
fan capacity.

7.2 Fire dampers, volume dampers and splitter dampers shall be tested
for proper operation.

8. Balancing and Adjustment:

All air handling ventilation equipment, duct work and outlets shall
be adjusted and balanced to deliver the specified air quantities
indicated, at each inlet and outlet, on the drawings. If these air
quantities cannot be delivered without exceeding the speed range of
the sheaves or the available horse power, the architect shall be
notified before proceeding with the balancing of air distribution
system.

9. Electrical Equipment:

9.1 All electrical equipment shall be cleaned and adjusted on site before
application of power.
9.2 The following tests shall be carried out :

9.2.1 Wire and cable continuity tests.

9.3 Insulation resistance tests, phase to phase and phase to earth, on

all circuits and equipment, using a 500 volt meggar. The meggar
reading shall be not less than one mega ohm.

9.4 Earth resistance between conduit system and earth must not
exceed half (1/2) chm.

9.5 Phasing out and phase rotation tests.

9.6 Operating tests on all protective relays to prove their correct

operation before energising the main equipment.

9.7 Operating tests on all starters, circuit breakers, etc.

10. Performance Tests:

10.1 The installation as a whole shall be balanced and tested upon
completion, and all relevant information, including the following
shall be submitted to the architects.

10.1.1 Air volume passing through each unit, duct, grilles, aperatures.

10.1.2 Differential pressure readings across each filter, fan and coil, and
through each pump.

10.1.3 Static pressure in each air duct.

10.1.4 Electrical current readings, in amperes of full and average load

running, and starting, together with name plate current of each
electrical motor.

10.1.5Continuous recording over a specified period, of ambient wet and

dry bulb temperatures under varying degrees of internal heat loads
and use and occupation, in each zone of each part of the building.

10.2 Daily records should be maintained of hourly readings, taken under

varying degrees of internal heat load and use and occupation, of
wet and dry bulb temperatures, upstream "on-coil" of each cooling
coil. Also suction temperatures and pressures for each refrigerating
unit. The current and voltage drawn by each machine.

10.3 Any other readings shall be taken which may subsequently be

specified by the architect.

11. Miscellaneous:

11.1 The above tests are mentioned herein for general guidance and
information only but not by way of limitation to the provisions of
conditions of contract and specification.

11.2 The date of commencement of all tests listed above shall be subject
to the approval of the architect, and in accordance with the
requirements of this specification.

11.3 The contractor shall supply the skilled staff and all necessary
instruments and carry out any test of any kind on a piece of
equipment, apparatus, part of system or on a complete system if
the architect requests such a test for determining specified or
guaranteed data as given in the specification or on the drawings.

11.4 Any damage resulting from the tests shall be repaired and/or
damaged material replaced, all the satisfaction of the Engineer.

11.5 In the event of any repair or any adjustment having to be made,

other than normal running adjustment, the tests shall be void and
 shall be recommended after the adjustment or repairs have been
completed.

11.6 The contractor must inform the architect when such tests are to be
made, giving sufficient notice, in order that the architect or his
nominated representative may be present.

11.7 Complete records of all tests must be kept and 3 copies of these
and location drawings must be furnished to the architect.

11.8 The contractor may be required to repeat the test as required,

should the ambient conditions at the time not given, in the opinion
of the architect, sufficient and suitable indication of the effect and
performance of the installation as a whole or of any part, as
required.
 MODE OF MEASUREMENTS

1. Unit Prices in the Schedule of Quantities:

1.1 The item description in the schedule of quantities is in the form of a

condensed resume. The unit price shall be held to include every
thing necessary to complete the work covered by this item in
accordance with the specifications and drawings. The sum total of
all the individual item prices shall represent the total price of the
installation ready to be handed over.

1.2 The unit price of the various items shall include the following :

1.2.1 All equipment, machinery, apparatus and materials required as well

as the cost of any tests which the consultant may request in
addition to the tests generally required to prove quality and
performance of equipment.

1.2.2 All the labour required to supply and install the complete installation
in accordance with the specifications.

1.2.3 Use of any tools, equipment, machinery, lifting tackle, scaffolding,

ladders etc. Required by the contractor to carry out his work.

1.2.4 All the necessary measures to prevent the transmission of vibration.

1.2.5 The necessary material to isolate equipment foundations from the

building structure, wherever necessary.

1.2.6 Storage and insurance of all equipment apparatus and materials.

1.3 The contractor's unit price shall include all equipment, apparatus,
material and labour indicated in the drawings and/or specifications
in conjunction with the item in question, as well as all additional
equipment, apparatus, material and labour usual and necessary to
make in question on its own (and within the system as a whole)
complete even though not specifically shown, described or
otherwise referred to.

2. Measurements of Sheet Metal Ducts, Grilles/Diffusers etc.

2.1 Sheet Metal Ducts

2.1.1 All duct measurements shall be taken as per actual outer duct
surface area including bends, tees, reducers, collars, vanes & other
fittings. Gaskets, nuts, bolts, vibration rotation pads are included in
the basic duct items of the boq.
2.1.2 The unit of measurements shall be the finished sheet metal surface
area in metres squares. No extra shall be allowed for lapse and
wastages.

2.1.3 All the guide vanes, deflectors in duct elbows, branches, grille
collars quadrant dampers etc. shall be measured for actual sheet
metal surface and paid for at the same rate as duct of same
thickness.

2.1.4 The unit duct price shall include all the duct hangers and supports,
exposing of concrete reinforcement for supports and making good
of the same as well as any materials and labour required to
complete the duct frame.

2.2 Grilles/Diffusers

All grilles/diffusers as per tender requirements shall be treated as a

lump sum item. Where extra grilles diffusers are ordered upto
award of work, they should be measured as follows :

2.2.1 All measurements of grilles/diffusers shall be the actual neck size

excluding the outer flanges.

2.2.2 The square or rectangular grilles/diffusers shall be measured in

plain sq.m.

2.2.3 All round diffusers shall be measured by their diameters in cm.

2.2.4 All linear diffusers shall be measured as per actual length in metres.

3. Measurements of Piping, Fittings, Valves, Fabricated Items:

3.1 Pipe

Including water piping, steam piping and all other piping required to
be executed at site for completion of the works.

3.1.1 All pipes shall be measured in linear metre (to the nearest cm)
along the axis of the pipes and rates shall be inclusive of all fittings
e.g. tees, bends, reducers, elbows etc. deduction shall be made for
valves in the line.

3.1.2 Exposing reinforcement in wall and ceiling and floors of possible and
making good the same or installing anchor fasteners and inclusive
of all items as specified in specifications and schedule of quantities.

3.1.3 Rates quoted shall be inclusive of providing and fixing vibration

pads and wooden pieces, wherever specified or required by the
project co-ordinator.
3.1.4 Flexible connections, wherever required or specified shall be
measured as part of straight length of same diameter, with no
additional allowance being made for providing the same.

3.1.5 The length of the pipe for the purpose of payment will be taken
through the centreline of the pipe and all fittings (e.g. tees, bends,
reducers, elbows, etc.) as through the fittings are also presumed to
be pipe lengths. Nothing extra whatsoever will be paid for over and
above for the fittings for valves and flanges, section 3.2 below
applies.

3.2 Valves and Flanges

3.2.1 All the extra ci & cm flanged valves shall be measured according to
the nominal size in mm and shall be measured by number. Such
valves shall not be counted as part of pipe length hence deduction
in pipe length will be made wherever valves occur.

3.2.2 All gun metal (gate & globe) valves shall include two Nos. of flanges
and two numbers 150 mm long ms nipples, with one side threaded
matching one of the valves, and other welded to the M.S.
slip-on-flange. Rate shall also include the necessary number of
bolts, nuts and washers, 3 mm thick insertion gasket of required
temp. grade and all items specified in the specifications.

3.2.3 The rates quoted shall be inclusive of making connections to the

equipment, tanks, pumps etc. and the connection made with an
installed pipe line shall be included in the rates as per the b.o.q.

3.3 Structural Supports

Structural supports including supports fabricated from pipe lengths

for pipes shall be measured as part of pipe line and hence no
separate payment will be made. Rates shall be inclusive of hoisting,
cutting, jointing, welding, cutting of holes and chases in walls,
slabs or floors, painting supports and other items as described in
specifications, drawings and schedule of quantities or as required at
site by project co-ordinator.

3.4 Copper Connections for Fan Coil Units

3.4.1 Copper connection assembly for making connections to the fan coil
units shall be measured, as part of the fan coil unit price and shall
include brass flare nuts, brass straight connector, brass tees, brass
reducting fittings, fixing of automatic 3 way valve, making
connections and leak testing, complete assembly as per
specifications and drawings. Nothing extra shall be payable on
account of any variation in the length of copper pipe.
4. Insulation:

4.1 The measurement for vessels, piping, and ducts shall be made over
the bare uninsulated surface area of the metal.

4.2 Pipes, Ducts & Vessels

4.2.1 Pipes

The measurements for installation of piping shall be made in linear

metres through all valves, flanges, and fittings. Pipes/bends shall be
measured along the centreline radius between tangent points. If the
outer radius is r1 and the inner radius is r2 the centre line radius
shall be measured as (r1+r2)/2. Measurement of all valves, flanges
and fittings shall be measured with the running metre of pipe line as
if they are also pipe lengths. Nothing extra over the above shall be
payable for insulation over valves, flanges and fittings in pipe
line/routings. Fittings that connect two or more different sizes of
pipe shall be measured.

4.2.2 Ducts

The measurements for insulation of ducts shall be made in actual

square metres of bare uninsulated duct surface through all
dampers, flanges and fittings. In case of bends the area shall be
worked out by taking an average of inner and outer lengths of the
bends. Measurements for the dampers, flanges, fittings shall be for
the surface dimension for the connecting duct, nothing extra over
the above shall be payable for insulation over dampers, flanges and
fittings in duct routing.

4.2.3 Vessels

The area of standard dished and flat ends of vessels shall be the
square of the diameter of the uninsulated body of the shell. Areas
for other shapes shall be the actual calculated area. There shall be
no deduction or additions for nozzles, handles ribs, dampers,
expansion joints etc. All projections on vessels or tanks shall be
measured separately as pipe/duct.

4.3 Accessories Insulation

4.3.1 The unit of measurement for accessories such as expansion tank,

pumps, chiller heads etc. shall be uninsulated are in square metres.

4.3.2 In case of curved or irregular surfaces, measurements shall be

taken along the curves.
4.3.3 The unit insulation price shall include all necessary adhesives,
vapour proofing and finishing materials as well as additional labour
and material required for fixing the insulation.

4.4 Acoustic Duct Lining

4.4.1 In case of acoustic lining of air ducts, measurements of the bare

inside duct surface in square metres shall be final for billing
purposes.

4.4.2 The insulation/acoustic panels shall include cost of battens,

supports, adhesives, vapour proofing, finished tiles/boards/sheets
as well as additional labour and materials required for completing
the work.
 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT

S.No Description Unit Condition of Services

1. Water Chilling Unit :( Scroll Type with water cooled Condenser)

1.1.1 Type --- Scroll Type

1.1.2 Quantity Nos. 3 (2 Working + 1 Stand By)

1.1.3 Capacity (each) TR 40

1.1.4 Refrigerant R134

1.2 Motor (Per Unit)

1.2.1 Type Double Wound Sq. Cage

1.2.2 Rating Kw To suit above

1.2.3 Qty.of comp. & motor per m/c Nos. Minimum three

1.2.4 Starting Current Amps not to exceed 2 times

the full load current
1.2.5 (IKW/TR)for chiller 1.2 (maximum)

1.4 Chiller (Per Unit)

1.4.1 Water quantity usgpm 96

1.4.2 Water temp in oc 12.8

1.4.3 Water temp out oc 7.2

1.4.4 Pressure drop m 5

1.4.5 Fouling factor (fps) 0.0005

1.4 Condenser (Per Unit)

1.4.1 Water quantity usgpm 160

1.4.2 Water temp in oc 32.2

1.4.3 Water temp out oc 36.3

1.4.4 Pressure drop m 5

1.4.5 Fouling factor (fps) 0.001

2. Hot water generator

Design Features
Application Monsoon Reheat/Winter Heating
Minimum capacity 50 KW
Location Plant room
Numbers Required 2nos.
Water Flow Rate 85 Usgpm

Water Temperature

Out 48.8 Deg C

In 46.6 Deg C

3.0 Pumps

3.1 End Suction Back Pull Out Chilled Water Pump

a. Type : End suction back pull out Vertical discharge

type

b. Quantity (No.) : 3 (2 W + 1 stand by)

c. Capacity, USGPM : 96

d. Operating Head, m wg. : 20

e. Speed RPM : 1450

f. Motor H.P. : to suit duty

g. Motor type : TEFC

h. Power supply : 415 V/50Hz/3Ph/AC

3.2 End Suction Back Pull Out Condenser Water Pump

a. Type : End suction back pull out Vertical

discharge type

b. Quantity (No.) : 2 (1 W + 1 stand by)

Capacity, USGPM : 160

d. Operating Head, m wg. : 18

e. Speed RPM : 1450

f. Motor H.P. : to suit duty

g. Motor type : TEFC

h. Power supply : 415 V/50Hz/3Ph/AC

 4.0 Double Skin Air handling Unit:

TYPE

AIR FM/CS Static

No. of Rows Filteration
AHU TAG NO. AREA SERVED QTY ( Floor pressure
deep Levels
CFM mounted/ (mm wg)
ceiling
suspended)
Ground Floor
CSU-GF-01 Post operative 3200 CS 4 80 2
CSU -GF -02 Pre operative 2600 CS 4 35 1
CSU -GF-03 Nursery 2300 CS 4 35 1
CSU -GF-04 Labor room 1600 CS 4 35 1
AHU -GF-05 OT 2500 FM 6+2 125 3
First Floor
AHU-FF-02 OT-1 2500 FM 6+2 125 3
AHU-FF-03 OT-2 3800 FM 6+2 125 3
AHU-FF-04 OT-3 2200 FM 6+2 125 3
AHU-FF-05 OT-4 2000 FM 6+2 125 3
Doctor’s, lounge
AHU-FF-06 corridor, 8250 FM 4 50 1
preparation etc.
CSU-FF-05 Post operative 2200 CS 4 80 2
CSU -FF -06 Pre operative 2200 CS 4 40 1

5. HIGH WALL SPLIT AIR CONDITIONER

a) Capacity (tons) 1.5TR 2TR

b) Air Qty (cfm) 600 800

c) No of rows of coil (Minimum) 3 3

d) No. of fins/cm of coil 5 5

6. WINDOW AIRCONDITIONER

a) Capacity (tons) 1.0TR 1.5TR 2TR

b) Air Qty (cfm) 400 600 800

c) No of rows of coil (Minimum) 4 4 4

d) No. of fins/cm of coil 5 5 5